Home

HP LaserJet 4200/4250/4300/4350 series Printers Service Manual

1.
2.
3. 2 o o 2 gt s 5 o E e E i f i S 5 Lb AG FE ZS 25 ae n Dat dvo ES H SS E ra O
4. l 90 90 90 99 90 90 90 I Od JaAUp oep Jaded osues vepns l ZPORBRRSSQELLSRRS ROIZ SS RINNNOUO RR R O00 o a o Od J9 up pme jede 9 Sd I d mes jedeg I f f n fi 1 fi i i Jepaey edojoAu3 40 Od JeAlp Jepee Jaded yun jeuueos iese Weoin t t t t t t t t t t t t Gu 1 p L2 UK L vn sl I reer ys 8 DHEIDEE Jojoui Toer ep ged oorr I 1euueog eut jose I epee aded coer l T gt eor EG EE i
5. Mp AL seuous D sosuas 82d Jal oxU0D oepIA I epes edojonu3 l x2ap Jaded 10 Japaay edeg ere jaded 4osuas svens xuOxcOoxcgOxUOXxVCOxCOOxUQ Od ap Od 1enup xoep 1 d lolsd GE t An soa lonipsepeesedeg mess yun jeuueos 1ose 1 weoir H t lI i IER Gg E DE LZE ou B6 Toer IE 100i ae A Latest ded 208 1jeuueog Jenup Jee Kee Gy eorr eru agorir i l t t 4 visor l soer goer DOLFPOSMOSDOSHOSDOSTOSRDOSVOSDIOSTOSUOS VOSA nent EE EECH ii Soto Eon o Lay E 100004LL55h5555599935999005020000220549007573 ERN E EEN or 222223292928005bbbb55338088898228088888288822832733 B BESSER aso o099980220222222222000 9395 gs Qs LXXX 50 ae 9 gasoir ie Od eieipeuueju vasur gasir vasoir TL I
6. 2 o o 2 gt s 5 o E e E i f i S 5 Lb AG FE ZS 25 ae n Dat dvo ES H SS E ra OF 6 LnOdd SS A Te e 53 ui c z 6 8 IHdl 3 9 SS zg SS 2 s y 8 L ZOON ks 25 Ss 2 aw 1 Jeo6 o 2 S Z 9 ZOGA ga 83 22 SW101 J905 n 5 E E 9 E ZINO ZS agi Speer IRE 5 S LIN E g a O6 YF NS PS104 Q Gun J905M quen 7 sHs ehz 10am fa SL101 Sun c rz ET Jf8DA b A oF STI 100A ERE SL SL G t oe E 7 Ji18D H S m lee TS reu TN a H pz 5 5 E fo N FER EM sde J88 Zand 924 a e Sn 5 EH ge ke Jeder E 5 zm mg Ig 8 TA L SHHS he E EIS Z0 g H 5 rH Sons BEL Eu mg SS SS 24 zZ OOVWS zoo x2 ag E z STI ges Dasz D 2 DEI t L 3909 GI a Eg 5 e g S 5 i x P e EJ e 3 3 2 an9 PEN Fiag a aA 5 GM ra BRE z Olio g Je 8109 ano 6 s H c FE Z v09 4 2 enm e E AGE gt T L ano 8 Tg t A S axLiol SZ VI T QNO Z Z y K E s IS E SOV H 9 S 5 8 EE E e E a uve Ss 2 22 m Spam n 5 uve 2 17 2 SC 228 oe S 2 ure VELIT
7. Jojow 19660f Josues uonisod awoy 1e66or COLLSd Jojow pao ZOLLW alle Jojow oppe HEB seg GIN Teller TESLLL tjejz jt S t E e ILizisivIs Lii Haret AETA JN HE HAEZLL arZLLr aEzZLLr SOLLr LLLLr DIELS ree 1 z e v s e 7 2 PEE Tnm CCCCE C TOUUUU OOOO ooooo2o v OOOO gt ow Zenn TOO on OZzoz owr I OU o 9 ZOZO TV ZOzo 0 0 0 o ejdeis E Zz o o SS co Do Cox IZ iX r zo IZorzo KSE Sch roD VODVOD S Y 2 H c I 9 S v 2 l 20200 80LLr ELLLr zanr EEB rnr DEH aSzZLLr xj E xj l EFEEPFE yaqszip FOLL d ZOLLSd sz ge Josues N 4osues jaded Aas BuibeBuesip TSCLES Joo Aaner zje Oclir Ir l e y s e LOLLSd i905 35 Josues uonisod woy ajppeq Oo DD Figure 7 35 Stapler stacker accessory wiring diagram 435 Printer and accessory wiring diagrams Dc controller connectors diagram Figure 7 36 Dc controller connectors diagram 436 7 Troubleshooting General timing diagrams The following sections contain timing diagrams for the printer General timing diagrams 437 S xoiddy bel ja S xo1dd S Odd ei S Xoiddy el ZH LH 1929y Bus seq juud Sg joeus ueewjeg serq wy Du Eet a NN Wo Xoiddy S 9ro xoiddy l L O x
8. Laser scanner assembly LJ 4200 RM1 0045 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Laser scanner assembly LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1067 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Laser scanner assembly LJ 4300 RM1 0113 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Lifter drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0033 020CN Internal components 3 of 3 Lifter drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1074 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Lifter drive assembly 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 1136 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Lifter drive assembly 500 sheet feeder RM1 1094 000CN 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Limiter torque RC1 3335 000CN 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Main drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0001 030CN Main drive assembly Main drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 also see Figure 8 10 RM1 0001 030CN Internal components 1 of 3 Main drive assembly Main drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1066 000CN Main drive assembly Main drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 10 RM1 1066 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Main drive assembly Media size sensor assembly 500 sheet feeder RM1 0041 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Microswitch top cover WC4 5139 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Motor main M101 10 pin LJ4200 4300 RH7 1570 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Motor main M101 10 pin LJ4250 4350 RK2 0272 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Motor print cartridge M102 8 pin LJ 4250 435
9. SW102 i 3120 Bi 6 22 c E PS107 s 120 RU sig i Y d Ea CAN Re abs 48 ERO du d ai Oy Gg 26 CREE 19 Figure 8 7 Internal components 2 of 3 8 Parts and diagrams 466 Table 8 9 Internal components 2 of 3 Ref 1 10 12 12 13 14 15 16 16 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 25 26 27 29 Description Rod switch Guide scanner cable Guide scanner cable Gear 18t Shaft retard drive Sensor top bin full stack PS 104 PS 107 LJ 4200 4300 Sensor stack PS 107 LJ 4250 4350 Gear 23t Bushing Laser scanner assembly LJ 4200 Laser scanner assembly LJ 4250 4350 Laser scanner assembly LJ 4300 Bushing feed shaft Cable laser LJ 4200 4300 Cable laser LU 4250 4350 Screw s m3x8 E ring Screw rs m3x10 Solenoid tray 2 pickup LJ 4200 4300 Solenoid tray 2 pickup LJ 4250 4350 Pickup sensor cable assembly LJ4200 4300 Pickup sensor cable assembly LJ4250 4350 Roller paper pickup Roller paper feed Holder paper sensing Flag paper sensing Guide power supply front Arm paper pickup LJ 4200 4300 Arm paper pickup LJ 4250 4350 Holder paper pickup arm Gear 23t Plate swing Spring compression Guide tray 2 Part number RC1 0268 000CN RC1 0340 020CN RC1 0385 000CN RU5 0045 020CN RL1 0264 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5624 000CN RU5 0040 0
10. Figure 7 2 Sample menu map page HP LaserJet 4300 Series printer menu map page is shown Troubleshooting tools 311 Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current printer settings to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs trays and printer languages The content of the configuration page varies depending on the options currently installed in the printer To decode the service identification information on the configuration page see Converting the Service ID to an actual date ET NOTE If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed a network configuration page also prints S HP LaserJet 4200n tn dtn dtns dtnsL 4250n tn dtn dtnd dtnsL 4300n tn dtn dtns dtnsL and 4350n tn dtn dtns dtnsL printers come with a print server installed 1 Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus 2 Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll to INFORMATION and then press vy 3 Use 4 or v to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION and then press v Uy hp LaserJet 4250 4350 series II Tf n Figure 7 3 Configuration page HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printer configuration page is shown 1 Printer Information Lists the serial number page counts printer number dc controller revision service ID see Service ID and other printer information 2 Event log Lists the three most recent event log entries n
11. Inner tray drive gear Locking bar Shaft collar 7 j E clip retainer Shaft collar Figure 6 114 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive gear Accessories 287 288 1 500 sheet feeder assembly The following sections describe the parts of the 1 500 sheet feeder assembly 1 500 sheet feeder feed rollers ET NOTE The removal procedure for the two feed rollers in the 1 500 sheet feeder is the same as the procedure for the tray 2 feed rollers See Tray 2 feed rollers 1 500 sheet feeder separation roller 1 Open the 1 500 sheet feeder door Open the feed roller cover Figure 6 115 1 500 sheet feeder roller 1 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts 2 Pinch the blue latch that is on the side of the feed roller and slide the roller off of the shaft Figure 6 116 1 500 sheet feeder roller 2 of 2 si ni Reinstallation tip This roller must lock into place Verify that the roller is seated on the locking bars that are located on the round black spacer and that the spacer is seated on the shaft locking pin callouts 1 and 2 Accessories 289 1 500 sheet feeder door 1 Remove one screw callout 1 and remove the door stop plate callout 2 Figure 6 117 1 500 sheet feeder door 1 of 3 2 Open the 1 500 sheet feeder door about halfway Gently pry open the door slide bar slot and disengage the door slide bar from the feeder Figure 6 118 1 500 sheet feeder door 2 of 3
12. Foot RB1 8107 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Formatter assembly LJ 4200 printer C9652 67902 PCAs Formatter assembly LJ 4200L printer C9652 67903 PCAs Formatter assembly LJ 4250 4350 printer base model Q3653 67901 PCAs Formatter assembly LJ 4250 4350 printer network models Q3652 67901 PCAs Formatter assembly LJ 4300 printer C9651 67901 PCAs Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4200 RM1 0013 140CN Internal components 3 of 3 Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4300 Fuser 220 240 V LJ 4200 RM1 1082 000CN RM1 0101 200CN RM1 0014 140CN Internal components 3 of 3 Internal components 3 of 3 Internal components 3 of 3 Fuser 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1083 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Fuser 220 240 V LJ 4300 RM1 0102 200CN Internal components 3 of 3 Gear 14t 30t RU5 0015 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Gear 18t RU5 0045 020CN Internal components 2 of 3 Gear 18T 500 sheet feeder RU5 0088 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Gear 23t RU5 0040 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Gear 23t RC1 0371 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Gear 30t RU5 0050 000CN Feed roller assembly Guard left edge RC1 0247 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Guard right edge RC1 0242 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Guide connecting cable G
13. sssesssseeeneeeneenen mene nnrnnn A RE nens 377 Media related print quality problems sssssssssssseseeneee eene 377 Overhead transparency defects ntc ice ce eset ch segui Maec cato eh nae 378 Print quality problems that are related to the environment ssssserensssnssessseessresrrrrrrne 378 Print quality problems that are related to jams 378 Irnage defects xcti d oe eo cte be Pone Fondo dom E DUAE 379 lu ee UU EE 379 Check the printcartridges ianari aaia eere ite ee es 380 Ee ee dieat ee eden pni east ce oe ed ei 380 Half self test functional check sssssssssssssseeee 381 Drum rotation functional check 381 Image defect tables etr ate pta se Patto ta cod tite blest de eio ade tecta 382 Repetitive defects troubleshooting eene eene 400 Troubleshooting the stacker and the stapleristacker A 402 be Ee 402 BE Tu Rue TTT 403 Stacker and stapler stacker paper path 403 Stacker paper path test 404 Stapler stacker paper path test A04 Paper transport errot Sii en dae ee oes esie ale eege 406 Malf nctlon errors 3 ee reet e e t ete te acu bs anata ee ek ENTER 406 Component errors eoe e tbe etre ita eue veli seed eie etos ob teret d eate eet aea veis 407 Printer component locations sse a a a a enn aaa ai aa n se nnne rennen nnn 409 Main printer Darts ioter eese te pee eee obe dee eed de e e ac rode disi eade d 409 Printer switclies and Sensors et it eer e
14. 5 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 52 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 52 XY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on A printer error has occurred X Description 0 scanner error 1 scanner startup error 2 scanner rotation error 1 Press Y Szcr button to continue 2 Turn the printer off and then on 3 Reseatthe connectors between the laser scanner and dc controller PCA J83 and J84 4 Replace the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly 5 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 53 XY ZZ PRINTER ERROR To continue press cancel job Display message troubleshooting An error occurred in the printer memory X DIMM Type 0 ROM firmware DIMM 1 RAM Press Cancet Jos If the problem persists replace the DIMM card in the specific slot See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only 357 Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action Y Device Location 1 DIMM Slot 1 2 DIMM Slot 2 3 DIMM Slot 3 4 DIMM Slot 4 ZZ Error Number 0 unsupported memory 1 unrecognized memory 2 unsupported memory size 3 failed RAM test 4 exceeded maximum RAM size 6 invalid DIMM speed 54 1 Remove the sealing tape from toner cartridge The print cartridge was installed with the sealing tape in place 1 Remove the sealing tape from the print cartridge
15. RM1 1190 000CN Cable control panel LJ 4250 4350 Covers RM1 1192 000CN Cable feeder connector LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3 Numerical parts list 509 Table 8 22 Numerical parts list continued Part number RM1 1193 000CN Description Cable envelope feeder connecting LJ 4250 4350 Table and page Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 1195 000CN Control panel assembly LJ 4250 4350 Covers RM1 1198 000CN Cable laser LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 1216 000CN Cable fuser LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 1218 000CN Cable power supply inlet 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 Electrical components RM1 1219 000CN Cable power supply inlet 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 Electrical components RM1 1236 000CN Cable interface upper 500 sheet feeder LJ 4250 4350 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RM1 1237 000CN Cable interface lower 500 sheet feeder LJ 4250 4350 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RM1 1238 000CN Cable sensor assembly 500 sheet feeder 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RU5 0015 000CN Gear 14t 30t Internal components 1 of 3 RU5 0040 000CN RU5 0045 020CN RU5 0050 000CN Gear 23t Gear 18t Gear 30t Internal components 2 of 3 Internal components 2 of 3 Feed roller assembly RU5 0088 000CN Gear 18T 500 sheet feeder 500
16. 8 Parts and diagrams Numerical parts list Table 8 22 Numerical parts list Part number Description Table and page C9651 67901 Formatter assembly LJ 4300 printer PCAs C9652 67902 Formatter assembly LJ 4200 printer PCAs C9652 67903 Formatter assembly LJ 4200L printer PCAs Q2425 67901 Name plate kit LJ 4200 Covers Q2431 40021 Overlay control panel Turkish LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 40022 Overlay control panel Hebrew LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 40023 Overlay control panel Greek LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 60107 Overlay control panel EN FR DE IT LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 60108 Overlay control panel EN CS HU PL LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 60109 Overlay control panel NO SW FI LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 60110 Overlay control panel IT ES PT SP LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 60111 Overlay control panel EN RU LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 60112 Overlay control panel EN AR LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 60113 Overlay control panel EN FR DE NL LJ 4200 4300 Covers Q2431 67908 Name plate kit LJ 4300 Covers Q2440 67903 500 sheet feeder and tray 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Q2442 67902 Stacker Stapler stacker stacker and stapler Q2443 67908 Stapler stacker Stapler stacker stacker and stapler Q2444 67902 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Q3216 60500 1 000 staple cartridge 3 pack Stapler stacker stacker
17. RH7 5355 000CN Solenoid tray 2 pickup LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 RH7 5357 000CN Solenoid tray 1 pickup LJ 4200 4300 Tray 1 pickup assembly RH7 5358 000CN Clutch CL101 LJ 4200 4300 Feed roller assembly RH7 7116 000CN Thermistor LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 22 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Table and page RK2 0269 000CN Solenoid tray 2 pickup LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3 RK2 0272 000CN Motor main M101 10 pin LJ4250 4350 Internal components 1 of 3 RK2 0274 000CN Motor print cartridge M102 8 pin LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 1 of 3 RK2 0276 000CN Solenoid tray 1 pickup LJ 4250 4350 Tray 1 pickup assembly RK2 0278 000CN Fan left LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RK2 0280 000CN Fan right LU 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RK2 0288 000CN Cable flat J81 J51 LJ 4250 4350 Electrical components RK2 0290 000CN Cable flat J80 J50 LJ 4250 4350 Electrical components RK2 0349 000CN Clutch CL101 LJ 4250 4350 Feed roller assembly RK2 0359 000CN Thermistor LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RL1 0007 000CN Separation pad Tray 1 pickup assembly RL1 0013 000CN Plat
18. This screw is used to fasten sheet metal parts to the sheet metal chassis It spans large clearance holes and distributes the load by increasing the bearing surface Phillips washer head machine screw with a broad flat washer attached to the screw head 6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm 16mm M3 M4 Gi I gt kK gt kK gt k gt O Eegeregie 6 Removing and replacing parts Parts removal tree Use the following diagram to determine the order in which parts must be removed ET NOTE Some components in the parts removal tree have a superscript number listed next to the component name for example Right side covert The superscript indicates that this component must be removed before you can gain access to the registration roller assembly Print cartridge L Transfer roller Control panel overlay Tray 1 Tray 2 feed rollers Rear output bin Formatter cover L Firmware DIMM CLJ 4200 4300 series only Formatter assembly two Phillips washer head machine screws Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door Fuser Tray 1 pickup roller Tray 1 separation pad Top cover Control panel assembly Right side cover Tray 2 media size sensor Tray 2 lifter drive assembly Cooling fan right side HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only Laser scanner Paper pickup assembly Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only Main motor Dc controller assembly L main drive assembly Registration assembly Left s
19. vv zor XXX 20 Sd ve lzlt ple lz b cOLW J0jouJ pea xejdng Jejuud ot 198d0 3 5 LNOSOd gt gt NISdO 3 bozr pie leit Jojo Bulsienoy Figure 7 32 Duplex accessory wiring diagram 7 Troubleshooting 432 iagram d accessory wiring Envelope feeder Josuos Josues pooj ezis edojoau3 ejdnjnui edojoAu3 06Sd z06Sd zl aLk soer Tele zoer TZE goer oer ile fe IER Ez Ez vo6r goer voer eoer 21 ee Zor cor SZ EER Doe SD m o z Josues edojo u3 Dir L06Sd Jejuud OL Jojoui dn yoid wsoer edojoAu3 Loew ZO6L l Q ze Leer Du 906r SO6f LIT eoer soer Liege Lei ver Login s e je z b zoer Loer zoer Loer vest KENE oooo ommoos ang BEZ RE onto Ad Od 1eAup edojoAu3 Figure 7 33 Envelope feeder accessory wiring diagram 433 Printer and accessory wiring diagrams 434 Stacker accessory wiring diagram Door switch SW1101 o N a D J e o al D a o uz S o d 2 j ER 2 Fa dE E oo 21 o N D o E a kx E El
20. 3 Network connection HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers only 4 EIO slot 1 5 IEEE 1284B compliant parallel port 6 USB port compatible with USB 2 0 full and high speed devices HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers only Printer overview 11 Software components The printer comes with helpful software including printer drivers and optional software For easy printer setup and access to the full range of printer features HP recommends that the user install the software that is provided Check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD for additional software and languages HP software is not available in all languages Operating systems and printer components The printer CD contains the software components and drivers for users and network administrators The printer drivers that are provided on the CD must be installed in order to take full advantage of printer features The other programs are recommended but are not required for operation Check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD for more information The CD includes software that is designed for users and network administrators who are operating in the following environments Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Millennium Edition Me Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 parallel and network connections only m Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 m Apple Mac OS version 9 1 and later and OS X version 10 1 or
21. ET NOTE Ifthe optional envelope feeder is installed press the release button on its left side and remove the feeder Then proceed to step 2 1 Remove the front accessory cover not shown See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door 2 Insert the tip of a a small flat blade screwdriver under the tray 1 separation pad 3 Carefully twist the screwdriver to dislodge the separation pad Remove the tray 1 separation pad Figure 6 9 Tray 1 separation pad User replaceable parts 181 182 Tray 2 feed rollers 1 Remove tray 2 and place it on a level work surface Locate and open the cover arrow that is next to the roller in tray 2 Figure 6 10 Tray 2 feed rollers 1 of 4 6 Removing and replacing parts 2 Pinch the blue latch that is on the left side of the roller Slide the roller off of the shaft arrows Figure 6 11 Tray 2 feed rollers 2 of 4 A CAUTION When you install this roller make sure that it locks into place Verify that the roller is correctly oriented and that the round black spacer next to the roller is correctly positioned against the locking pin on the shaft A WARNING Do not allow the front of the printer to extend beyond the edge of the work surface The printer can become unbalanced and fall which can cause damage to the printer or personal injury to the service technician User replaceable parts 183 3 Move the front of the printer to the edge of the work surface fo
22. RC1 3340 000CN Guide dc controller LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 1 of 3 RC1 3352 000CN Numerical parts list Arm paper pickup LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3 505 Table 8 22 Numerical parts list continued Part number RC1 3356 000CN Description Overlay control panel EN LJ 4250 4350 Table and page Covers RG1 4201 000CN Cable interface upper 500 sheet feeder LJ 4200 4300 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RG1 4202 000CN Cable interface lower 500 sheet feeder LJ 4200 4300 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RG1 4204 000CN Cable size sensor 500 sheet feeder 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RG1 4205 000CN Cable fuser LJ 4200 4200L Internal components 3 of 3 RG1 4209 000CN Cable power supply inlet 110 127 V LJ 4200 4300 Electrical components RG1 4212 000CN Cable laser LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 RG1 4213 000CN Cable door switch Internal components 3 of 3 RG1 4214 000CN Cable sensor top bin full LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 RG1 4215 000CN Cable control panel LJ 4200 4300 Covers RG1 4221 000CN RG1 4222 000CN RG1 4223 000CN Pickup sensor cable assembly LJ4200 4300 Connector duplexer LJ 4200 4300 Cable feeder connector LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 Electrical components Internal compone
23. 2 Check for damaged components that might be creasing the paper Table 7 32 White lines Possible cause Recommended action s White lines in the direction of the paper path The toner supply is low or the print cartridge is defective 1 Shake the print cartridge gently to redistribute the toner 2 Replace the cartridge The laser path is dirty The fuser is defective Clean the laser path Remove the laser scanner assembly see Laser scanner assembly and check for dirt or other obstructions in the beam path Replace the fuser See Fuser The mirror in the laser scanner is dirty Replace the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly White lines in the opposite direction of the paper path The print drum is damaged Replace the print cartridge 394 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 32 White lines continued Possible cause Recommended action s The fuser roller is damaged Process a printer cleaning page See Running the cleaning page manually If the problem persists replace the fuser See Fuser The laser beam or beam circuitry is unstable Check the cables between the dc controller and the laser scanner assembly If the cables are not connected connect the cables If after checking the cables between the dc controller and the laser scanner the problem persists replace the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assem
24. Poor contact exists between the static eliminator teeth and the power supply Clean the contacts if they are dirty If the problem persists after cleaning or the contacts are damaged or deformed replace them The transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated Replace the transfer roller See Transfer roller The power supply is defective Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 385 386 Table 7 23 Drop outs and character voids AaBbCc AaBbCcc Aagbcc AaBbCc AaBoCc Possible cause The user is printing on the wrong side of the paper The label on the ream of paper indicates which side to print on The different surface properties of some papers might cause problems if the paper is loaded incorrectly Recommended action s 1 Check the arrow on the paper wrapper From tray 1 the printer prints on the side of the paper that faces up From the other trays the printer prints on the side of the paper that faces down 2 Turn over the stack of paper in the tray Also try rotating the stack 180 Do not fan the stack 3 Check the media type and quality Replace the media If it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The media surface is too smooth or too rough for adequate toner adhesion Use media that meets HP specifications see the HP LaserJet Printe
25. Power supply assembly LJ 4300 110 127 V RM1 0107 000CN Power supply assembly LJ 4250 4350 110 127 V RM1 1070 000CN Power supply assembly LJ 4200 220 240 V RM1 0020 000CN Power supply assembly LJ 4300 220 240 V RM1 0108 000CN Power supply assembly LJ 4250 4350 220 240 V Fusers RM1 1071 000CN Fuser LJ 4200 110 V RM1 0013 140CN Fuser LJ 4300 110 V RM1 0101 200CN Fuser LJ 4250 4350 110 V RM1 1082 000CN Fuser LJ 4200 220 V RM1 0014 140CN Fuser LJ 4300 220 V RM1 0102 200CN Fuser LJ 4250 4350 220 V RM1 1083 000CN Consumables and accessories 453 454 Assembly locations 1 of 3 Ref Description Details 1 500 sheet universal replacement tray See Figure 8 14 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 2 Feed roller assembly See Figure 8 11 Feed roller assembly 3 Registration assembly See Figure 8 6 Internal components 1 of 3 8 Parts and diagrams Assembly locations 2 of 3 Details Description Ref See Figure 8 9 Electrical components Power supply assembly See Figure 8 8 Internal components 3 of 3 Delivery assembly See Figure 8 8 Internal components 3 of 3 Fuser assembly See Figure 8 12 Tray 1 pickup assembly Tray 1 pickup assembly 455 Consumables and accessories 456 Assembly locations 3 of 3 Ref
26. RC1 0136 000CN RC1 0153 030CN RC1 0198 000CN Bushing paper delivery Guide tray 2 Spring tension Internal components 3 of 3 Internal components 2 of 3 Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0200 020CN Support lifter drive assembly Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0206 000CN Bushing Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0208 030CN Holder paper sensing Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0209 000CN Flag paper sensing Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0211 000CN Arm paper pickup LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0212 000CN Holder paper pickup arm Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0213 000CN Spring compression Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0242 000CN Guard right edge Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0243 000CN Guide power supply front Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0244 000CN Guide ECU rear Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0247 000CN RC1 0254 000CN Guard left edge Spring torsion Internal components 2 of 3 Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0264 000CN Bushing feed shaft Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0268 000CN Rod switch Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0269 020CN Guide flat cable Internal components 1 of 3 RC1 0270 020CN Guide flat cable Internal components 1 of 3 RC1 0271
27. Remove any jammed media from the paper path Open and close the top cover Disconnect all optional paper handling accessories Replace the feed and separation rollers See Tray 2 feed rollers this procedure includes the separation roller Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY For help press alternates with 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY To continue press Y Display message troubleshooting The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in the available memory Press Y Select button to resume printing E Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error NOTE Aloss of data will occur You might be able to print pages that are more complex if you add memory to the printer 353 Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX For help press alternates with The printer cannot process the page quickly enough 1 Press Y Select button to process the page 233 gt NOTE A loss of data will ET occur 2 Make the page contents less complex 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX and re send the print job To continue press Y 22 EIOX The printer s EIO card in slot X has 1 Press Y SeLect button to resume overflowed its I O buffer during a busy state printing BUFFER OVERFLOW 99 Tocontiniepre
28. Use 4 or Y to scroll to PRINT TEST PAGE and then press v The printer will print the selected number of pages and send them to the stacker Stapler stacker paper path test Use the following procedure to perform a stapler stacker paper path test N o oco N O A A Q e 11 Press Y Se tect button or the Menu button to open the menus Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to STAPLER STACKER and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to STAPLES and then press v Scroll to ONE and then press v Press the Pause Resume button or the Menu button to exit the submenus Press v or THE Menu button to open the menus Use 4 or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to PAPER PATH TEST and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to DESTINATION and then press Scroll to OPTIONAL BIN 1 and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to COPIES and then press Scroll to 10 and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to PRINT TEST PAGE and then press v The printer will print 10 test pages and send them to the stapler stacker where they are stapled Table 7 41 Printer connection area jam troubleshooting Possible cause Recommended action s The leading edge of the media has emerged from the top of the printer The feed motor is defective Turn the printer off and then on Verify that the feed rollers rotate corr
29. 2 Cartridge information Provides information about the amount of toner available in the print cartridge and shows the print cartridge part number and estimated pages that can be printed for the amount of toner in the cartridge 3 Printing statistics Lists statistics about the total number of pages and jobs that have been processed using this print cartridge the first and last use date for the cartridge and the print cartridge serial number 4 Recycle Web site Lists the Web site for information about returning used HP print cartridges 5 Maintenance kit gauge Shows a gauge to let you know the remaining life of the maintenance kit components 314 7 Troubleshooting Embedded Web server When the printer is directly connected to a computer the embedded Web server is supported for Windows 95 and later In order to use the embedded Web server with a direct connection you must select the Custom installation option when you install the printer driver Select the option to load Printer Status and Alerts The proxy server is installed as part of the Printer Status and Alerts software When the printer is connected to the network by using a HP Jetdirect print server EIO card the embedded Web server is automatically available Use the embedded Web server to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel The following are examples of what you can do through the e
30. 55 Using the control panel 56 The following sections describe the use and layout of the printer control panel Control panel layout The printer contains the following lights and buttons on the control panel n l A ec 09 Ya o d Q 0e f ML ee 1 Cancet Jos button HP 4200 4300 Series printers or Stop button HP 4250 4350 Series printers 2 Ready light 3 Data light 4 Attention light 5 Pause Resume button HP 4200 4300 Series printers or Menu button HP 4250 4350 Series printers 6 Graphical display 7 Down Arrow button 8 HeLP button 9 Sevect button 10 Up Arrow button 11 Back Arrow button 3 Operation Control panel lights The control panel lights provide information about printer status Light State Indication Ready On The printer is online and ready to accept data to print Off The printer cannot accept data because it is offline paused or has experienced an error Blinking The printer is going offline The printer stops processing the current print job and expels all of the active pages from the paper path Data On The printer has data to print but is waiting to receive all of the data Off The printer has no data to print Blinking The printer is processing or printing the data Attention On The printer has experienced a problem Note the message on the control panel display and then turn the pr
31. NOTE Fora complete list of the items that are available in the control panel menus see the following sections Press v Se tect button or the Menu button to open the menus Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll to INFORMATION and then press vt D Use 4 or Y to scroll to PRINT MENU MAP and then press v 3 Operation To change a control panel setting 1 Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus 2 Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll to the menu that you want and then press Y 3 Some menus might have several submenus Use 4 or Yx to scroll to the submenu item that you want and then press v 4 Use 4 or to scroll to the setting and then press v Some settings change rapidly if 4 or Y is held down An asterisk appears next to the selection on the display indicating that it is now the default 5 Press the Pause Resume button or the Menu button to close the menu ET NOTE Settings that are established in the printer driver and software program override control panel settings and software program settings override printer driver settings If you cannot gain access to a menu or item it is either not an option for the printer or you have not enabled the associated higher level option See the network administrator if a function has been locked ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED appears on the printer control panel display Control panel menus 61 62 Retrie
32. 2 Unplug the lifter drive harness connector from the PCA location J1003 callout 1 3 Unplug the lifter drive sensor harness from the sensor callout 2 and remove the sensor harness from the wire clip callout 3 Figure 6 128 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 1 of 4 297 298 Remove seven screws callout 4 and then remove the bracket callout 5 Slide the spring gear assembly callout 6 away from the chassis until the gear shaft clears the hole in the chassis and then slide the assembly towards the rear of the feeder to remove it 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 2 of 4 Release the lifter gear shaft collar locking pin and rotate the collar until the inner locking tabs align with the corresponding holes in the bracket Slide the collar off of the shaft 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 3 of 4 6 Removing and replacing parts Accessories 6 Slide the lifter drive assembly away from the chassis until the lifter drive gear shaft clears the corresponding hole in the bracket Remove the assembly Figure 6 131 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 4 of 4 299 1 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies e Door See 1 500 sheet feeder door e Rear and right side covers See 1 500 sheet feeder rear cover and 1 500 sheet feeder right side cover 2 Unplug the paper pickup drive solenoid harness connector from the assembly PCA locati
33. 99 EE errors 8 2 918 r Tz TH T vepepes pez CTT 9 61217 IT elelo LOLMS Dei joue ansi z 1SdW XT IESSE ENEE a EE TESTES EST TESI Test eye deem T vave E 944 uedo 100g D piouajos dn 91d er m UU UU eene fen asodind ninyy ezir izty F918 OILZ EYS OF ZI GL Gt 0c Gre DEENEN ir torr I moer ae Varr 40H T n I jaued uoneijedo SE SpOmp Gm it e Hel z EJE EEEEER z I TEIG 1 vave m 8 9 88 lun Ss act ty T 2 18189 Nod Od Ajddns semog b b 2 2 2 I prouejos dn ze zer lt lt Am 1ndNi auri m sur soded fei mom MOAN SNE one au B EN us Ae i n LOCI L EE E a z z So ir our QNO fz Z SC 883B8boo gag 3825539 PET 293 PEETERS i 4OH L L l ono z zzz 2c lt viai yona i JA Sen losuos 3589266 Mae y 2336538 52 65 R256h55 Luc 2 THe NOW yolSd W Jaded S ed jo dor iTz e v s 9 2 8 DD eei tor e1STOLegr Tee Psi 99r SE Josuas jn jeded X 5000 isviguasng I 1040W eu eer Aen uMop o2e4 B Mal SI Md I Amt 1ndNi auri men kleiLacklku meee ee ee III pE Prey gavz r lvaveir EH E s 9 lel ele lel tll Javzir aBeyon yBiyqng 008181 saszir War ij EE Geier 10suas macezir 9 s v ez lee 97 1 i Hele st lee Ty gt arn l Pesto e Ee SS us m mm eur f in ONIXIS veer 9 s v e z L 98 Hd I ou ge P Els i l gerr e I our i I Pe ee E OTT 7 l A LOLNS Josuas r gasorr gisor Jexoejs ejdejg 10 1exoels I I anezi ug Buyjoog omedus L zer I quewuoyuZ z L vAvz l Vie te fe dodo D
34. Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 201 202 5 Slide the paper guide to the left to remove it Figure 6 30 Tray 1 3 of 3 6 Removing and replacing parts Rear output bin ET NOTE If the duplexer is installed lift it up slightly and pull it away from the printer to remove it 1 Open the rear output bin callout 1 2 Squeeze the hinge pin callout 2 out of its mounting hole Figure 6 31 Rear output bin 3 Rotate the output bin away from the printer until the right hinge pin is released and then remove the output bin Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 203 Control panel display The following sections describe removing and replacing parts of the control panel display Control panel overlay 1 Use a small flat blade screwdriver to carefully pry the top of the control panel overlay away from the printer rimi Figure 6 32 Control panel overlay 2 Lift the overlay off of the control panel 204 6 Removing and replacing parts Control panel assembly CAUTION The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Always perform service work at an ESD protected workstation a ESD A CAUTION Always remove the top cover before removing the control panel If you drop any of the control panel mounting screws into the printer when you remove the control panel they might be difficult to recover Severe damage to the printer can result if t
35. Do not touch the transfer roller callout 1 Skin oils on the roller can cause print quality defects If toner gets on clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Figure 4 1 Location of the transfer roller do not touch Table 4 1 Cleaning the printer Component Cleaning method notes Outside covers Use a water dampened cloth Do not use solvents or ammonia based cleaners 4 Maintenance Table 4 1 Cleaning the printer continued Component Cleaning method notes Inside With a dry lint free cloth wipe any dust spilled toner and paper particles from the paper path area the registration roller and the print cartridge cavity Do not touch the transfer roller with bare hands Paper pickup feed and Use a water dampened lint free cloth separation rollers Tray 1 separation pad Use a dry lint free cloth Registration roller Use a dry lint free cloth Transfer roller Use a dry lint free cloth Do not touch the transfer roller Fuser Use a water dampened lint free cloth Cleaning the fuser Run the printer cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can sometimes accumulate Accumulation of toner and particles can cause specks to appear on the front or back side of print jobs See Table 7 22 Specks or dots To ensure optimum print quality HP recommends using the cleaning page every time th
36. If an optional duplexer is installed make sure that automatic cleaning option is not selected Only run cleaning pages manually See Running the cleaning page manually To run the cleaning page automatically 1 Ifa duplexer is installed remove the duplexer from the printer 2 Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus C Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to PRINT QUALITY and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to AUTO CLEANING and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to ON and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to CLEANING INTERVAL and then press v on O A A Use 4 or to scroll to an interval from 1 000 to 20 000 pages that is appropriate for the printer s use cycle and then press v to save the selection 9 Use 4 or Y to scroll to AUTO CLEANING SIZE and then press v 10 Use 4 or to scroll to the paper size that the printer uses for cleaning pages A4 or LETTER and then press v to save the selection The printer automatically prints a cleaning page at the interval and on the page size that are selected Discard the output page that the cleaning process creates 11 Reinstall the duplexer if applicable The printer will not interrupt a printing job in progress to automatically run the cleaning page The printer will run the cleaning page immediately after completing the job in which the selected cleaning int
37. If the error persists replace the duplexer BAD ENV FEEDER CONNECTION The envelope feeder is not functioning Turn off the printer Remove and then reinstall the accessory Turn on the printer Check the front accessory power connector If the problem persists replace the envelope feeder CANNOT DUPLEX Check rear bin or CANNOT DUPLEX Check paper The printer cannot perform the duplexing function Close the face up bin before sending a duplex print job Replace the duplexer Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA CARTRIDGE FAILURE For help press alternates with RETURN FOR REPLACEMENT For help press The print cartridge contains part of the sealing tape Try to remove the sealing tape If the sealing tape cannot be removed insert a new print cartridge and return the faulty print cartridge for replacement 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE For help press alternates with CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE To continue press Y The printer job language PJL encountered arequest for a personality that did not exist in the printer The job is aborted and no pages print 1 Press Hui button for detailed information 2 Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructi
38. Internal components 1 of 3 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4300 RM1 0108 000CN Electrical components Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4300 also see Figure 8 9 Electrical components RM1 0108 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Registration assembly RM1 0011 060CN Internal components 1 of 3 Rod fan 2 LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3339 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Rod fan 2 LJ 4300 RC1 0341 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Rod switch RC1 0268 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Roller paper feed RM1 0037 020CN Internal components 2 of 3 Roller paper pickup RM1 0036 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Roller pickup RL1 0019 000CN Tray 1 pickup assembly Screw B M4X8 XA9 1523 010CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Screw rs m3x10 Screw rs m3x10 Screw s m3x8 XA9 1559 000CN XA9 1559 000CN XA9 1500 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Internal components 3 of 3 Internal components 1 of 3 Screw s m3x8 XA9 1500 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Screw s m3x8 XA9 1500 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Screw s m3x8 XA9 1500 000CN Electrical components Screw tapping m3x6 XA9 1503 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Screw tapping m3x6 XA9 1503 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Screw
39. Printer and accessory wiring diagrams General timing diagrams 301 Introduction In order to use the information in this chapter you should have a basic understanding of the laserjet printing process Explanations of each mechanical assembly the printer systems and the basic theory of operation are contained in chapter 5 of this manual Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes unless you understand the function of each printer component This chapter contains the following sections 302 Troubleshooting process This section includes an initial troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flowchart These contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit operation or create print quality problems They also include recommendations for resolving the cause of the problem See Troubleshooting process Troubleshooting tools This section contains information that helps to isolate the cause of printer failures This section contains information about printing information and test pages resetting printer options using the diagnostics and service menus and using the embedded Web server See Troubleshooting tools Interface troubleshooting This section provides techniques for isolating the source of communication problems to the printer hardware the printer configuration the network configuration or the software program See Interface troubleshooting Display message troubleshooting This sec
40. RL1 0007 000CN 200 000 pages Tray 1 pickup solenoid LJ 4200 4300 Tray 1 pickup solenoid LJ 4250 4350 RH7 5357 000CN RK2 0276 000CN 200 000 pages 200 000 pages Tray 2 pickup solenoid LJ 4200 4300 Tray 2 pickup solenoid LJ 4250 4350 RH7 5355 000CN RK2 0269 000CN 200 000 pages 200 000 pages Pickup roller RM1 0036 000CN 225 000 pages Feed roller RM1 0037 020CN 225 000 pages Fuser LJ 4200 4200L 110 V Fuser LJ 4300 110 V Fuser LJ 4250 4350 110 V Fuser LJ 4200 4200L 220 V Fuser LJ 4300 220 V Fuser LJ 4250 4350 220 V RM1 0013 140CN RM1 0101 200CN RM1 1082 000CN RM1 0014 140CN RM1 0102 200CN RM1 1083 000CN 200 000 pages 200 000 pages 225 000 pages 200 000 pages 200 000 pages 225 000 pages Transfer roller LJ 4200 4300 Transfer roller LJ 4250 4350 Main cooling fan left side LJ 4200 4300 Main cooling fan left side LJ 4250 4350 Cooling fan right side LJ 4300 Cooling fan right side LJ 4250 4350 RM1 0699 020CN RM1 1110 000CN RH7 1573 000CN RK2 0278 000CN RH7 1577 000CN RK2 0280 000CN 200 000 pages 225 000 pages 40 000 hours 40 000 hours 40 000 hours 40 000 hours Stapler unit RM1 0235 000CN 50 000 staple operations ET NOTE lfa printer component is not listed in the preceding table the component should last for the life of the printer 4 Maintenance Maintaining
41. TYPE SIZE Size detected by tray The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray XX The tray switch is in the Standard position 1 To change the media type press Y SELEcT button Use 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to scroll to the type and then press Y to select it To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal leave the tray switch in the Standard position and adjust the media guides to the correct positions To change the media size to other sizes move the tray switch to Custom adjust the paper guides against the stack and close the tray Use A and Y to scroll to the media size and then press Y to select it Repeat this procedure to select the media type If the size that appears on the control panel display is incorrect and the tray paper guides are correctly adjusted verify that the media size sensor SW102 SW801 or SW1 for the indicated tray is operating See Printer Switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder Switches sensors solenoids and PCAs Verify that the sensor fingers inside the tray are engaging the tray sensor correctly See Tray 2 500 sheet feeder and 1 500 sheet feeder media size detection TRAY XX TYPE SIZE Size specified by user alternates with TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To change type press Y The printer is re
42. m STANDARD must also be correctly configured Select ALL BINS to test the paper path m OUTPUT for every bin m OPTIONAL BIN 1 Control panel menus 321 Table 7 4 Diagnostics menu continued Item Values Explanation DUPLEX Determine whether or not the paper goes through the duplexer during the m OFF paper path test This item is available only if the duplexer is installed m ON a COPIES Set how many sheets of paper are used from each tray during the paper m 1 path test If you are testing the stapling function of the optional stapler stacker 10 DESTINATION item OPTIONAL BIN 1 you must select 10 copies m 50 m 100 m 500 322 7 Troubleshooting Service menu service PIN codes Authorized HP service technicians can use this menu to gain access to printer settings that are reserved for service personnel The service menu is protected by use of a personal identification number PIN When you select SERVICE from the list of menus you are prompted to type an eight digit PIN code ET NOTE The printer automatically exits the service menu after about one minute if no menu items are selected or changed Use the PIN codes provided in the table Table 7 5 Service PIN codes Table 7 5 Service PIN codes Printer model PIN code HP LaserJet 4200 Series printer 11420002 HP LaserJet 4250 Series printer 09425004 HP LaserJet 4300 Series printer 11430002 HP LaserJet 4350 Series printer 09435004
43. 1 Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus 2 Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll to SERVICE and then press v 3 Press 4 or Y until the first digit of the PIN code appears Press v to save that digit Repeat this selection procedure until you have typed the entire eight digit PIN code You can use Back Arrow button to return to a PIN digit When the last digit is saved the service submenu appears on the control panel display 4 Use Aor Y to scroll to the service menu item that you want and then press v m Clear event log Select this item to clear reset to zero the internal event log m Total page count Select this item to set the total number of pages that have been printed to date Typically this is only required when a new formatter is installed m Maintenance count Select this item to set the number of pages that have been printed since the last maintenance kit was installed or the total number of pages that have been printed on this printer if a maintenance kit has not yet been installed during the first 200 000 pages a Maintenance interval Select this item to specify the number of pages that can be printed before a maintenance kit required message appears on the control panel display to indicate that a maintenance kit is required m Serial number Select this item to update the serial number if you replace the formatter m Service ID Select this item to specify the date when the prin
44. 164 store a full page of print image data before the data is sent to the print engine Memory capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter Note that adding memory DIMMs might also increase the print speed for complex graphics DIMM slots The DIMM slots can be used to add memory In HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers DIMM slots can also be used to add fonts or firmware upgrades Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4200L 4300 only To replace the printer firmware DIMM insert a new firmware DIMM in DIMM slot 1 the uppermost slot inside the formatter assembly See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only CAUTION The firmware DIMM must be installed in slot 1 formatter PCA location J1 topmost slot Firmware can also be updated by downloading a remote firmware update RFU For more information about RFUs see Downloading a remote firmware update Nonvolatile memory The printer uses nonvolatile memory NVRAM to store I O and information about the print environment s configuration The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected Memory Enhancement technology The HP Memory Enhancement technology MEt effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of font and data compression methods ET NOTE The Metis only available in PCL mode it is not functional when printing in PS mode PJL overview Printer job language PJL is an integral part of configuration in addition
45. 2 Replace the print cartridge 55 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 55 X PRINTER ERROR To continue press Y The dc controller is not communicating with the formatter The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection 1 Press Y Sciecr button to continue 2 Turn the printer off and then on 3 Reseatthe connectors between the dc controller PCA and the formatter 4 Ifthe problem persists replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 5 Replace the formatter See Formatter assembly 56 1 printer error To continue turn off then on An unknown input device is installed 1 Turn the power off and then on 2 Reinstall all input trays 3 Remove all non HP paper handling devices 56 2 printer error To continue turn off then on An unknown output device is installed 1 Turn the power off and then on 2 Reinstall the stacker or stapler stacker 3 Remove all non HP paper handling devices A printer fan is not functioning Turn the printer off and then on 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 57 3 EP fan failure 57 4 main fan failure Description X Description 3 Cooling fan right side LJ 4250 4300 4350 only 4 Main cooling fan left side Recommended action 57 3 Cartridge fan error F2 1 Reconnect the connec
46. 3 ST 2 8 3 k 3 S E83 e LO E eiP oi 2 9ror29 amp 8 ereicr ag amp SEG ERAS a jo E E ga i3 E a d m SED E Sean i amp et Mass lg 7 4 535 3 amp Hr UO Wid 9 1s DUS alizit g 82 s E HOSNS i 585 5 5 SS SNSLSO 4 Z ZOLLS Kloe o So mE g ano site bons Thess 8s o9 ic 5 IGSNSISO S zH e 52 Kik TE 5 Deng ee HEEL RERS B B3 Ov 2 THH Z NIS QN 2 a 2 ES E T E EHHE 1nosao 13ZIS1S5 Z H E 2 l t4 D ONS GEIER En x DC Z Z Hr 0 o ELLE ra t L Ss 2139 3 a E Ul 9 9 uve 2 3 5 32 8 S gt IUE a A m f m 7 29 HP LaserJet 4350 wiring diagra Figure 7 iri iagrams Printer and accessory wiring diag 429 500 sheet feeder wiring diagram 6o8r M Josues eoeyns yoe s Jedeqd sl eil oo eu k c08ld Josues uomnoejep 19deg J 1 Y LO8Id SNS IA1ddO ONS Yd IA 1ddO SNSddO ano YdddO Yous uonoejep azis Jaded L08MS Lie E vi hp 908 oooo UUzUu 060 NN N mm m eoo oco ec an o 62 8 18 0334d0 cosr ep 1eded 10 1epee 1eded ot arogr garosr C J vatoer 2 EI Logr g82d 19 up Jepeej jedeqd LOSIN 1040W Jeu 4081s piougjos dn yoid 1epeej jedeq vazosr T gazosr azosr l Jepee 1eded Jo 1ejuud ot Fig
47. 7 ig Ro 501 0 J124D 5 2 Figure 8 9 Electrical components 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 11 Electrical components Ref 1 501 Description Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4200 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4200 Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4300 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4300 Feed assembly Cable power supply inlet 110 127 V LJ 4200 4300 Cable power supply inlet 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 Cable power supply inlet 220 240 V LJ 4200 4300 Cable power supply inlet 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 Connector duplexer LJ 4200 4300 Connector duplexer LJ 4250 4350 Screw s m3x8 Cable flat J80 J50 LJ 4250 4350 Cable flat J81 J51 LJ 4250 4350 Screw w washer m3x8 Screw w washer m4x6 Part number RM1 0019 050CN RM1 0020 000CN RM1 1070 000CN RM1 1071 000CN RM1 0107 000CN RM1 0108 000CN RM1 0025 040CN RG1 4209 000CN RM1 1218 000CN RG1 4230 000CN RM1 1219 000CN RG1 4222 000CN VS1 7333 006CN XA9 1500 000CN RK2 0290 000CN RK2 0288 000CN XA9 1420 000CN XB2 7400 606CN Qty Internal components NOTE Flat cables for LJ 4200 4300 are wired to the power supply assembly and are not available separately 475 476 Figure 8 10 Main drive as
48. Formatter assembly See Formatter assembly 2 Remove two screws callout 1 and then slide the PCA guide callout 2 toward the rear of the printer to remove it 3 Remove the three machine screws callout 3 and one grounding screw callout 4 wanun Inc MADE IN CHIN A 6 236 WARNING When reinstalling the power supply you must use a grounding screw to secure the ac outlet to the printer chassis 6 Removing and replacing parts 4 Main assemblies Remove the power switch arm callout 5 L11023A 100 127V 50Hz EVALUATION S NOT FOR SALE Canon Inc MADE IN CHINA Figure 6 60 Power supply assembly 2 of 7 237 238 Unplug the two power supply flat cables and the dc controller power connector from the dc controller locations J80 J81 and J99 Unweave the wire harness and cables from the cable guide Se Hint You might have to remove additional wire harnesses from the cable guide to gain Sr access to the power supply harness A CAUTION Note the position of the flat cables and power cables through the bottom of the cable guide Failure to route these cables correctly through the bottom of the cable guide might result in interference with the tray 2 lifter driver assembly and the cables might be damaged during printer operation Figure 6 61 Power supply assembly 3 of 7 6 Removing and replacing parts Main assemblies Remove two screws callout 6 and then
49. RC1 0341 000CN 1 17 Rod fan 2 LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3339 000CN 1 18 Guide dc controller LJ 4200 4300 RC1 0271 000CN 1 18 Guide dc controller LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3340 000CN 1 19 Feed roller assembly also see Figure 8 11 Feed rollerassembly RM1 0012 020CN 1 20 Main drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 also see Figure 8 10 RM1 0001 030CN 1 Main drive assembly 20 Main drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 10 RM1 1066 000CN 1 Main drive assembly 21 Registration assembly RM1 0011 060CN 1 22 Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4200 also see Figure RM1 0019 050CN 1 8 9 Electrical components 22 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4200 also see Figure RM1 0020 000CN 1 8 9 Electrical components 22 Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 also see RM1 1070 000CN 1 Figure 8 9 Electrical components 22 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 also see RM1 1071 000CN 1 Figure 8 9 Electrical components 22 Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4300 also see Figure RM1 0107 000CN 1 8 9 Electrical components 22 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4300 also see Figure RM1 0108 000CN 1 8 9 Electrical components Internal components 463 Description Part number Screw tapping pan head m4x10 XB4 7401 007CN Screw w washer m3x6 XB2 7300 607CN 464 8 Parts and diagrams Internal components 465 5 D 15 Q Q y M ER B 15 9 3
50. accommodates two way parallel communications The OFF mode disables the advanced functionality The I O is compatible with the bidirectional parallel interface standard USB HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers only HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers include a universal serial bus USB 2 0 connection Embedded ethernet print server HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers only HP LaserJet 4250 4350 n tn dtn and dtnsl models include an HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network 5 Theory of operation Expanded I O The optional expanded I O EIO card can be installed in the designated slots on the formatter It provides automatic I O switching between multiple computers or networks that are connected to the printer ET NOTE Only one slot is available on HP LaserJet 4200L printers Flash HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers only Optional flash is available in 2 MB and 4 MB flash memory DIMMs for storing forms fonts and signatures CompactFlash card HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers only Optional CompactFlash cards can be used to permanently store downloaded items such as fonts and forms even when the printer is off These cards can also be used to enable the printer to print non Roman characters Hard disk accessory The optional hard disk accessory can be mounted in one of the EIO slots on the rear of the formatter The optional EIO based hard disk is used for creating
51. and stapler Q3652 67901 Formatter assembly LJ 4250 4350 printer network models PCAs Q3653 67901 Formatter assembly LJ 4250 4350 printer base model PCAs Q3993 40001 Name plate kit LJ 4200L Covers Q3994 40004 Name plate kit LJ 4200Ln Covers Q5400 60102 Overlay control panel EN FR DE IT LJ 4250 4350 Covers Q5400 60103 Overlay control panel CS HU PL EL LJ 4250 4350 Covers Q5400 60104 Overlay control panel NO SV FI LJ 4250 4350 Covers Q5400 60105 Overlay control panel ES PT IT LJ 4250 4350 Covers Q5400 60106 Overlay control panel EN RU TR LJ 4250 4350 Covers Q5400 60107 Overlay control panel EN AR LJ 4250 4350 Covers Numerical parts list 503 504 Table 8 22 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Table and page Q5400 60108 Overlay control panel EN DE FR NL LJ 4250 4350 Covers Q5400 60109 Overlay control panel FR LJ 4250 4350 Covers Q5400 60111 Overlay control panel AR LJ 4250 4350 Covers Q5400 67911 Name plate kit LJ 4250 Covers Q5406 67912 Name plate kit LJ 4350 Covers RB1 8107 000CN Foot Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0003 000CN Arm cartridge release Main drive assembly RC1 0019 000CN Cover inner front right Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0060 000CN Flag paper feed sensor Internal components 1 of 3 RC1 0061 000CN Spring torsion Internal components 1 of 3
52. roller tray 2 feed roller tray 2 separation roller and paper feed rollers The tray 2 pickup roller which the pickup solenoid activates rotates once and picks up the media in the tray The separation roller prevents additional sheets from feeding with the first sheet and the media is fed to the pre feed sensor PS102 The sheet then reaches the registration assembly where its skew is corrected The sheet then passes through the transfer separation and fusing stages through the delivery unit and to the output bin Tray 2 500 sheet feeder and 1 500 sheet feeder media size detection Three switches detect the size of media in the cassette The switches are active when the cassette is placed in the tray 2 feeder 500 sheet feeder or 1 500 sheet feeder The dc controller PCA microprocessor detects the size and presence of the media by reading the combinations of the switches Table 5 3 Tray 2 and 500 sheet feeder media size switch settings Paper size Media size switch setting Upper Center Lower No cassette installed Off Off Off A4 Off Off On LTR Off On Off B5 Off On On A5 On Off Off EXE On Off On LGL On On Off UNV On On On Table 5 4 1 500 sheet feeder media size switch settings Paper size Media size switch setting Upper Center Lower No cassette installed Off Off Off A4 On Off On LTR Off On On LGL On On Off o 120 The tray 2 cassette can detect the media size by using the swi
53. submenu Select OPTIMIZE and set HIGH TRANSFER ON Open the print quality menu at the control panel see Print quality submenu Select OPTIMIZE and set LINE DETAIL ON Recommended action s Replace the print cartridge The high voltage connector springs are dirty or damaged The high voltage connector springs protrude into the print cartridge cavity Clean the springs if they are dirty Replace the springs if they are damaged or missing The laser beam drive circuit or high voltage circuit is defective not supplying the correct voltage 1 Check the cables between the dc controller PCA and the high voltage circuitry part of the power supply 2 If the cables are not connected connect the cables 3 If the cables are connected but the problem persists replace the power supply See Power supply 4 f after replacing the power supply the problem persists replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA The laser scanner assembly is defective Replace the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly The cables between the laser scanner assembly and the dc controller PCA are not seated correctly or are defective Inspect and reseat the connectors If necessary replace the cables 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 38 Blank page Possible cause Recommended action s The software configuration is incorrect intermittent problem Make sur
54. 000CN Fuser 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 1088 000CN 500 sheet universal replacement tray LJ 4250 4350 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RM1 1094 000CN Lifter drive assembly 500 sheet feeder 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RM1 1097 000CN Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 12 Internal components 3 of 3 Tray 1 pickup assembly RM1 1097 000CN Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4250 4350 Tray 1 pickup assembly RM1 1108 000CN Dc controller LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 1108 000CN Dc controller LJ 4250 4350 PCAs RM1 1110 000CN Transfer roller LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 1 of 3 RM1 1122 000CN PCA 500 sheet feeder 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RM1 1133 000CN Pickup drive assembly 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RM1 1134 000CN Paper pickup assembly 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RM1 1135 000CN Sensor assembly 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RM1 1136 000CN Lifter drive assembly 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RM1 1164 000CN Stapler unit only Stapler stacker stacker and stapler RM1 1181 000CN Pickup sensor cable assembly LJ4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 1189 000CN Cable sensor top bin full LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3
55. 000CN Guide connecting cable Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0486 020CN Cover front upper 500 sheet feeder 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 0487 020CN Cover left 500 sheet tray 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 0488 020CN Cover right 500 sheet tray 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 0500 000CN Cover number display plate 500 sheet tray 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 0509 000CN Cover legal 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 0661 000CN Cover right 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 0662 000CN Cover left 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 0663 000CN Cover rear 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 0748 000CN RC1 1923 000CN Sensor size inside 1 500 sheet feeder Spring torsion 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 3280 000CN Cover duplexing LJ 4250 4350 Covers RC1 3282 000CN Cover legal LJ 4250 4350 Covers RC1 3303 000CN Stop detent 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RC1 3304 000CN Number display optional feeder LU 4250 4350 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RC1 3335 000CN Limiter torque 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RC1 3338 000CN Duct fan 2 right side LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 3339 000CN Rod fan 2 LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 1 of 3
56. 106 Laser scanner system OVervlew eene eee en nennen nnns 106 Image formation system OVervlew eene nennen 106 General descriptions ro ter t ipe tto e et ree etie sae bene end aa ina tag eate te eye ouem tee al 107 Dc controller BCEE ue e en ob tede e ebe Eege 108 Motor and fari control bet ptite Re ree aided drei eee 109 Power Supply e e tee vue dat de en rdi Du ese e dod ete drug dad e ovas ode 110 F ser conttol CIFCUlt 4 niodo t ota te eret eot ee dice em demas 110 Fuser over temperature protection ssssssssseem nt 111 Overcurrent overvoltage protection seesssessrrreserrrerinneeernnastennesneneerenesetnnanaenne 111 Easer scariner asse mOra anergia dea AT AEAT A TAO 112 Paper pickup and feed System teet a aaa be die deen da red teh aT needs 114 Pickup and feed block A 116 Printing trom tray 1 fcre de diee di at ee dritte e een 117 Printing from Vay 2 ote IER deed 119 Tray 2 500 sheet feeder and 1 500 sheet feeder media size detection 119 Lifter driver operations nnne nnne 120 Multiple feed prevention nennen 121 Media skew Drevention ll F ser delivery ee 122 Jami detectlol ii e t e tede b tb a Pectus ttiam LIRE M Seeds a 122 Printer pickup delay jam from tray 1 123 Printer pickup delay jam from tray 2 123 Printer pickup stationary Jam 123 Printer delivery wrap jam when feeding regular media 123 Printer delivery wrap jam when feeding
57. 152 mm 2 5 kg 5 5 Ib 13 1 inches 13 7 inches 6 0 inches Envelope feeder 328 mm 354 mm 113 mm 2 5 kg 5 5 Ib 12 9 inches 13 9 inches 4 5 inches Table 1 10 Supplies specifications Part number Description Specification Q5942A HP LaserJet Smart print cartridge Average yield 10 000 standard pages LJ 4250 4350 Q5942X HP LaserJet Smart print cartridge Average yield 20 000 standard pages LJ 4250 4350 Q1338A HP LaserJet Smart print cartridge Average yield 12 000 standard pages LJ 4200 4200L Q1339A HP LaserJet Smart print cartridge Average yield 18 000 standard pages LJ 4300 o Specifications 1 Electrical specifications WARNING Power requirements are based on the country region where the printer is sold Do not convert operating voltages This can damage the printer and void the product warranty Table 1 11 Power requirements HP LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 and 4350 Series printers Specification 110 volt models 220 volt models Power requirements 110 to 127 volts 10 220 to 240 volts 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 50 60 Hz 2 Hz Rated short term current 8 2 amps 3 3 amps HP LaserJet 4200 4200L 4300 Rated short term current 10 0 amps 5 0 amps HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Table 1 12 Power consumption HP LaserJet 4200 average in watts Product model Printing Ready PowerSave Off HP LaserJet 4200 printer 580 W 21 20 4 0 07 HP LaserJet 4200n printer 580 W 2
58. 2 Press 4 Up Arrow button and Y Down Arrow button to step through the instructions NOTE The stapler stacker LED blinks in amber this error applies to the stapler stacker only 3 Remove any jammed paper from the stapler stacker 4 Remove the staple cartridge from the stapler unit 5 Push the green door on the end of the staple cartridge up in the direction of the arrows 6 Remove the jammed staple 7 Close the staple cartridge door Replace the cartridge in the stapler unit 8 Close the staple unit 9 If the error persists replace the staple cartridge 10 Ifthe error persists replace the stapler unit See To remove and replace the stapler unit 13 12 08 The output bin page detection sensor has 1 Press Herr button for detailed been active for longer than the specified information jam in output device time 2 Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions NOTE The stapler stacker LED blinks in amber this error applies to the stapler stacker only Display message troubleshooting 351 Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Recommended action Control panel message Description 3 Remove all of the pages from the output bin 4 Open the jam access door and remove all of the pages Close the access door 5 If this error message persists replace the stapler stacker 13 12 09 The stacker or stapler stacker paper inlet 1 Pres
59. 26 tray 2 27 white lines troubleshooting 394 white spots troubleshooting 396 Wide A4 settings 69 Windows downloading firmware 91 drivers supported 13 FTP firmware updates 93 local port firmware updates 92 LPR command firmware updates 99 network firmware updates 93 versions supported 12 wiring diagrams 425 wrinkled media troubleshooting 375 394 Index 523 524 invent 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P www hp com support lj4200 www hp com support lj4250 www hp com support lj4300 www hp com support lj4350 Q5400 90932
60. 398 blank pages 399 blurred print 397 checklist 303 communications 331 curled media 393 dark print 400 distorted images 391 dots 385 dropouts 386 engine test 329 error messages 333 eventlog 80 firmware updates 102 flowchart 305 formatter test 330 grey background 388 information pages 310 jams 365 light print 383 lines 72 387 396 397 multiple pages feeding 375 paper 32 38 paper path 369 power on 306 power on bypass 328 print cartridge 380 print quality 377 382 process 303 removing parts 168 repeating defects 390 400 skew 376 391 stacker and stapler stacker 402 tonersmear 389 transparencies 378 white lines 394 white spots 396 wrinkled media 375 394 U UNIX carriage return settings 70 downloading firmware 93 Model Scripts 13 unlocking cabinet stand 172 updating firmware DIMMs 164 210 downloading 91 FTP 93 HP LaserJet Utility 98 HP Web JetAdmin 100 LPR command 99 messages 101 troubleshooting 102 UNIX 93 Windows local port 92 Windows network 93 usage page 63 USB port locating 11 operations 162 V voltage specifications 20 W warnings setting 75 warranty print cartridge 41 product 39 Web JetAdmin firmware updates 100 Web sites environmental topics 46 firmware updates 91 HP Partner Portal 445 parts ordering 444 UNIX and Linux drivers 13 weight paper specifications 1 500 sheet tray 28 500 sheet tray 27 duplexer 28 envelope feeder 28 equivalence table 32 stapler stacker 29 tray1
61. 4 28S 928 SOLU ELPLSLOLLI shot oz IZZ IS gor t T bo one e Z 9 S v Z F rj sTspv Zr leg lalelo letel er Ger Zjejs v e e t Iver i ele e s 9 28 6 BIEL ear T F XZ yS a d cer ws Si Zi Si loc De ge ee p Se sz lese Zer GOODS r EE 3225295255 og 225 2999 2532952 z 315499 29925929055033399992 KEE oSMZ R32 EE Sec 88258032857 oyog s SCH ST SC S BB RR ei a kt m 4 I z T ge 0 8MS 0c4d zog oo bot oo yams ddd 431101 u09 20 222 bt quud se 65 amp A puy i zpe ser papis t LC LE L waver t z S9 3 Br 2 8 3 3 Balm om uno S8 38 33 z BS 2333 88 ER amp s S Yu 23 OL 8 o o m as 2 38550m T A zli 191101 peed 23 EREE PEPE EPE E 292 9 n 284022223525 8z222222 5 5ooot 253323395 222522322392 aoa BEE EES amp oo8232385822082290552 996665 oke 2625952 266266260200 2220 bb oS OES Zt ZR ATE OCCT ZE a S36608858999992999998 or eer STZTSTSTPTETZTTT Air ITZTETPTSTSTZT8T6 omen dr 6622228998616 SA FORZINEOT SSSSUZSSCSRARR REN IZAR DIER cms e GU X Xx papae peppers merus 812 91815 16 121 ipaa suet rues er oee T 91 812 T olele L t CILLE nn i a GY ee LLLLLILLLLLILLLLLLLLI youms uonoetep z Ge 043 uado 1000 t T piouejos deen ar Z s H DEE DECKEN tele Ken esodind ninw oer J cu KEE T TT U OH t slei jaued uogesado Fr E g g g g g z 55955259 NE T vave 559995 z Ze OO sorsa 89d Ajddns samog 86682 i GER Josues Sm prouojos dam zer E soded Sen gt anasseg ie e TI esodind tinw ER 3 of x H
62. 43 Laser scanner 1 of 3 Main assemblies 219 220 4 Remove three screws callout 3 and their grounding clips DANGER 777 ATO VAROITUS 1753 1 denge zm a ws Reinstallation tip The grounding clips are not captive Make sure that you replace the grounding clips when you reinstall the laser scanner NOTE The HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers might have fewer than three grounding clips 6 Removing and replacing parts 5 Remove a fourth screw callout 4 and then unplug the laser scanner wire harness callout 5 Main assemblies from the laser scanner PCA DANGER oreo wr setts w CAUTION ATTENTION egen VORSICHT joss ierunt PRECAUCI N miaon isin wasa VARNING 5 VAROITUS 2 z g van im Figure 6 45 Laser scanner 3 of 3 Carefully lift the laser scanner up and out of the printer Make sure that the laser scanner assembly does not catch or snag the wires along the bottom of the assembly when you remove the assembly CAUTION When you reinstall the laser scanner assembly make sure that the wire harnesses are correctly routed through the cable guides If the wire harnesses are not correctly routed they can be damaged when the top cover is installed 221 222 Paper pickup drive assembly Remove the following assemblies Rear accessory cover See Top cover See Right side cover See Formatter cover See Formatter See Tray 2 extension cover and duplexer accessory cover See R
63. 5 Main assemblies 233 234 6 Remove two screws callout 9 and then lift the dc controller PCA away from the printer E Figure 6 58 Dc controller PCA 5 of 5 ZN CAUTION Correct reinstallation of the dc controller is critical to correct operation of the printer If you are installing a new dc controller follow the instructions in the reinstallation tips If you are installing a new formatter and a new dc controller see the special section that follows this dc controller section Installing a new formatter and a new dc controller LJ 4250 4350 only Failure to follow these instructions can result in a printer configuration downgrade For example an HP LaserJet 4350 printer could perform as an HP LaserJet 4250 6 Removing and replacing parts Reinstallation tip Dc controller reinstallation for LJ 4250 4350 only 1 After installing a new dc controller turn the printer on and wait for five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state ET NOTE Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written 2 Turn the printer off 3 Turn the printer on again and then wait five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state 4 Print a configuration page to verify against original settings Installing a new formatter and a new dc controller LJ 4250 4350 only AN CAUTION If you are installing a new formatter and a new dc controller on an HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series printer follow th
64. 7 Troubleshooting Printer resets and power on modes The following sections describe the types of printer resets and power on modes Cold reset A cold reset unlocks menus that have been previously locked and returns all of the control panel menu items including EIO settings to the factory defaults However it does not clear the values in the service menu such as the serial number and page counts d NOTE Before performing a cold reset print a menu map and a configuration page see B Menu map and Configuration page Use the information on the configuration page to reset any customer set printer configuration values that the cold reset procedure changes To perform a cold reset 1 2 Turn the printer power off For HP Laserjet 4200 4300 Series printers Hold down v Select button and then turn the printer power on For HP Laserjet 4250 4350 Series printers Turn the printer power on and then hold down v SELEcr button when the memory count begins Continue holding down v until all three printer control panel lights flash once and then remain on This might take up to 10 seconds After the message SELECT LANGUAGE appears on the display press 4 Up Arrow button o Y Down Arrow button until COLD RESET is highlighted Press v The printer performs a cold reset and then continues its power on sequence Check all I O settings and reset any customer set printer configuration values Printer resets and powe
65. Asia Pacific http www hp com paper 444 8 Parts and diagrams HP provides free telephone support during the product warranty period When you call you will be connected to a responsive team waiting to help you For the number you should call in your country region see the support sheet that came in the box with your printer Before calling have the following information available m Product name for example HP LaserJet 4350dtns printer m Product serial number found on the underside of the cartridge door m The date of printer purchase and a description of the problem Test the software installation Attempt to print a test page from the software program Try reinstalling the software If reinstalling the software does not correct the problem see the Readme file on the CD that came with the printer or call the phone number for the country region phone numbers are listed on the support sheet that came in the box with the printer You can also find answers to frequently asked questions at the following Web sites m http www hp com support lj4200 m http www hp com support lj4250 m http www hp com support lj4300 m http www hp com support Ij4350 HP authorized resellers and support To locate HP authorized resellers and support call 800 243 9816 in the U S or 800 387 3867 in Canada HP service agreements For information about HP service agreements call 800 386 1115 in the U S or 800 268 1221
66. Consider the following points before installing the printer Install in a well ventilated dust free area Install on a hard flat continuous surface with all four printer feet level Do not install on carpet or other soft surfaces Make sure that adequate power is supplied Uninterruptible power supplies UPSs are not recommended Install where temperature and humidity are stable away from water sources humidifiers air conditioners refrigerators or other major appliances See Operating environment for temperature and humidity ranges Install away from direct sunlight open flames or ammonia fumes If the printer is placed near a window make sure that the window has a curtain or blind to block direct sunlight Install with enough space around the printer for access and ventilation Install away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems Install the printer with enough space around it to open trays and bins install print cartridges and perform maintenance The printer needs 101 mm 4 inches of ventilation space on the left side fan side and at the rear of the printer Site requirements 53 Software installation Information about installing and uninstalling the printing system software is available in chapter one of the electronic user guide on the installation cd 54 2 Installation 3 Operation Chapter contents e Using the control panel e Control panel menus Chapter contents
67. Description Details 8 Duplexing pendulum assembly See Figure 8 8 Internal components 3 of 3 9 Main drive assembly See Figure 8 10 Main drive assembly 10 Paper pickup drive assembly See Figure 8 7 Internal components 2 of 3 11 Lifter drive assembly See Figure 8 8 Internal components 3 of 3 8 Parts and diagrams Consumables and accessories 457 Covers 458 13 100 127V Figure 8 5 Covers 8 Parts and diagrams Covers Table 8 7 Covers Ref Description 1 Cover left LJ 4200 4300 1 Cover left LJ 4250 4350 2 Cover formatter 3 Cover paper handling 4 Cover legal LJ 4200 4300 4 Cover legal LJ 4250 4350 5 Cover duplexing LJ 4200 4300 5 Cover duplexing LJ 4250 4350 6 Cover assembly right LJ 4200 4300 6 Cover assembly right LJ 4250 4350 7 Spring leaf grounding top Cover LJ 4250 4350 only 8 Cable control panel LJ 4200 4300 8 Cable control panel LJ 4250 4350 9 Cover assembly top LJ 4200 4300 9 Cover assembly top LJ 4250 4350 10 Cover assembly front 11 Cover rear output bin 12 Cover cartridge door LJ 4200 12 Cover cartridge door LJ 4300 12 Cover cartridge door LJ 4250 4350 12A Control panel assembly LJ 4200 4300 12A Control panel assembly LJ 4250 4350 13 Overlay control panel Turkish LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel Hebrew
68. Duplexer Stacker and stapler stacker 5 Theory of operation Basic operation of the printer Printer operation can be divided into four systems the control system which includes the power supply and dc controller PCA the pickup and feed system which consists of various rollers and transports the media through the printer the laser scanner system which forms the latent image on a photosensitive drum and the image formation system which transfers a toner image onto the print media Printer operating sequence A microprocessor on the dc controller PCA controls the printer operating sequence The table Table 5 1 Basic printer operating sequence describes the basic operating sequence from when the printer power is turned on until the final printed page is delivered to an output bin For information about the timing of the basic operating sequence see General timing diagrams Table 5 1 Basic printer operating sequence Period sequence Description Waiting The period of time from when the printer power is turned on until the main motor or the drum motor in the HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only begins to rotate During this time the transfer roller is cleaned and the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA checks to determine if a print cartridge is installed in the printer Standby The period of time from the end of the waiting sequence or from the end of the last rotation until a print command is received from the ho
69. Duplexer The duplexer driver controls the duplexer operation An 8 bit microprocessor in the duplexer driver controls the duplexer sequence and the communication with the dc controller PCA The duplexer driver drives the solenoid motors and fan according to commands that the dc controller PCA sends to the duplexer The duplexer also communicates its status to the dc controller PCA The printer delivers a charge of 24 Vdc to the duplexer which then generates 5 V for the integrated circuits Printer Duplexer driver PCA poene Reversing motor 45V 4V Regulator CPU 1C706 C703 Reset IC RESET 1C704 Duplex feed motor Sensors ENS Figure 5 17 Duplexer I O block diagram 5 Theory of operation Reversing and duplexer pickup The duplexer has two stepping motors the reversing motor M701 and the duplex feed motor M702 The duplexer driver controls forward and reverse motor rotations The duplexer solenoid controls the face up output tray diverter which feeds paper to the duplexer ET NOTE The duplexer cannot be used if the face up tray is open When the trailing edge of the media passes the reverse sensor PS703 the reversing motor changes direction The oblique roller and feed roller then move the media so that its edge makes contact with the left panel to correct skew Duplexer driver PCA A x om o 2 2 o 18 2 5 5
70. E o 7 M a Boy 5 doo a9 E DO So Ome S o i 23 Qe oo a o lt ON ON o aa1n 5 aain 1S d14 Nver nvrc Avert Stacker driver PCB LNO H NVO 1NO 1 NVO 1nO NOHMd ON AS OMS 1S31 LMS L1S31 2MS 1S3l MS LSAL ga1 LSal ONS ONE LNO HSV14 OGW HSV14 M10 HSV l4 caWw HSY14 NI HSV 14 OLOV HSV14 ASt LOW QNO J1106 J1103 J1107 J106LA 5 J1101 Leb DEE J106LB e 2 2 S o o D 2 o Feed motor Figure 7 34 Stacker accessory wiring diagram 7 Troubleshooting Stapler stacker accessory wiring diagram Jejoujuoo euiBu3 ZB AED LOLLMS Vous 100q V190lLr a190lr 9011f corr ZOLLL LOLLE bi lelrisig 2 L Z E jt S 9 Z 8 6 OL L zj jvisj9 218 E DEED 55290900 Kb z z oz PYPZZZ Zz Beez UNO Shannon 10 22200720 H OGOL IIIIII SrO rcr LEO onon TATR z Az zzzzm OExOEz oos SNo cor oo ceo HOAN d sac E 5 Od 1eAup Joes ce s mm s Be O00 Vo Pr PO 22 nt nr AL o00n re rc c lt Pleyel t e E e H 2 H ZoLLr OLLI 6OLIr vorn ZOLLTS LOLLIS jouajos dwe Iouejos 10129 j8 EI pioue Io proual 33430 Le 8ZLLr QeLlr aam sn
71. Explanation EXECUTIVE JIS DPOSTCARD JIS 16K ENVELOPE 10 ENVELOPE MONARCH ENVELOPE C5 ENVELOPE DL ENVELOPE B5 CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE UNIT OF MEASURE X DIMENSION Y DIMENSION Use this item to set a default custom paper size for tray 1 or any 500 sheet tray This menu appears only if the Custom Standard switch in the selected tray is set to Custom PAPER DESTINATION STANDARD TOP BIN Use this item to configure the output bin destination Only the optional bins that are installed appear on the menu REAR BIN STACKER BIN DUPLEX OFF This item appears only if an optional duplex printing accessory is installed Select ON to print on both sides ON duplex or OFF to print on one side simplex of a sheet of paper DUPLEX LONG EDGE Use this item to change the binding edge for duplex printing The menu item appears if an optional duplex printing BINDING HP LaserJet SHORT EDGE accessory is installed in the printer and DUPLEX ON 4250 4350 only OVERRIDE NO Use this item to allow the printer to print an A4 size job on letter size paper if A4 size paper is not loaded in the printer A4 LETTER YES or vice versa MANUAL FEED OFF Use this item to feed the paper manually from tray 1 rather than automatically from a tray If MANUAL FEED ON and ON tray 1 is empty the printer goes offline when it receives a print job MANUALLY FEED PAPER SIZE appears on the printer control panel
72. J1 See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only Remove all of the EIO devices from the printer 49 XXXX PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on A critical firmware error has occurred that caused the processor on the formatter to abort the operation This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands corrupt data or invalid operations In some instances electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the printer Other causes include poor quality parallel cables poor connections or specific software programs Sometimes the formatter itself is at fault which is usually indicated by a 79 Service Error After performing the actions above procede with the following 1 2 Turn the printer on If the error message disappears reinstall each DIMM and EIO device individually making sure to turn the printer power off and then on again as you install each device To replace a DIMM see Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only Replace the DIMM or EIO device that caused the error message Remember to reconnect all of the cables that connect the printer to the network or computer If this error message persists replace the firmware DIMM See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only Replace the formatter assembly See Formatter assembly 49 24 02 printer error The printer has experienced a critical error Verify that the ribbon cables are fully seated in
73. LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel Greek LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel EN FR DE IT LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel EN CS HU PL LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel NO SW FI LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel IT ES PT SP LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel EN RU LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel EN AR LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel EN FR DE NL LJ 4200 4300 13 Overlay control panel EN LJ 4250 4350 13 Overlay control panel EN FR DE IT LJ 4250 4350 Part number RC1 0287 020CN RM1 1077 000CN RC1 0288 000CN RC1 0289 000CN RC1 0290 000CN RC1 3282 000CN RC1 0291 000CN RC1 3280 000CN RM1 0046 000CN RM1 1076 000CN RC1 0307 000CN RG1 4215 000CN RM1 1190 000CN RM1 0049 000CN RM1 1081 000CN RM1 0050 030CN RM1 0027 020CN RM1 0047 020CN RM1 0114 020CN RM1 1080 000CN RG1 4276 020CN RM1 1195 000CN Q2431 40021 Q2431 40022 Q2431 40023 Q2431 60107 Q2431 60108 Q2431 60109 Q2431 60110 Q2431 60111 Q2431 60112 Q2431 60113 RC1 3356 000CN Q5400 60102 Qty 459 460 Ref 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown 502 Description Overlay control panel CS HU PL EL LJ 4250 4350 Overlay control panel NO SV FI LJ 4250 4350 Overlay control panel ES PT IT LJ 4250 4350 Overlay control panel EN RU TR LJ 4250 4350 Overlay control panel EN AR LJ 4250 4350 O
74. PCA location J98 3 Replace the main motor See Main motor 4 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 59 4 Print cartridge motor rotation error LJ 4250 4300 4350 only The print cartridge drive motor LJ 4250 4300 4350 only is not functioning properly 1 Turn the printer off and then on 2 Replace the print cartridge 3 Reconnect the print cartridge motor wire harness on the dc controller PCA location J86 4 Replace the print cartridge motor See Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series printer only 5 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Recommended action Control panel message Description 60 2 printer error The tray 2 lifter motor is not functioning 1 2 Turn the printer off and then on If the error persists turn the printer off Verify that the tray 2 lifter wire harness is full seated in its connector on the dc controller PCA location J93 Replace the tray 2 lifter driver assembly See Tray 2 lifter drive assembly Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 60 3 Tray 3 lifter motor failure The tray 3 lifter motor is not functioning Tray 3 can be a 500 sheet feeder or 1 500 sheet feeder accessory Turn the printer off and then on If the error persists turn the printer off Verify that the tray 3 lifter
75. Press v The printer initializes the hard disk and continues its power on sequence Printer resets and power on modes 327 Power on bypass When the power is turned on the printer begins the power on sequence By performing a power on bypass you can cause the printer to resume the power on sequence but not to recognize any installed EIO hard disk skip disk load procedure This can be helpful in isolating EIO hard disk errors When using the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 Series printers you can also resume the power on sequence but make the printer continuously print configuration pages until the Pause Resume button is pressed self test procedure This can be helpful if you need to verify the printer components that are installed by reviewing the information on the configuration page but you cannot open the menus to print a configuration page Skip disk load 1 Turn the printer power off 2 For HP Laserjet 4200 4300 Series printers Hold down Select button and then turn the printer power on For HP Laserjet 4250 4350 Series printers Turn the printer power on and then hold down v SeLecT button when the memory count begins 3 Continue holding down y until all three printer control panel lights flash once and then remain on This might take up to 10 seconds 4 Press 4 Up Arrow button followed by the Pause Resume button 5 Press 4 or Y until SKIP DISK LOAD is highlighted 6 Press v The printer continues the power on sequence bu
76. Q2448A m One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays m HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection x Duplexer for automatic two sided printing m 500 sheet stapler stacker output accessory HP LaserJet 96 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB 4350dtnsl printer Q5410A m One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays m HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network x Duplexer for automatic two sided printing m 500 sheet stapler stacker output accessory Printer configurations Model and serial numbers The model number and printer serial number are listed on an identification label located under the top cover on the right side of the printer The model number is alphanumeric such as Q24314 for the HP LaserJet 4300 product The serial number contains information about the country region of origin as well as the revision level the production code and the production number of the printer An example of a serial number is USBB123456 The label also contains power rating and regulatory information as shown in the following figure BOISE IDAHO 83714 U S A de le 3 ti H HDD September Numero de S rie Serial No USBB123456 Assembled in USA printer engine Made in China Assemblaux Etats Unis moteur de l imprimante fabriqu au Chine Figure 1 1 Sample model and serial number label HP LaserJet 4300 printer HEWLETT PACKARD Num ro r glementaire du mod le JJ 11311 CHINDEN BLVD Reg
77. See http www hp com support 1j4250 for current infromation Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages HP LaserJet 4250 speed is 45 ppm Letter size and 43 ppm A4 size Default time from Ready mode to Sleep 30 minutes AO H A Table 1 15 Power consumption HP LaserJet 4300 average in watts Product model Printing Ready PowerSave Off HP LaserJet 4300 printer 685 W 21 21 0 0 07 HP LaserJet 4300n printer 685 W 23 22 7 0 07 HP LaserJet 4300tn printer 685 W 24 22 6 0 07 HP LaserJet 4300dtn printer 685 W 26 24 0 0 07 HP LaserJet 4300dtns printer 685 W 26 24 5 0 07 HP LaserJet 4300dtnsL printer 685 W 27 at least 24 9 0 07 Values are subject to change See http www hp com support Ij4300 for current information Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages HP LaserJet 4300 speed is 45 ppm Letter size and 45 ppm A4 size PowerSave default activation time is 30 minutes Bw ny Table 1 16 Power consumption HP LaserJet 4350 average in watts Product model Printing Ready Sleep Off HP LaserJet 4350 800 W 20 W 18W 0 2W HP LaserJet 4350n 800 W 20W 18W 0 2W HP LaserJet 4350tn 800 W 20W 19W 0 2W HP LaserJet 4350dtn 800 W 21W 19W 0 2W HP LaserJet 4350dtnsl 850 W 22W 20W 0 2W Values subject to change See http www hp com support Ij4350 for current infromation Power numbers are the highest values measured using all
78. Table 7 26 Loose toner or toner smear continued Possible cause The fuser is defective The print will smear if the fuser does not heat sufficiently to bond the toner to the paper The dc controller PCA is defective The dc controller PCA regulates the fuser roller temperature Recommended action s Replace the fuser See Fuser Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Table 7 27 Repeating defects and repeating images AaBbCc AaBbCCc AaBbCc AaBbCc s AaBbCc D Possible cause The print cartridge or fuser is damaged The circumference of the photoconductive drum inside of the print cartridge is 94 2 mm 3 7 inches If the defect repeats at this interval the defect is associated with the drum Repetitive defects caused by the LJ 4300 fuser roller repeat at 94 0 mm about 3 7 inches Because the LJ 4300 fuser roller is only 2 mm 07 inch smaller than the photoconductive drum distinguishing defects that are caused by the photoconductive drum from those that are caused by the LJ 4300 fuser roller can be difficult Recommended action s 1 Inspect the drum for scratches or other damage Replace the print cartridge for defects that repeat at 37 7 mm 1 5 inches 62 8 mm 2 5 inches 54 0 mm 2 1 inches or 94 2 mm 3 7 inches 2 Process a printer cleaning page See Running the cleaning page manually 3 If the problem persists and the defect
79. Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action TRAY XX EMPTY TYPE SIZE alternates with Ready For help press Y The specified tray is empty but the current job does not require this tray in order to print correctly 1 2 Refill the indicated tray If the error persists verify that the paper out sensor PS105 PS101 PS801 or SR3 for the indicated tray is functioning correctly See Printer Switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder Switches sensors solenoids and PCAs TRAY XX OPEN For help press alternates with Ready For menus press Y The specified tray is open or not closed completely Close the tray If this error persists verify that the media size sensors SW102 SW801 or SW1 for the indicated tray is functioning correctly See Printer Switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs Verify that the sensor fingers inside the tray are engaging the tray sensor correctly See Tray 2 500 sheet feeder and 1 500 sheet feeder media size detection TRAY XX SIZE XXXX SIZE For help press Display message troubleshooting Atray was installed with the standard custom switch set to Custom or with the paper gui
80. UPRGRADING PRINTER Appears when the printer is reprogramming the firmware WAIT FOR PRINTER TO REINITIALIZE On HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers appears from when the printer finishes reprogramming the DIMM until the printer reinitializes ET NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded print a new configuration page from the control panel and make sure that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed Printer messages during firmware update 101 Troubleshooting a firmware update 102 The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update Table 4 5 Troubleshooting a firmware update Cause Result The control panel cancelled a job No update occurred A break in the I O stream occurred No update occurred during a send A power cycle occurred during No update occurred RECEIVING UPGRADE A power cycle occurred during No update occurred Resend the update through a parallel port UPGRADING PRINTER A power cycle occurred during WAIT The update is complete FOR PRINTER TO REINITIALIZE ET NOTE Print jobs that are sent to the printer while an update is in process do not interrupt the update The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation Table 4 6 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure Cause Action The RFU file is co
81. assembly or stack position sensor PS802 or SR2 is defective Replace the lifter drive assembly 500 sheet feeder or the lifter drive assembly 1 500 sheet feeder See 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly or 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly Replace the surface stack sensor PS802 for the 500 sheet feeder or SR2 for the 1 500 sheet feeder See 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs The paper feeder control PCA is defective Replace the paper feeder control PCA See 500 sheet feeder control PCA and 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA The dc controller PCA is defective Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Paper path troubleshooting 373 Jams in the paper path ET NOTE Avoid using odd sized media Odd sized media might not travel between the transfer roller and the fuser without getting jammed Avoid using short grain paper Short grain paper might curl excessively and become jammed This type of jam is often found between the fuser and the output destination or in the duplexer Table 7 12 Causes of paper path jams Cause Solution The cartridge shutter open close mechanism is damaged The shutter in the print cartridge should open as you insert the print cartridge If the shutter does not open replace the print cartridge The registration roller is dirty worn or damaged Thi
82. caused by a user who is attempting to grasp the edge of the page as it exits the top output bin during the duplexing process 1 Press Hep button for more information 2 Remove the specified number of pages from the output bin 3 Press Y Sriecr button to continue printing 4 Replace the duplexer 5 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA ET NOTE If JAM RECOVERY OFF some pages will not be reprinted Resend the missing pages 13 XX YY JAM For help press A jam exists in the media path 1 Press HeLp button for detailed information about clearing the jam 2 Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions 3 If the media is folding into an accordion shape make sure that the shutter on 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Description Control panel message Recommended action the print cartridge opens as you insert the cartridge Replace any defective print cartridge 4 Forinformation about how to resolve a jam see the specific numerical error codes in this table 5 See Paper path troubleshooting in this chapter 13 01 00 or 13 03 00JAM IN TRAY x For help press 13 03 00 Paper JAM open input trays then open and close top cover A page is jammed in tray X A 13 01 00 error message indicates that the media did not arrive at the pre feed sensor PS102 within the specified
83. charging roller transfers the image to the media The fuser applies heat and pressure to permanently bond the image on the media Then residual toner on the photosensitive drum surface is scraped off with the cleaning blade The cartridge has a toner sensor that detects the presence of the cartridge and the remaining toner level If the toner in the cartridge is depleted to a specific level or if the printer contains no print cartridge an error message appears on the control panel display See Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages Image formation system 153 154 Laser beam Primary charging roller circuit Figure 5 36 Image formation block diagram toner cartridge Developing cylinder Memory tag La Fuser gt Transfer j Photosensitive charging drum Pressure roller roller HP LaserJet 4300 only icc EE a MCN ERE welcome High voltage ower supply circuit power supply Wem P EE circu I Power supply PCB Memory controller 5 Theory of operation Electrostatic latent image formation Forming the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum requires applying a uniform negative charge bias to the surface of the drum and then the exposing it to the laser beam The laser beam neutralizes the section of the drum that will it attract toner during the developing operation Primary charging The conditioning process consists
84. control panel does not work after the top cover is reinstalled verify that the wire harness connector is fully seated into its dc controller PCA connector 194 6 Removing and replacing parts Right side cover 1 Remove the following assemblies e Top cover See Top cover e Formatter cover See Formatter cover e Tray2 2 Open the formatter door 3 Use a small flat blade screw driver to push in the locking tab at the front of the printer and then release two additional locking tabs callout 1 Figure 6 23 Right side cover a of 2 Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 195 4 Rotate the right side cover away from the printer and lift it up to remove it pue Figure 6 24 Right side cover 2 of 2 O Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the right side cover verify that the power switch Sr arm callout 1 locks onto the switch connecting rod callout 2 196 6 Removing and replacing parts Left side cover 1 Remove the top cover See Top cover 2 Release two locking tabs callout 1 Figure 6 25 Left side cover 3 Rotate the top of the cover away from the printer and lift the cover up to remove it G Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the left side cover make sure to hook the bottom of the cover first Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 197 198 Front cover 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the tray 1 pins callout 1 from the hinges on the front cover Use your finge
85. de ed EES 413 Printer motors and fans 414 Printer POAS uos tete aeta tn ad See tiat ut s vs 415 Accessory component locaton nennen enne nennen enne nre nnns 416 500 sheetifeeder main parts 2 ott teeth ia eal tice AA 416 500 sheet feeder switches sensors Solenoids and PCAs eese 417 1 500 sheet feeder main parts 418 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs 420 Stapler stacker stapler assembhy eene 421 Stacker and stapler stacker switches and eensors 422 Stacker and stapler stacker motors and eolenoide A 423 Stacker and stapler stacker PCAs 24 Printer and accessory wiring dagrams eee meme nnne nnns 425 HP LaserJet 4200 wiring diagram sssseseene emm emere 426 xi HP LaserJet 4250 wiring diagram ssssseseeenee eene 427 HP LaserJet 4300 wiring diagram seen nennen 428 HP LaserJet 4350 wiring diagram ssssssseene nennen 429 500 sheet feeder wiring dagram nennen ens 430 1 500 sheet feeder wiring diagram essen emm 431 Duplex accessory wiring diagram ssse mmm a2 Envelope feeder accessory wiring dagram enne 433 Stacker accessory wiring diagram eee 434 Stapler stacker accessory wiring diagram e FOO Dc controller connectors dagram sss emen BOO General timing dagrams nennen nennen enne inen inen enne 437 HP LaserJet 4200 general timing dagoram sse eene 438 HP LaserJet 4250 general timing d
86. determine if the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer m Worn rollers or separation pads can cause multifeeds Check the condition of the rollers and separation pads m Defective paper tray switches can cause jams by communicating the wrong paper size to the formatter m Defective paper sensors along the paper path might signal a false jam m Scraps of media that remain in the paper path can cause intermittent jams Always check that the paper path is clear after cleaning the printer or clearing jams Also remove the fuser and carefully check it for debris Paper path test This test generates one or more test pages that can be used to isolate the cause of jams Paper path troubleshooting 369 370 To isolate a jam you can specify which input tray to use which output bin to use whether to use the duplex path and the number of pages to print Printing multiple pages helps to isolate intermittent jam problems The following options are available for this test Print test page This option uses factory default settings to run the paper path test The page starts from tray 2 does not use the duplex path and prints a single page The user can specify the number of pages to be printed Source Use this option to select tray 1 tray 2 or tray X if optional tray feeders are installed as the page source Destination Use this option to send the test page to the optional stacker or stapler stacker if this acce
87. does not support replacement of components on printed circuit boards 42 1 Product information Regulatory information This section contains regulatory statements for this product FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation the presence of interference can be determined by turning the equipment off and on If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television communications the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures m Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna m Increase distance between equipment and receiver m Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located m Consult your dealer or an experienced radio television technician ET NOTE Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a sh
88. egeo deg uae ead 25 Supported media weights and etzes emen 26 Supported media specifications obles ne 26 Paper and print media 30 Printing and storage environment nennen eene enne 30 Supported types of media 31 Guidelines for using pape enema 32 En Ve 34 Envelope eelere DEE 34 Envelopes with double side seams nnne nne 35 Envelopes that have adhesive strips or fans 35 Envelope margine te re ee t d De e qu epestenstad eine debate 35 Envelope storage 32 eee o ned Ronde ice makes Tuning EMI Re eu de 35 E 0 36 Niue m T 36 Card stock and heavy paper eene nnne nennen nennen 37 Card stock Gonsten aee neret ete ebore ene re be eaa rn En e Ead aep dee es 37 Card stock ouidelmes enne 37 Types of media to avold c ccce ca e ena A E 38 Hewlett Packard limited warranty Statement 39 Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Gtoatement eem ennemi 41 SEMVICS APPNOACH M 42 Regulatory information ca e T 43 ases rupe 43 Environmental product stewardship program 44 Protecting the environment sse nennen nennen 44 Ozone Droduchon ener mentre nennen nn nennen rne nns 44 Energy consumbplLlon 2 redimi ri denne Lo donee EENS E REEL en REEL dun Ree LAE pase E 44 HP LaserJet printing supplies A Material safety data sheet aee dedere iit sett ee eR ERR Ee Eae HERR itis 46 For more Imt
89. ethernet print server HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers oj 162 Expanded UC 163 Flash HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers only esses 163 CompactFlash card HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers only 163 Hard disk accessory o tee etr tx prati tu eeu xe eden nun Dena 163 CPUs sia PUO 163 Printer merry i oiii eder ane dedita dedi REM rede sacs cages Pape eee Eon ua Ra tee aas 163 Read only memory rie itae bae lb exe sd cea ee nde eee 163 Random access memory sesser nenene eini EKAA nnne nns 163 wurde E 164 Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4200L 4300 on 164 Ke EE e TEE 164 Memory Enhancement technology seeee enne 164 PIL OVOIVIGW cip eid redeat eere iato auo cea e eu Deco EE Leal e Qe CERE ER ERR e ea ERR de 164 dr DC 165 eoim HP 165 6 Removing and replacing parts Chapter COmMent ee 167 vii Removal and replacement strategy nennen nennen nnn nennen nnns 168 Required tools lecti leti d eei t eter adii ee upbeat as 168 Before performing service dee rk ee dri e RR RARE ERI ERR ERR ERR ERR ARR RR na ina 169 After completing serViCe s ret sett o HO e dae eee iie ete idt ers 169 Screws used in the printer c cccccceeeeeeeeencceece cence ee seeeeeaaneeceeeeeeeesesea
90. example the optional stapler stacker have been removed to service the printer 1 Grasp the rear accessory cover the mounting position for the optional stapler stacker or stacker Rotate the cover toward the front of the printer to release it and then lift it up to remove it Figure 6 15 Accessory covers 1 of 3 Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 187 188 2 Open tray 1 Grasp the front accessory cover the mounting position for the optional envelope feeder and pull it straight out of the printer Figure 6 16 Accessory covers 2 of 3 6 Removing and replacing parts 3 Grasp the duplexing accessory cover the mounting position for the optional duplexer and pull it straight out of the printer Figure 6 17 Accessory covers 3 of 3 4 Rotate the tray 2 extension cover to the horizontal position and then lift up the right side of the cover to unlock its pivot bar Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 189 5 Slide the left side pivot pin out of its retainer to remove the cover Figure 6 18 Tray 2 extension cover 190 6 Removing and replacing parts Formatter cover 1 Grasp the formatter cover 2 Pull the cover straight back and away from the printer Figure 6 19 Formatter cover Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 191 Top cover ET NOTE Ifthe optional stapler stacker or stacker accessory is installed lift it straight up and off of the printer to remove it Then procee
91. ez L Ee ODDOO EEAAA eeel c 80 Oxouddy gt o oxoiddy gt L oxoiddy Jk 8 amp xoiddv serq BuiBseyo jejsueJ rd Le oq seg Buidojeneg hz m C Zo oxouddy ov seg Buidoje eq EN e Loxoiddy le zo oxoiddy 40 0xoddy lt I r T Tete esM Vues eg eee Wewn HR E D LIII L L jroo orouddy VEER gn 3 9 es LLL ee OO eS Sow ees ze oxoiddy j L019 uoinio 43101 pees a Lx LOLS prousjos dnyoid p sseg i 3 S amp lt ipe I dO L eed jo dot fo S20 xouddy OLNA Z Ue Buyoog p 6sey mp ejeuruu D 1 es 1e0xoiddvi I zrocudddv O T jase 7 s o 1 o EE zociddy eS pev LI RH II oo oo E RE ESCH a ZOHW mu niq p LI i LOLW 100w ue H D oon RRE 1 IEN DEEN ee ee EE ee ZL 034 uoneu amp isep pejs jud BH LOLNJ L uej Buyoog H SN E E E E 17 EN EN DE uoneuBisep uoyem s JUL spuooes yun ezis Joel ul Bunuud sjeeus z snonunuoo JO yeyo Buruy NO YMS Joo 441 Figure 7 40 HP LaserJet 4350 general timing diagram General timing diagrams iagram d iming Stapler stacker t 7 Troubleshooting uonejoi alpped OLLSd Josuas uonisodeuiou e pped vOLLSd 10sues BuiBeBuesip Joo ujewjeg POLLW 1010u1 ejdeis oBebue
92. fits stapler stapler stacker or stacker Cover rear assembly stacker Part number RM1 1164 000CN Q3216 60500 Q2442 67902 Q2443 67908 RM1 0248 000CN RM1 0237 000CN Qty 493 Alphabetical parts list 494 Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list Description 1 000 staple cartridge 3 pack Part number Q3216 60500 Table and page Stapler stacker stacker and stapler 1 500 sheet feeder Q2444 67902 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 500 sheet feeder and tray Q2440 67903 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 500 sheet universal replacement tray LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0028 060CN 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 500 sheet universal replacement tray LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1088 000CN 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Arm cartridge release RC1 0003 000CN Main drive assembly Arm paper pickup LJ 4200 4300 RC1 0211 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Arm paper pickup LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3352 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Bushing Bushing feed shaft Bushing paper delivery RC1 0206 000CN RC1 0264 000CN RC1 0136 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Internal components 2 of 3 Internal components 3 of 3 Cable accessory interface RM1 0042 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Cable control panel LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4215 000CN Covers Cable control panel LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1190 000CN Covers C
93. g m 20 to 28 Ib 10 envelopes 26 1 Product information Table 1 24 Tray 1 supported sizes and weights all models continued Size Dimensions Weight Capacity Envelope DL ISO 110 x 220 mm 4 3 x 8 7 inches Envelope C5 ISO 162 x 229 mm 6 4 x 9 0 inches Envelope B5 ISO 176 x 250 mm 6 9 x 9 8 inches Envelope Monarch 7 3 4 98 x 191 mm 3 9 x 7 5 inches Transparencies only use transparencies that are designed for monochrome HP LaserJet printers Thickness 0 099 to 0 114 mm 0 0039 to 0 0045 inch Minimum 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches 50 transparencies Maximum 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Labels Thickness 0 127 to 0 229 mm 0 005 to 0 009 inch Minimum 76 x 127 mm 50 labels 3 x 5 inches Maximum 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 1 The printer supports a wide range of sizes Check the printer software for supported sizes Capacity can vary depending on the media weight and thickness as well as the environmental conditions Table 1 25 Tray 2 and optional 500 sheet tray supported sizes and weights all models Size Dimensions Weight Capacity Letter 216 x 279 mm 60 to 120 g m 16 to 32 Ib 500 sheets of 75 g m 8 5 x 11 inches 20 Ib paper A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 3 x 10 5 inches Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 8 5 x 13 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches Executive JIS 216 x 33
94. i ND E aadd 49 z qe 2s E WAN MYND 144 ONS dOL t 5 o z n 3 GND zi L SO0N E mj E ez SE Asaan dn e S dran ZOON l fi zooa 8 KC Brio E Sa HA Nl HO ON o ER 3 NE SA ug Kuba gi ON ui az xos ur a SdWLAN3 TE Z dLAN3 9 ree XOS E E dLAN3 dlLLAN3 Z ON dND Zi E Ss os Ee HHE DAANG Au 28 8 SL oS Ne Began E EC 5 ols yds 61 Oz 10901 wE il ssi 3 APIS yousyy Kb i ei zOQN E 3 Ae q E d 5 s xOUS3 v y z sane Men 2 Z Nlad BI ao 9 t U E lo T Il RECHE WEE E RUNE S E t T 5 Sz HNVO Mir der 2x E m ace EIS OND 4 37 HAVO bus es QNO gape SE e D HN Ze ONS SC IOQA ejers E Oe re Janz TNVO Ze 82 NOHMd LOON SIS AS B aave Ta Suz NOUMd 82 z Bed SIE oa a u 005181 uc W S I lano S aNd Jos Lad E QNO IND An Ki 19S B as 3 Li du g OND FF Ge one Te 2 g 5 tas d EL ano D oan Tr jWWdHSd ana EI z 5 8 aNd Odd L NMdHS4 Br E WMdOQA3Q OND 9 9 tre E Odd ASt Oma gt gt ba deg PE JE ova SI Y E Ae PR Ida S288 ba vau ER LMMddJUL Sgan p 3 ibis Idd SodJ vis P S g amp Dia SL wade LET IO banwa e H 9 SodJ Hdd E 55 38 EE Ep MOdHL EE j wooqug ae ios 4H e t EIE ELITS wie EA MOO Leen eure En w EA HL OVA3 o 7 1 aal Kees ENEE 8 9 S i zu 990A3Q B L nwaoGgd SE E E 9 m wmdoaud Cl 9 ZdSHNL E lt d 5 o CG eats PEL eene ZdSUNL S ERC a E S 5 g Go otal zm i 1dSHNL TE NOOvA3Q mms g E S55 Stat L5 NOOVA3Q p wOOvA3Q a ETE 5 i 8 255 x00vA3q E Z D5
95. in Canada HP Partner Portal You can use the following information to contact HP Partner Portal m For Partner Portal http www hp com partners m For Connect Online http www connect online hp com m For Asia Pacific countries regions http partnercare asiapac hp com m For Canada Partner http www canada hp com m For Latin America http www conecta latinamerica hp com Ordering parts and supplies 445 446 Supplies See Ordering parts and supplies Consumables are available directly from HP at the following numbers m US 1 800 HPINVENT m Canada 1 800 474 6836 m United Kingdom 0734 441212 m Germany 0130 3322 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers 8 Parts and diagrams Consumables and accessories Consumables Figure 8 1 Consumables Table 8 2 Consumables Ref Item Product number Service exchange number 1 10 000 page print cartridge LJ 4250 4350 printers Q5942A Q5942 67901 1 12 000 page print cartridge LJ 4200 4200L printers Q1338A Q1338 67901 1 18 000 page print cartridge LJ 4300 printers Q1339A Q1339 67901 1 20 000 page cartridge LU 4250 4350 printers Q5942X Q5492 67902 2 Preventive maintenance kit LJ 4200 4200L printers Q2429A Q2429 67904 110 127 V 2 Preventive maintenance kit LJ 4200 4200L printers Q2430A Q2430 67904 220 240 V 2 Preventive maintenance kit LJ 4250 4350 printers 110 127 V Q5421A Q54
96. information about the locations of switches sensors and motors in the pickup and feed block see Printer switches and sensors and Printer motors and fans When it receives a print command from the host computer the dc controller PCA turns on the main motor M101 power The motor drives the tray 2 pickup feed and separation rollers In HP LaserJet 4300 and 4350 Series printers the print cartridge motor power also turns on The laser scanner motor power turns on The dc controller PCA then activates the feed clutch CL101 to rotate the feed roller The tray 2 pickup solenoid is activated SL101 and the pickup arm descends The pickup roller touches the media and a sheet is fed into the printer The separation roller prevents multiple sheets of media from being fed at one time 5 Theory of operation As the pre feed sensor PS102 detects the media the dc controller PCA turns off the clutch which stops the media When the dc controller PCA detects that the laser scanner is ready it activates the feed clutch again The feed roller moves the media farther into the printer The registration shutter corrects page skew and the media is transported to the fuser delivery block For information about the timing of these operations see General timing diagrams Printing from tray 1 The tray 1 paper sensor PS105 detects the presence of media in tray 1 When the dc controller PCA receives the print command the printer starts the initial
97. irregular media 123 Printer delivery delay Loms 124 Printer doorop6n Jam e rte e eL RU dE Lea e degens 124 Printer residual media jem 124 Printing from the 500 sheet Teecder A 125 500 sheet feeder pickup and TIeedmg ne 126 Printing from the 1 500 sheet Teeder e 128 1 500 sheet feeder pickup and Ieedmg 129 1 500 sheet feeder lifting mechanmtsem sse 131 Envelope feeder ee e PR RERO DEED RR RR ERR EORR INNER ERR 132 Envelope feeder pickup and reedimg nn 132 Envelope feeder jam detection iter hp ien RR EXER RR a KEE 133 Envelope feeder pickup delay Jam 133 Envelope feeder pickup stationary Jam 133 BBC P 134 Reversing and duplexer Dickup nnmnnn nt 135 Duplexer jam detection ode cierre e 136 otacker and stapler Stacker i nie ride etre ttt Hee Iter de he exe EN e Sages 137 SLACKER e EM 9 Stacker feed and delivery eee tee rne tienes 139 stacker jam detections wei re n Re erede ed E v peg eiu 141 Stacker feed Jarm EE 141 vi Stacker feed stationary jam sse eene 141 Stacker residual media am 141 Stapler stacker o ie te e eR Re S PR REA RUE RERRE IRR MR RA ERN ES AREE KA RET X XA n Red deu Age 142 Stapler stacker feed and delivery see 142 Staple mode feed and deliven 144 rm e 148 Stapler unit operati
98. it 1 Remove the rear output bin See Rear output bin 2 Squeeze the blue fuser release tabs callout 1 3 Pullthe fuser callout 2 straight back and out of the printer Figure 6 6 Fuser A CAUTION Do not drop or jar the fuser It can easily be damaged if it is mishandled sl Q Hint When you replace the fuser make sure that it is fully seated into the printer You should sr hear both sides snap into place 178 6 Removing and replacing parts Tray 1 pickup roller ET NOTE Ifthe optional envelope feeder is installed press the release button on its left side and remove the feeder Then proceed to step 2 1 Remove the front accessory cover callout 1 ET NOTE Ifthe printer has an envelope feeder installed this cover will not be in place p 2 ES SS H lt i a de mus T kd Ei d os lt lt Figure 6 7 Tray 1 pickup roller 1 of 2 User replaceable parts 179 180 2 Release the pickup roller by sliding apart the latches that are located on each side at the top of the roller Lift the roller callout 3 out of the opening ww Figure 6 8 Tray 1 pickup roller 2 of 2 Se Reinstallation tip When you install the pickup roller place the two pivot pins in the Sr lower mounting slots callout 2 and rotate the roller into the printer until it snaps into place 6 Removing and replacing parts Tray 1 separation pad
99. it takes between when the leading and trailing edges of the page pass the sensor The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages or Numerical printer messages ET NOTE This jam cannot be detected for pages that are less than 200 mm 7 9 inches in length Printer door open jam If the top door is opened during printing the top door open switch SW101 is activated and the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a door open jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages or Numerical printer messages Printer residual media jam If neither the top of page sensor PS103 nor the fuser delivery sensor PS108 detects the leading edge of the media at the start of initial rotation see Table 5 1 Basic printer operating sequence the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA identifies a residual media jam 5 Theory of operation Paper pickup and feed system Printing from the 500 sheet feeder ET NOTE HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers support up to two optional 500 sheet feeders HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers support up to three optional 500 sheet feeders The paper feeder driver controls the 500 sheet feeder operation sequences An 8
100. lifting mechanism is active the plate is in the raised position when the dc controller PCA sends a signal when the front door is closed or during the print operation The 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA driver stops the motor M1 when the 1 500 sheet feeder paper stack position sensor SR2 detects media If the 1 500 sheet feeder paper stack position sensor SR2 does not detect media within approximately 30 seconds after the start of the lift operation the paper deck driver PCA detects a lifter motor failure and sends a signal to the dc controller PCA An error message appears on the control panel display Figure 5 14 1 500 sheet feeder lifting mechanism Paper pickup and feed system 131 Envelope feeder The envelope feeder driver controls the envelope feeder operation sequences An 8 bit microprocessor in the envelope feeder driver controls the envelope feeder sequence and the communication with the dc controller PCA The dc controller PCA sends the pickup command to the envelope feeder driver with the necessary timing The envelope feeder driver activates the solenoid in response to the command The printer delivers a charge of 24 Vdc to the envelope feeder which then generates 5V for the integrated circuits Printer Envelope feeder driver PCA Envelope pickup motor 4V Regulator IC905 CPU IC903 Envelope multiple feed sensor Reset IC RESET 1C904 Envelo
101. m The location of the leading edge of all of the media that is in the paper path m The location of the media when the jam occurs in the paper path or at the input tray m The timing of the jam at power up or while paper is moving m The location of any damage that occurs on the media and the location in the paper path where the damaged media stops m The relationship to a particular tray m The relationship to duplex printing m The relationship to the type of paper m Theuse of any non HP supplies non HP supplies are known to cause jams m Paper handling conditions including storage conditions overloading trays damaging media during loading fanning of the paper ream or use of paper that has already been fed through this printer another printer or a copier General paper path troubleshooting Use the following information to isolate the cause of the problem When you have identified the cause use the tables that follow to find a recommended solution m View or print the event log to determine if a particular jam error occurs more often than others Try to identify a pattern m View or print the event log to determine the frequency of a particular jam If a jam occurs repeatedly at a particular page count consider this event to be a single jam that the customer tried to clear 7 Troubleshooting m Try printing from all of the available input trays and to all of the available output bins to identify whether the problem is isolate
102. might appear on the control panel display or in the event log Alphabetical printer messages and their meanings are listed in Alphabetical printer messages and numerical printer messages are listed in Numerical printer messages ET NOTE Not all messages are described in the tables the messages that are not listed are self explanatory Status messages Status messages reflect the current state of the printer They inform you of normal printer operation and require no interaction to clear them They change as the state of the printer changes Whenever the printer is ready is not busy and has no pending warning messages the status message Ready appears if the printer is online Warning messages Warning messages inform you of data and print errors These messages typically alternate with Ready or with status messages and continue to appear until SeLecT button is pressed If CLEARABLE WARNINGS is set to JOB in the configuration menu these messages are cleared when the next print job is sent to the printer Error messages Error messages inform you that an action must be performed such as adding paper or clearing a paper jam Some error messages are auto continuable these are not critical errors and the printer will continue to function If the printer setting AUTO CONTINUE is used the error message will continue to appear for about 10 seconds and then the printer will resume printing ET NOTE Pressing any button wh
103. might not work in the printer because of differences in manufacturer specifications or environmental conditions 1 Product information Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP LaserJet 4200 4200n 4200tn 4200dtn 4200dtns 4200dtnsL 4200L One year 4200Ln 4250 4250n 4250tn 4250dtn 4250dtnsl 4300 4300n 4300tn 4300dtn 4300dtns 4300dtnsL 4350 4350n 4350tn 4350dtn and 4350dtnsl HP warrants to you the end user customer that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted you wil
104. number indicator 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 2 of 7 Unplug the accessory connector wire harness from the PCA callout 4 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 3 of 7 6 Removing and replacing parts 5 Remove 8 screws callouts 5 6 and 7 Remove the chassis gutter callout 8 Figure 6 110 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 4 of 7 6 Remove one e clip and the shaft collar callout 9 Figure 6 111 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 5 of 7 Accessories 285 286 7 Push the shaft into the paper pickup drive assembly Grasp the tray drive gear inside the tray cavity and pull the gear and shaft assembly out of the paper pickup gear assembly Figure 6 112 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 6 of 7 CAUTION Some gears are not captive when the paper pickup assembly is removed Be careful not to lose these unattached parts Also the solenoid is not captive when the paper pickup assembly is removed 6 Removing and replacing parts 8 Remove five screws callout 10 Pull the paper pickup gear assembly away from the chassis and remove it Figure 6 113 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 7 of 7 ET NOTE When you install the tray drive gears and shaft verify that the gears are seated on the shaft locking bars and that the shaft collars are positioned correctly in the lower gear assembly mounting bracket and 500 sheet feeder chassis
105. of the primary charging roller applying a uniform negative charge to the surface of the drum The primary charging roller is coated with conductive rubber An ac bias is applied to erase any residual charges and maintain a constant drum surface charge The print density setting modifies the amount of dc voltage Photosensitive drum Figure 5 37 Primary charging of the photosensitive drum Writing the image The laser scanner contains two diodes in the laser unit During the writing process the modulated laser diodes project two beams onto the rotating six sided scanning mirror As the mirror rotates the beams reflect off the mirror through a set of focusing lenses through a slot in the top of the toner cartridge and onto the photosensitive drum The beams sweep the drum from left to right discharging the negative potential wherever the beams strike the surface This creates a latent electrostatic image which later is developed into a visible image Laser beam Unexposed area Exposed area Figure 5 38 Writing the image to the photosensitive drum Because the beams are sweeping the entire length of the drum and the drum is rotating the entire surface area of the drum can be covered The speed of the scanner motor which turns the scanning mirror and the speed of the main motor which turns the drum are synchronized and each successive sweep of a beam is offset by 1 1200th of an inch The beams can be turned on and off to p
106. prevention The printer uses the separation roller in tray 2 to prevent multiple feeding Normally the separation roller rotates in the same direction as the feed roller The separation roller is equipped with a torque limiter but because the force of the feed roller exceeds that of the torque limiter the separation roller is actually driven by the feed roller If multiple sheets of media are picked up however the low friction force between the sheets weakens the rotational force from the feed roller to the separation roller Consequently the torque limiter takes control of the separation roller and rotates the separation roller in the reverse direction which removes the extra sheets Pickup roller C2 Media Driving force transmitted from the motor through the torque limiter Feed roller Driving force transmitted from the feed roller Separation roller Normal Figure 5 8 Multiple feed prevention Media skew prevention The printer uses a registration shutter on the registration assembly to prevent media from entering the printer skewed without decreasing the throughput speed When the leading edge of the media contacts the registration shutter the shutter does not open The feed roller continues to rotate and the media begins to sag When the entire leading edge comes in full contact with the shutter the media skew is corrected and registration shutter opens When the shutter opens the media can continue into the pr
107. printer driver if the appropriate driver is installed Program and printer driver settings override control panel settings In general it is best to change these settings in the printer driver if applicable The section that follows lists the settings and possible values In the Values column the default value for each setting is the one with an asterisk next to it Item Values Explanation SET PRINT TEST PAGE Use this item to shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and left to right You REGISTRATION SOURCE can also align the image that is printed on the front with the image that is printed on the back ADJUST TRAY N PRINT TEST PAGE Use this option to print a test page that shows the current registration settings SOURCE Use this option to select the tray for which you want to print the test page If installed optional trays appear as selections where N is the number of the tray ADJUST TRAY N Use this option to set the registration for the specified tray where N is the number of the tray A selection appears for each tray that is installed and registration must be set for each tray m X1 SHIFT Registration of the image on the paper from side to side as the paper lies in the tray For duplexing this side is the second side back of the paper m X2 SHIFT Registration of the image on the paper from side to side as the paper lies in the tray for the first side f
108. printing from tray 1 and opening the rear output bin m Setmargins at least 6 mm 0 24 inch away from the edges of the stoc Media specifications 37 38 Types of media to avoid The following characteristics can affect the performance of the HP LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 and 4350 Series printers printer unless the paper or other print media that is used is specifically designed to work with HP LaserJet printers Print media that is very rough highly textured or heavily embossed Multipart forms Print media that offsets materials or discolors Print media that is damaged curled wrinkled or irregularly shaped Paper that is extremely shiny or glossy Paper labels envelopes or transparencies that produce emissions or melt when exposed to a fusing temperature of 230 C 446 F for 0 05 second Media coatings dyes or inks that produce emissions or melt when exposed to a fusing temperature of 230 C 446 F for 0 05 second Envelopes that have an open flap with exposed adhesive that seals the envelope when the flap is closed Envelopes that contain clasps snaps tie strings windows or synthetic materials These materials can severely damage the printer Envelopes that are not square straight or constructed correctly Envelopes that have a basis weight less than 60 g m 16 Ib or greater than 105 g m 28 Ib Envelopes that have baggy construction or folds that are not sharply creased ET NOTE Some media types
109. processing the update Downloading a remote firmware update 91 92 Remote firmware update through a local Windows port If the printer is connected through a local port USB or parallel then you can send the RFU file directly to the printer by using a Copy command from a command prompt or an MS DOS window At the command prompt perform the following steps for your operating system Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me 1 From a command prompt or in an MS DOS window type Mode Ipt1 p E NOTE Ifthe printer is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1 then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command Press Enter The response you receive should be similar to these examples e LPT1 Not Rerouted e Resident portion of MODE loaded e Infinite retry on parallel printer time out At a command prompt type copy b FILENAME lt PORTNAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file including the path and lt PORTNAME gt is the name of the appropriate printer port such as LPT1 For example C V copy b c 4250fw rfu lot ET NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C V copy b c My Documents 4250fw rfu lpt Press Enter A message appears on the control panel See Printer messages during firmware update At the end of the upgrade process Ready appears on the printer control panel Print a configu
110. quality image defects continued See Table 7 32 White lines AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbC AaBbCcz Ra Main Aa BbCc A See Table 7 33 Smudged lines either See Table 7 34 White spots on black direction See Table 7 35 Scattered lines See Table 7 36 Blurred print See Table 7 37 Black AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc See Table 7 39 Dark print See Table 7 38 Blank page page Table 7 20 Light print partial page Possible cause Recommended action s Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc The print cartridge is not installed correctly Remove the print cartridge and then reinstall it The top cover should close completely when the cartridge is fully seated The toner supply is low or the print cartridge developer is defective 1 Shake the print cartridge gently to redistribute the toner 2 Replace the cartridge The transfer roller is worn or contaminated or maintenance might be due Print a supplies status page seeSupplies status page and look at the maintenance kit gauge If maintenance is due install a maintenance kit For information about ordering a maintenance kit see chapter 8 Image formation troubleshooting 383 Table 7 21 Light print entire page Possible cause Recommended action Begin by performing the half self test functional check see Half self
111. receptacle and the power switch is pushed to the on position Overview Turn on the printer power If the control panel display remains blank random patterns appear or asterisks remain on the display perform power on checks to locate the cause of the problem During normal printer operation the main cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on Place your hand over the holes in the left side cover If the fan is operating you will feel a slight vibration and feel air passing into the printer You can also lean close to the printer and hear the fan operating When this fan is operational the dc side of the power supply is functioning correctly After the fan is operating the main motor turns on unless the top cover is open a jam condition is sensed or the paper path sensors are damaged You should be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on If the fan and main motor are operating correctly the next troubleshooting step is to separate print engine formatter and control panel problems Perform an engine test see Engine test page If the formatter is damaged it might interfere with the engine test If the engine test page does not print try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again If the engine test is then successful the problem is almost certainly with the formatter the control panel or the cable that connects them If the printer control panel
112. remove the fan cover plate callout 7 Power supply assembly 4 of 7 239 240 7 Unplug the left side fan and thermistor sensor connectors on the power supply PCA callout 8 and then remove three screws callout 9 Figure 6 63 Power supply assembly 5 of 7 6 Removing and replacing parts 8 Main assemblies Feed the two ribbon cables and the wire harness through the hole in the right side of the chassis under the power supply assembly Pull down on the power switch connector bar to slide it out of its mounting bracket and remove it Figure 6 64 Power supply assembly 6 of 7 CAUTION Make sure that the four rubber belts and plastic rollers see Paper feed belt assembly remain in place These belts and rollers can easily become dislodged and you might lose them 241 242 9 Grasp the power supply assembly callout 10 and lift it up slightly Pull it straight out of the chassis Figure 6 65 Power supply assembly 7 of 7 Q Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the power supply thread the heavy gauge wire Sr harness through the hole in the chassis first and then thread the two ribbon cables through the hole This prevents the harness and cables from crossing over each other when they are placed in the wire guide Make sure that you install the power switch connector bar when you install the power supply 6 Removing and replacing parts Paper feed belt assembly 1 Remove the power supp
113. repeats at 75 0 mm 2 95 inches or 94 0 mm about 3 7 inches replace the fuser see Fuser For more information about troubleshooting repeating defects see Repetitive defects troubleshooting The rollers are dirty A dirty roller in the paper path can cause a repetitive defect Examine and clean or replace the rollers in the paper path The media does not meet specifications Try a different media type or quality Preprinted form paper is used Some preprinted forms for example letterheads use an ink that cannot stand up to the high temperatures in the fuser Check the media for type and quality Replace the media and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications 390 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 28 Distorted images AaBbCc AaBbCc NACH DE AGBOCC AaBbCc AaBbCc Table 7 29 Skew Possible cause The media does not meet specifications or is not stored correctly Recommended action s 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The operating environment does not meet specifications The cables are not securely connected to the laser scanner assembly Make s
114. rotation phase which consists of main motor warm up scanner motor warm up high voltage control sequence and fuser warm up When the initial rotation phase ends the tray 1 pickup solenoid SL 102 is activated The cam rotates the paper tray lifter rises and the media comes in contact with the tray 1 pickup roller At the same time the tray 1 pickup roller rotates twice and picks up a sheet of media from tray 1 The separation pad prevents additional sheets from feeding with the first sheet The sheet then reaches the registration assembly where its skew is corrected The sheet then passes through the transfer separation and fusing stages through the delivery unit and is to the output bin ET NOTE If media is removed from tray 1 after the initial rotation phase but before the pickup roller pulls the media from the tray the tray 1 pickup roller might continue to rotate up to six times after which a jam detected Paper pickup and feed system 117 Tray 1 pickup roller Pd Tray 1 pickup solenoid Separation pad Figure 5 7 Tray 1 pickup 5 Theory of operation 118 Paper pickup and feed system 11 Printing from tray 2 When the dc controller PCA receives the print command the main motor M101 and scanner motor start their rotation When the main motor reaches its prescribed speed the feed roller clutch CL101 and tray 2 pickup solenoid SL101 are activated The main motor rotation drives the tray 2 pickup
115. rotational speed of the scanner motor based on the timing the BD1 signal is input and controls the speed to keep it constant While the scanner motor rotates at a constant speed the dc controller passes the VIDEO signals from the formatter on to the laser driver PCA The laser driver PCA emits light from the two laser diodes according to these signals VDO1 VDO1 VDO2 VDC2 The two laser beams pass through the collimator lens and cylindrical lens and strike the six sided mirror that is rotating at a constant speed The laser beams that are reflected off of the six sided mirror pass through the focus lens and reflective mirror and focus on the photosensitive drum The laser beams scan the drum surface at a constant speed As the six sided mirror rotates and the laser beam scans the drum surface at a constant speed a latent image forms on the drum surface General descriptions 113 Paper pickup and feed system 114 The pickup and feed system consists of various rollers that the printer motors drive The printer uses tray 1 the manual feeding tray and a cassette in tray 2 as media sources The printed media is delivered to either the rear output bin straight through printing or the top output bin the default destination One 500 sheet feeder and one 1 500 sheet feeder can be added to HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers Two additional 500 sheet feeders and one 1 500 sheet feeder can be added to HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series print
116. sheet feeder 2 of 2 VS1 7333 006CN Connector duplexer LJ 4250 4350 Electrical components VS1 7334 006CN Connector 6 point 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 WC4 5139 000CN Microswitch top cover Internal components 3 of 3 WG8 5362 000CN Sensor top bin full stack PS 104 PS 107 LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 WG8 5362 000CN Sensor top bin full PS104 LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 WG8 5624 000CN Sensor stack PS 107 LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3 WG8 5624 000CN Sensor stack PS104 LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3 XA9 1420 000CN Screw w washer m3x8 Electrical components XA9 1420 010CN Screw w washer M3X8 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 XA9 1500 000CN XA9 1500 000CN Screw s m3x8 Screw s m3x8 Internal components 1 of 3 Internal components 2 of 3 XA9 1500 000CN Screw s m3x8 Internal components 3 of 3 XA9 1500 000CN Screw s m3x8 Electrical components XA9 1503 000CN Screw tapping m3x6 Internal components 1 of 3 XA9 1503 000CN Screw tapping m3x6 Internal components 2 of 3 XA9 1523 010CN Screw B M4X8 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 XA9 1559 000CN Screw rs m3x10 Internal components 2 of 3 XA9 1559 000CN Screw rs m3x10 Inte
117. spring Media is wrinkled or folded Table 7 15 Causes for wrinkled or folded media at the paper path entrance Cause Solution The feed rollers or registration rollers are dirty or defective Replace the affected rollers The paper path contains foreign substances or dirt Remove any foreign substances or dirt from the paper path The cartridge shutter open close mechanism is damaged This can cause jams in which the media is crumpled into an accordion fold under the print cartridge The shutter in the print cartridge should open as you insert the cartridge If a shutter does not open replace the print cartridge The registration unit is defective Of the registration arm is dirty clean it If the arm is scarred or worn replace the registration unit Table 7 16 Causes for wrinkled or folded media at the media path exit Cause Solution The fuser inlet guide is dirty Replace the fuser See Fuser The fuser pressure roller is dirty or damaged Run several cleaning pages through the printer See Running the cleaning page manually If the problem persists replace the fuser See Fuser Media transport problems 37 oa Media is skewed Table 7 17 Causes for skewed media Cause Solution Paper dust or dirt has accumulated on the tray feed roller or Clean or replace the rollers Separation roller The tray feed roller and separation roller are worn irr
118. standard voltages HP LaserJet 4350 speed is 55 ppm Letter size and 52 ppm A4 size Default time from Ready mode to Sleep 30 minutes Boo H Ss Specifications 21 22 Acoustic emissions Table 1 17 Sound power and pressure level HP LaserJet 4200 Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4200 Lwag 6 8 Bels A 69 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4200 Lwag7 4 0 Bels A 40 dB A Sound pressure level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4200 Loam 54 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4200 Loam 27 dB A Values subject to change See http www hp com support 1j4200 for current information Configuration tested HP LaserJet 4200 Base printer simplex printing with A4 paper size 3 HP LaserJet 4200 speed is 35 ppm for A4 size N Table 1 18 Sound power and pressure level HP LaserJet 4200L Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4200L Lwag 6 8 Bels A 69 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4200L Lwaa 4 0 Bels A 40 dB A Sound pressure level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4200L Loam 54 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4200L Loam 27 dB A Values subject to change See http www hp com support 1j4200 for current information Configuration tested HP LaserJet 4200L Base printer simplex printing with A4 paper size 3 HP LaserJet 4200L speed is 30 ppm for A4 size N 1 Product information Table 1 19 Sound power and
119. stapler stacker 7 Troubleshooting Component errors ET NOTE When component errors occur a control panel message appears on the control panel display For more information about these messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages Table 7 45 Component error troubleshooting Possible cause Recommended action s The jogger mechanism or motor M1102 is defective stapler stacker only Inspect the jogger mechanism See Stacker and stapler stacker motors and solenoids If necessary replace the stapler stacker The paddle mechanism or motor M1101 is defective stapler stacker only The stapler mechanism or motor M1104 is defective stapler stacker only x Inspect the paddle mechanism See Stacker and stapler stacker motors and solenoids If necessary replace the stapler stacker m The stapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the stapler stacker m The stapler unit has failed Replace the stapler unit See Maintaining the stapler unit m The stapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the stapler stacker The 13 12 07 JAM IN THE STAPLER message appears on the control panel display but no jam is present in the stapler unit stapler stacker only m The staples are defective Replace the staple cartridge m The stapler unit is defective Replace the stapler unit See Maintaining the stapler unit m The stapler stacker PCA is defecti
120. tapping pan head m4x10 XB4 7401 007CN Covers Screw tapping pan head m4x10 XB4 7401 007CN Internal components 1 of 3 Screw tapping pan head m4x10 XB4 7401 007CN Internal components 2 of 3 Screw tapping pan head m4x10 XB4 7401 007CN Internal components 3 of 3 Screw tapping truss head m3x8 XB4 7300 809CN Internal components 2 of 3 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Screw tapping truss head m4x16 Part number XB4 7401 605CN Table and page Internal components 3 of 3 Screw tapping truss head m4x8 XB4 7400 809CN Internal components 2 of 3 Screw w washer m3x6 XB2 7300 607CN Internal components 1 of 3 Screw w washer M3X8 XA9 1420 010CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Screw w washer m3x8 XA9 1420 000CN Electrical components Screw w washer m4x6 XB2 7400 606CN Electrical components Sensor assembly RM1 1135 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Sensor gear assembly 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 0286 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Sensor size inside 1 500 sheet feeder RC1 0748 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Sensor size outside 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 0294 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Sensor stack PS 107 LJ 4250 4350 Sensor stack PS104 LJ 4250 4
121. temperature and stiffness requirements Overhead transparency film is very smooth and must contain a topcoat that provides the correct electrical and toner adhesion properties A transparency that is made of poor materials or that is too thin can easily melt in the fuser and damage the printer Overhead transparency materials must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process AN CAUTION To avoid damaging the printer use only transparencies that are recommended for use in monochrome laser printers Do not attempt to duplex or print on overhead transparencies or leave the printer default set to duplex on Damage to the printer might result Do not staple transparencies in the stapler stacker Transparencies that are used in the printer must be able to withstand the printer s maximum temperature of 230 C 446 F for 0 05 seconds Close the rear output bin to send transparencies to the top output bin If you have problems printing on transparencies use tray 1 and send printed transparencies to the top output bin Be sure to remove each transparency from the output bin as it is printed to keep the transparencies from sticking together 1 Product information Card stock and heavy paper Many types of card stock can be printed on from tray 1 including index cards and postcards Some card stock performs well because its construction is better suited for feeding through a laser printer For optimum printer performance do no
122. test functional check If the image on the print drum is light proceed with actions 1 2 3 6 and 7 If the drum image is normal proceed with actions 5 6 and 8 The toner supply is low Shake the print cartridge gently to redistribute the toner or replace the cartridge EconoMode is on EconoMode saves toner by reducing the dot density The effect might appear to be a print quality problem Turn EconoMode off The print density is set incorrectly Change the toner density see Print quality submenu to a darker setting and try to print the job again The media does not meet specifications The moisture content conductivity or surface finish might not work correctly with the electrophotographic process Try a different media type The transfer roller is defective or not installed correctly If the transfer roller loses conductivity it cannot pull toner from the drum effectively The high voltage connector springs are dirty or damaged Verify that the transfer roller is installed correctly If the transfer roller is damaged replace it See Transfer roller The high voltage connector springs protrude into the print cartridge cavity Clean the springs if they are dirty Replace the springs if they are damaged or missing The laser scanner shutter door is not opening correctly 1 Remove and reseat the print cartridge 2 Verify that the laser scanner shutter door ca
123. the fan duct 6 Removing and replacing parts Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series printer only ET NOTE This motor is not installed on the HP LaserJet 4200 4200L Series printers 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door e Top cover See Top cover e Right side cover See Right side cover e Formatter cover See Formatter cover 2 Gently pry back the two retaining tabs callout 1 and slip the anti static bar callout 2 off of them Rotate the anti static bar away from the printer to release it Remove the anti static bar 3 Unplug the print cartridge motor wire harness connector from the dc controller PCA location J86 Unweave the harness from the wire guide callout 3 ET NOTE You might have to remove additional wire harnesses from the wire guide to gain S access to the print cartridge motor wire harness Motors and fans 253 254 Support the motor callout 4 while removing three screws callout 5 and then lift the motor away from the printer ET NOTE If the mechanism includes a toroid remove the toroid from its retainer clip before removing the print cartridge motor ge Figure 6 75 Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series only 6 Removing and replacing parts Main motor 1 Motors and fans Remove the following assemblies e Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and
124. the fuser control circuit the high voltage circuit and the low voltage circuit The fuser control and high voltage circuits control the temperature of the fuser and generate high voltage according to signals from the dc controller PCA The low voltage circuit generates the dc voltages that other components in the printer use for example the dc controller PCA the motors and fans Power supply PCB High voltage power supply circuit Dc controller PCB Fuser control circuit Acinput E Pownvollage power dams m supply circuit s Figure 5 2 Power supply block diagram Fuser control circuit The fuser control circuit controls the fuser components The two fuser heaters provide the high temperatures that cause the toner to permanently bond to the media The fuser thermistor monitors the fuser temperatures The thermal switch detects abnormally high fuser temperatures and interrupts the supply of voltage to the fuser if the temperature is too high 5 Theory of operation Fuser heaters p ee eee thermal switch Fuser thermistor Figure 5 3 Fuser components Fuser over temperature protection The fusing heater safety circuit is located on the power supply and constantly monitors the fusing temperature To protect the fuser from excessive temperatures the printer has the following three protective functions m The CPU monitors the voltage of the thermistor If the fuser temperature reaches 240 C
125. the instructions on the cleaning page to complete the cleaning process LJ 4200 4300 only 7 Ifa duplexer is installed close the rear output bin You might need to create and process a cleaning page more than once When toner has been cleaned from the fuser assembly shiny black spots appear on the page s black strip If white spots appear on the black strip create and process another cleaning page How to use this Cleaning Page Remove all paper from Tray 1 Use and to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE and press Use and to highlight PRINT QUALITY and press Use and to highlight PROCESS CLEANING PAGE and press Load this sheet into Tray 1 with the printed side down and the arrow toward the printer CAUTION For best cleaning results Use copier paper with smooth surface Weight 64g m2 90g m2 171b 241b 0 Figure 4 2 Sample cleaning page LJ 4200 4300 only 4 Maintenance Running the cleaning page automatically Use the following procedure to set the printer to print cleaning pages automatically at a specified interval In order for the cleaning page to run without intervention the selected size and the plain paper type must be available in the printer The printer will not interrupt a printing job in process to run a cleaning page ET NOTE HP recommends that the cleaning page interval be set at 2 000 pages or fewer to make sure that excess toner is removed from the printer This ensures good print quality
126. the print cartridge receives a uniform negative primary charge The laser beam neutralizes areas of the drum surface to create the latent image When the areas that are exposed to the laser beam come in contact with toner the toner is attracted to them The transfer roller applies a positive charge to the back of the media The positive charge attracts the toner image from the photosensitive drum and transfers the image from the drum to the media The media then passes through the fuser where heat and pressure are applied to permanently bond the toner to the media 5 Theory of operation General descriptions This section describes the following printer components Dc controller PCA Power supply assembly Pickup and feed assembly Laser scanner assembly Image formation system 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder Envelope feeder Duplexer Stacker and stapler stacker General descriptions 107 108 Dc controller PCA The dc controller PCA controls the operation of the printer and its components The dc controller PCA starts printer operation when the printer power is turned on and the power supply sends dc voltage to the dc controller PCA After the printer enters the standby sequence see Table 5 1 Basic printer operating sequence the dc controller PCA sends out various signals to operate motors solenoids and other printer components based on the print command and image data that the host computer sends For a list of dc contr
127. the printer software automatically checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers Operating system PCL 6 PCL 5 PS PPD Windows 98 Me x x x x Windows NT 4 0 x x x x Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 x x x x Macintosh OS x x 1 Not all printer features are available from all drivers or operating systems See the context sensitive help in the printer driver for available features PostScript PS Printer Description files PPDs E NOTE If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software installation download them from www hp com go lj4200 software www hp com go 1j4250 software www hp com go lj4300 software or www hp com go lj4350 software After you are connected click Downloads and Drivers to find the driver that you want to download You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting them from an HP authorized service or support provider For Linux support see http www hp com go linux For UNIX support see http www hp com go jetdirectunix software For additional information see the support flyer that came in the printer box ET NOTE If the printer driver that you want is not on the printer CD or is not listed here check the install notes Readme and late breaking Readme files to see if the printer driver is supported If it is not supported hav
128. the stacker or stapler stacker m Thestapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the stacker or stapler stacker The optional bin 1 full message appears on the control m The paper full sensor PS1106 is damaged or panel display but bin 1 is empty or not full defective See Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors Replace the stacker or stapler stacker m Thestapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the stacker or stapler stacker 7 Troubleshooting Printer component locations The following sections describe the printer component locations Main printer parts Figure 7 10 Location of the main printer parts 1 of 4 1 Feed roller assembly 2 Lifter drive assembly 3 Laser scanner assembly 4 Duplexing pendulum assembly 5 Main drive assembly 6 Paper pickup drive assembly Printer component locations 409 Figure 7 11 Location of the main printer parts 2 of 4 ES gt a Q E o 5 2 2 o o E 2 e o a ci ol E 5 olaa lol qu 9 Hei el E 59 ze IS oO 25m o o 3 c O Ja Lr N e t 7 Troubleshooting 410 e e Figure 7 12 Location of the main printer parts 3 of 4 1 Transfer roller 2 Tray 1 pickup roller 3 Separation pad Printer component locations 411 N Y N Figure 7 13 Location of the main printer parts 4 of 4 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller 3 Separation roller in the
129. the stapler unit Follow these instructions to maintain the stapler unit To remove and replace the stapler unit 1 Locate the stapler unit on the right side of the stapler stacker 2 Rotate the stapler unit toward the front of the printer until the unit clicks Hold the stapler unit in this open position 3 Push down on the tab at the top of the stapler unit 4 Hold the tab down and pull the stapler unit up and out of the stapler stacker 5 Disconnect the cable that connects the stapler unit to the stapler stacker Only the blue part detaches Figure 4 3 Replacing the stapler unit 1 of 2 6 Remove the new stapler unit from its packaging 7 Connect the cable on the new stapler unit to the stapler stacker 8 Place the pivot pin that is located on the bottom of the new stapler unit into the hole in the stapler stacker located in the cavity that was created when the staple unit was removed earlier in this procedure 9 Press down on the tab at the top of the stapler unit and push the unit into the stapler stacker 10 Rotate the stapler unit toward the rear of the printer until the unit clicks into place 11 Ifthe stapler cartridge is not installed in the stapler unit install it now See To load staples Figure 4 4 Replacing the stapler unit 2 of 2 Maintaining the stapler unit 89 90 Loading staples Load staples if the printer control panel display prompts you with a STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES message the staple ca
130. time A 13 03 00 error message indicates that the media did not arrive at the top of page sensor PS103 within the specified time ET NOTE The 13 01 00 error can also be caused by the failure of the paper level sensor PS107 If this sensor fails the lifter motor does not rotate to lift the paper tray plate This error can also be caused when the printer attempts to pick up media from a tray that is empty but the paper out sensing mechanism for that tray has failed and the printer senses that the tray appears to be loaded 1 Press Hz button for detailed information about clearing the jam 2 Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions 3 Check that the paper out sensor in the specified tray is functioning correctly 4 Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it 5 Clean the feed and separation rollers If any of the rollers are worn or damaged replace them always replace both rollers at the same time 6 Verify that the pre feed sensor PS102 is installed correctly See Paper feed assembly 13 01 00 or 13 03 00JAM IN TRAY x For help press 13 03 00 Paper JAM open input trays then open and close top cover A page is jammed in tray X A 13 01 00 error message indicates that the media did not arrive at the pre feed sensor PS102 within the specified time A 13 03 00 error message indicates that the media did not arr
131. to a nonexistent directory 1 Printing can continue 2 Press Y Sriecr button to continue 3 If the message reappears then a problem might exist with the software application Display message troubleshooting 335 Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action alternates with Ready For menus press Y DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready For menus press Y The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full Use the device storage manager in the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the EIO disk drive and then try again Press Y Select button to continue DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready For menus press Y The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it To enable writing to the disk turn off the write protection by using the device storage manager in HP Web Jetadmin Press Y Select or Menu button to continue EIO X DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL For help press The EIO disk in slot X is not working correctly Remove the EIO disk from the indicated slot and reinstall it If the error persists replace the EIO disk drive ENVELOPE FEEDER EMPTY The envelope feeder is empty Refill the envelope feeder Turn off the print
132. tray 412 7 Troubleshooting Printer switches and sensors Figure 7 14 Location of the printer switches and sensors SW101 Top cover open switch SW102 Paper size switch PS101 Tray 2 paper sensor PS102 Pre feed sensor PS103 Top of page sensor PS104 Output bin full sensor PS105 Tray 1 paper sensor on the tray 1 pickup assembly PS106 Paper width sensor 1 PS107 Paper stack position sensor PS108 Fuser assembly delivery sensor PS109 Paper width sensor 2 LJ 4250 4350 only TH2 Fuser temperature sensor LJ 4250 4350 only Printer component locations 413 Printer motors and fans Figure 7 15 Location of the printer motors and fans 1 Main cooling fan 2 Main drive motor 3 Right side cooling fan HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only 4 Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only 5 Lifter drive motor Oe u A 414 7 Troubleshooting Printer PCAs Figure 7 16 Location of the printer PCAs 1 Power supply assembly high voltage and low voltage circuits 2 Dc controller PCA Printer component locations 415 Accessory component locations The following sections describe the component locations within the printer accessories 500 sheet feeder main parts Figure 7 17 Location of the 500 sheet paper feeder main parts 1 500 sheet feeder separation roller in the tray 2 500 sheet feeder feed roll
133. troubleshooting 385 downloading firmware updates 91 draft quality printing 72 162 380 drivers help 14 Linux 13 operating systems supported 13 OS 2 14 selecting 14 settings 15 dropouts troubleshooting 386 drum image formation operations 106 153 troubleshooting 380 drum rotation functional check 381 duplex printing accessory jams 374 models including 5 paper path test 80 369 paper specifications 28 pickup and feed operations settings 69 usage page 63 wiring diagram 432 duplexing pendulum assembly locating 409 removing 217 134 E e mail alerts 315 317 EconoMode 162 380 EconoMode setting 72 EIO cards configuration page 312 operations 163 partnumbers 452 settings 77 ElO slots 163 electrical specifications 20 electrostatic discharge ESD embedded Web server 315 energy specifications 20 ENERGY STAR compliance 44 engine test page 329 envelope feeder envelope specifications 28 jam detection operations 133 168 pickup and feed operations 132 settings 64 wiring diagram 433 envelopes default size setting 68 margins 35 specifications 26 34 storing 35 environmental features 44 environmental specifications paper 30 printer 24 52 error messages alphabetical eventlog 80 numerical 348 settings 75 troubleshooting 333 eventlog 80 333 F factory defaults cold reset 325 control panel 59 restoring 78 faded print troubleshooting 383 fans life expectancies 88 locating 414 o
134. two sided printing Printer configurations dtns model Table 1 5 Printer descriptions dtns model dtns model Availability Configuration HP LaserJet 4200dtns m printer Q2446A 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection Duplexer for automatic two sided printing 500 sheet stacker output accessory HP LaserJet 4300dtns m printer Q2435A 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection Duplexer for automatic two sided printing 500 sheet stacker output accessory 1 Product information dtnsl models Table 1 6 Printer descriptions dtnsl model dtnsl model Availability Configuration HP LaserJet 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4200Gtnsl printer Q2447A xm One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays m HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection x Duplexer for automatic two sided printing m 500 sheet stapler stacker output accessory HP LaserJet 80 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB 4250dtnsl printer Q5404A m One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays m HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network Duplexer for automatic two sided printing m 500 sheet stapler stacker output accessory HP LaserJet 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4300dtns printer
135. type to its default setting OPTIMIZE HIGH TRANSFER LINE DETAIL RESTORE OPTIMIZE HIGH TRANSFER Set to ON if you are using highly resistive lower quality papers HP recommends using only HP paper and print media LINE DETAIL Set to ON to improve the appearance of lines if scattered lines are appearing RESTORE OPTIMIZE Returns to the defaults for the Optimize settings RESOLUTION 300 600 FASTRES 1200 PRORES 1200 Use this item to select the resolution All values print at the same speed 300 Produces draft print quality and can be used for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of printers 600 Produces high quality print for text and can be used for compatibility with the HP LaserJet 4 family of printers FASTRES 1200 Produces 1200 dpi print quality for fast high quality printing of business text and graphics PRORES 1200 Produces 1200 dpi printing for the best quality in line art and graphic images E NOTE Itis best to change the resolution in the program or printer driver Program and printer driver settings override control panel settings OFF LIGHT MEDIUM DARK Use the Resolution Enhancement technology REt setting to produce print with smooth angles curves and edges REt does not affect print quality if the print resolution is set to FastRes 1200 All other print resolutions benefit from REt E NOTE Itis best to change the REt setting in the
136. values In the Values column the default value for each setting is the one that has an asterisk next to it Item Values Explanation ENVELOPE FEEDER SIZE COM10 This item appears only if the optional HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only envelope feeder is installed Set the MONARCH value to correspond with the envelope size that is currently loaded in the C5 ENVELOPE optional envelope feeder DL ENVELOPE B5 ENVELOPE ENVELOPE FEEDER TYPE ANY TYPE This item appears only if the optional HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only envelope feeder is installed Set the PLAIN value to correspond with the envelope type that is currently loaded in the PREPRINTED optional envelope feeder LETTERHEAD PREPUNCHED LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR CARDSTOCK gt 164 G M2 ROUGH TRAY 1 SIZE ANY SIZE Use this item to set the value to correspond with the media size that is LETTER currently loaded in tray 1 LEGAL ANY If both the type and size for tray 1 are set to ANY the printer will pull EXECUTIVE media from tray 1 first if media is loaded in the tray A4 A size other than ANY The printer AS does not pull from this tray unless the type or size of the print job matches the STATEMENT type or size that is loaded in this tray 8 5 x 13 3 Operation Item Values Explanation B5 JIS EXECUTIVE JIS D POSTCARD JIS 16K ENVELOPE 10 ENVELOPE MONARCH ENVELOPE C5 ENVELOPE DL ENVELOPE B5 CUSTOM TRAY 1 TYPE ANY Use this item to set the value to co
137. wire harness is fully seated in its connector on the sheet feeder PCA Replace the tray 3 lifter driver assembly See 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly or 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly Replace the tray 3 feeder controller PCA See 500 sheet feeder control PCA or 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA 60 4 Tray 4 lifter motor failure The tray 4 lifter motor is not functioning Tray 4 can be a 500 sheet feeder or 1 500 sheet feeder accessory Turn the printer off and then on If the error persists turn the printer off Verify that the tray 4 lifter wire harness is fully seated in its connector on the sheet feeder PCA Replace the tray 4 lifter assembly See 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly or 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly Replace the tray 4 feeder controller PCA See 500 sheet feeder control PCA or 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA 62 NO SYSTEM To continue turn off then on No system firmware image was found Turn the printer off and then on Reseat the firmware DIMM in slot J1 See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 onl Replace the firmware DIMM See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only Display message troubleshooting 361 Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Recommended action Control panel message Description 4 Replace the formatter assembly See Formatter assembly 64 A scan buffer error
138. you select CONTINUE after a REPLACE CARTRIDGE condition Replace the print cartridge as soon as possible to ensure good print quality If the end of drum life is reached the printer stops regardless of the CARTRIDGE OUT setting JAM RECOVERY AUTO Use this item to specify how the printer behaves if a jam occurs AUTO The printer automatically selects the best mode for ON printer jam recovery usually ON OFF The printer does not reprint pages following a jam Printing performance might be increased with this setting ON The printer automatically reprints pages after a jam is cleared RAM DISK AUTO Use this item to specify how the RAM disk is configured This item appears only if no optional hard disk accessory is OFF installed AUTO The printer determines the optimal RAM disk size based on the amount of available memory OFF The RAM disk is not available E NOTE If you change the setting from OFF to AUTO the printer automatically reinitializes when it becomes idle LANGUAGE ENGLISH Selects the language for the messages that appear on the printer control panel display Several 76 3 Operation Stapler stacker submenu Use this submenu to select settings for the optional stapler stacker if it is installed Some items on this menu are available in the program or printer driver if the appropriate driver is installed The section that follows lists the settings and possible values In the Va
139. you might want to disable the jam recovery If jam recovery is disabled the printer will not attempt to reprint the jammed pages NOTE During the recovery process the printer might reprint several pages that were printed correctly before the jam occurred Be sure to remove any duplicated pages To disable the jam recovery 1 Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus Press Y Down Arrow button to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE Press y to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press Y to scroll to SYSTEM SETUP 2 3 4 5 Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP 6 Press v to scroll to JAM RECOVERY 7 Press v to select JAM RECOVERY 8 Press Y to scroll to OFF 9 Press v to select OFF 10 Press the Pause Resume button to return to the READY state 7 Troubleshooting Avoiding jams Use this table to help avoid specific types of jams Table 7 8 Common causes of paper jams Cause Solution The print media does not meet HP recommended media storage and use specifications Use only media that meets HP specifications See chapter 1 in this manual or the HP print media guide available at http www hp com support ljpaperguide for media recommendations A supply item is installed incorrectly which causes repeated jams Verify that the print cartridge and the fuser are correctly installed You are reloading paper that has already passed through a printer or copier Do not use media that has been used previo
140. your fingers If the problem persists replace the transfer roller See Transfer roller Poor high voltage contact exists between the power supply and the print cartridge or transfer roller Inspect the contacts and clean them if they are dirty Replace them if they are damaged The power supply is defective the transfer voltage is low Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply Table 7 24 Lines Possible cause Recommended action s Acbkta AcdBbcogq AdBbcoca AdBbcocGo AdBbcoca Vertical lines in the paper path direction Circumfrential scars appear on the photosensitive drum Replace the print cartridge Foreign materials are deposited on the laser outlet of the printer or the laser inlet of the cartridge Remove the foreign materials The print cartridge is not installed correctly Remove the print cartridge and then reinstall it The top cover should close completely when the print cartridge is fully seated The print cartridge is defective The fuser roller is worn or dirty Replace the print cartridge Process a printer cleaning page See Running the cleaning page manually Several pages might be required if the fuser is very dirty If the problem persists replace the fuser See Fuser The static eliminator teeth just beyond the transfer roller are contaminated or defective Light is leaking into the printer Clea
141. 0 Fuser 220 240 V LJ 4300 Fuser 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 Cable fuser LJ 4200 4200L Cable fuser LJ 4250 4350 Part number RC1 0200 020CN RC1 0272 000CN RC1 3338 000CN RC1 0273 000CN RC1 0274 020CN RC1 0342 020CN RC1 0343 020CN RC1 0344 020CN RC1 0386 000CN RG1 4236 040CN RM1 1108 000CN RG1 4237 040CN XA9 1559 000CN XA9 1500 000CN RH7 1577 000CN RK2 0280 000CN RH7 1573 000CN RK2 0278 000CN RH7 7116 000CN RK2 0359 000CN RC1 0198 000CN WC4 5139 000CN RC1 0136 000CN RG1 4213 000CN RC1 0320 000CN RC1 0019 000CN RM1 0013 140CN RM1 0101 200CN RM1 1082 000CN RM1 0014 140CN RM1 0102 200CN RM1 1083 000CN RG1 4205 000CN RM1 1216 000CN Qty Internal components 471 Ref Description Part number Qty 26 Cable fuser LJ 4300 RG1 4231 000CN 1 27 Paper delivery assembly RM1 0026 040CN 1 28 Duplexing pendulum assembly RM1 0002 020CN 1 29 Lifter drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0033 020CN 1 29 Lifter drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1074 000CN 1 30 Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4200 4300 also see Figure 8 12 RM1 0004 060CN 1 Tray 1 pickup assembly 30 Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 12 RM1 1097 000CN 1 Tray 1 pickup assembly 501 Screw tapping pan head m4x10 XB4 7401 007CN 4 502 Screw tapping truss head m4x16 XB4 7401 605CN 2 472 8 Parts and diagrams Internal components 473 474 3 S A 3150 2
142. 0 RK2 0274 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Motor print cartridge M102 8 pin LJ 4300 RH7 1576 020CN Internal components 1 of 3 Motor stepping 1 500 sheet feeder RH7 1603 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Name plate kit LJ 4200 Q2425 67901 Covers Name plate kit LJ 4200L Q3993 40001 Covers Name plate kit LJ 4200Ln Q3994 40004 Covers Name plate kit LJ 4250 Q5400 67911 Covers Name plate kit LJ 4300 Q2431 67908 Covers Name plate kit LJ 4350 Q5406 67912 Covers Number display optional feeder LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3304 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 498 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Output bin fits stapler stapler stacker or stacker Part number RM1 0248 000CN Table and page Stapler stacker stacker and stapler Overlay control panel AR LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 601 11 Covers Overlay control panel CS HU PL EL LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 60103 Covers Overlay control panel EN LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3356 000CN Covers Overlay control panel EN AR LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 60112 Covers Overlay control panel EN AR LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 60107 Covers Overlay control panel EN CS HU PL LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 60108 Covers Overlay control panel EN DE FR NL LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 60108 Covers Overlay control panel EN FR DE IT LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 60107 Covers Overlay control panel EN FR DE IT LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 6010
143. 0 and if there is a remainder add 1 to the quotient to determine the month the printer was installed 3 The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the day of the month If there was no reminder from the calculation in step 2 then the day of the month is the 30th Using the Service ID 12287 as an example the date conversion is as follows m 12 1990 2002 so the year is 2002 m 287 divided by 30 9 with a remainder of 17 Add 1 to 9 to get 10 so the month is October m The remainder from the above calculation is 17 so that is the day of the month m The complete date is 17 October 2002 A 6 day grace period is built into the date system Restoring the Service ID If you replace the formatter the Service ID is lost and must be restored Use this menu item to reset the Service ID which is calculated based on the date the printer was first used The date format is YYDDD Use the following procedure to calculate the Service ID 1 To calculate YY subtract 1990 from the calendar year 2 To calculate DDD use the following formula 30 calendar month 1 calendar day DDD If the calendar day is 31 use 30 instead Using October 17 2002 as the date the printer was first used the service ID conversion is as follows m 2002 minus 1990 12 so YY 12 m 10 minus 1 calendar month minus 1 9 m 9times 30 270 m 270 plus 17 the calendar day 287 so DDD 287 m The complete service ID number is 12287
144. 0 mm 8 5 x 13 inches B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 inches 16K 197 x 273 mm 7 8 x 10 8 inches Media specifications 2 E Table 1 25 Tray 2 and optional 500 sheet tray supported sizes and weights all models continued Size Dimensions Weight Capacity Custom Hp Ve x 210 mm E NOTE For additional information about using 5 8 x 8 3 Inches custom media see the notes under Media Maximum 216 x 356 mm specifications 8 5 x 14 inches The printer supports a wide range of sizes Check the printer software for supported sizes Capacity can vary depending on the media weight and thickness as well as the environmental conditions N Table 1 26 Optional 1 500 sheet tray supported sizes and weights Size Dimensions Weight Capacity Letter 216 x 279 mm 60 to 120 g m 16 to 32 Ib 1 500 sheets of 75 g m 8 5 x 11 inches 20 Ib paper A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness as well as the environmental conditions Table 1 27 Optional duplexer supported sizes and weights Size Dimensions Weight Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 60 to 120 g m 16 to 32 Ib A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 3 x 10 5 inches Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches A5 14
145. 00 sheet feeder RC1 0486 020CN 1 2 Cover left 500 sheet tray RC1 0487 020CN 1 3 Cover right 500 sheet tray RC1 0488 020CN 1 4 Cover number display plate 500 sheet tray RC1 0500 000CN 1 7 Cover legal RC1 0509 000CN 1 11 Number display optional feeder LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3304 000CN 1 not PCA 500 sheet feeder RM1 1122 000CN 1 shown not Cable interface upper 500 sheet feeder LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4201 000CN 1 shown not Cable interface upper 500 sheet feeder LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1236 000CN 1 shown not Cable interface lower 500 sheet feeder LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4202 000CN 1 shown not Cable interface lower 500 sheet feeder LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1237 000CN 1 shown not Cable size sensor 500 sheet feeder RG1 4204 000CN 1 shown not Cable sensor assembly 500 sheet feeder RM1 1238 000CN 1 shown not Media size sensor assembly 500 sheet feeder RM1 0041 000CN 1 shown not Gear 18T 500 sheet feeder RU5 0088 000CN 1 shown Accessories 487 488 Figure 8 16 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 18 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Ref Description Part number Qty 1 500 sheet feeder Q2444 67902 1 1 Paper pickup assembly 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 1134 000CN 1 2 Cover assembly front 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 0273 070CN 1 3 Pickup drive assembly 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 1133 000CN 1 4 Lifter drive assembly 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 1136 000CN 1 Accessories
146. 000CN Guide dc controller LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 1 of 3 RC1 0272 000CN Duct fan 2 right side LJ 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0273 000CN Guide left Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0274 020CN Guide right Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0287 020CN Cover left LU 4200 4300 Covers 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 22 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Table and page RC1 0288 000CN Cover formatter Covers RC1 0289 000CN Cover paper handling Covers RC1 0290 000CN Cover legal LJ 4200 4300 Covers RC1 0291 000CN Cover duplexing LJ 4200 4300 Covers RC1 0307 000CN Spring leaf grounding top Cover LJ 4250 4350 only Covers RC1 0320 000CN Cover envelope Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0330 020CN Sheet solenoid damper Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0340 020CN Guide scanner cable Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0341 000CN Rod fan 2 LJ 4300 Internal components 1 of 3 RC1 0342 020CN Holder thermistor plastic Internal components 3 of 3 RC1 0343 020CN RC1 0344 020CN RC1 0371 000CN Holder thermistor metal Cover fan connector Gear 23t Internal components 3 of 3 Internal components 3 of 3 Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0385 000CN Guide scanner cable Internal components 2 of 3 RC1 0386
147. 00CN RC1 0206 000CN RM1 0045 000CN RM1 1067 000CN RM1 0113 000CN RC1 0264 000CN RG1 4212 000CN RM1 1198 000CN XA9 1500 000CN XD9 0232 000CN XA9 1559 000CN RH7 5355 000CN RK2 0269 000CN RG1 4221 000CN RM1 1181 000CN RM1 0036 000CN RM1 0037 020CN RC1 0208 030CN RC1 0209 000CN RC1 0243 000CN RC1 0211 000CN RC1 3352 000CN RC1 0212 000CN RC1 0371 000CN RL1 0013 000CN RC1 0213 000CN RC1 0153 030CN Qty Internal components 467 468 Ref 31 32A 32A 33 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 44 45 45 49 50 51 51 52 501 502 503 Description Sheet solenoid damper Cable feeder connector LJ 4200 4300 Cable feeder connector LJ 4250 4350 Kicker assembly Size sensing assembly tray 2 Foot Guard right edge Guide ECU rear Guard left edge Screw tapping m3x6 Cable accessory interface Swing plate assembly Cable sensor top bin full LJ 4200 4300 Cable sensor top bin full LJ 4250 4350 Cable envelope feeder connecting LJ 4200 4300 Cable envelope feeder connecting LJ 4250 4350 Spring torsion Spring torsion Sensor top bin full PS104 LJ 4200 4300 Sensor stack PS104 LJ 4250 4350 Pickup drive assembly Screw tapping pan head m4x10 Screw tapping truss head m3x8 Screw tapping truss head m4x8 Part number RC1 0330 020CN RG1 4223 000CN RM1 1192 000CN RL1 0015 0
148. 00CN RM1 0041 020CN RB1 8107 000CN RC1 0242 000CN RC1 0244 000CN RC1 0247 000CN XA9 1503 000CN RM1 0042 000CN RM1 0043 020CN RG1 4214 000CN RM1 1189 000CN RG1 4224 000CN RM1 1193 000CN RC1 0254 000CN RC1 1923 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5624 000CN RM1 0034 040CN XB4 7401 007CN XB4 7300 809CN XB4 7400 809CN Qty 8 Parts and diagrams Internal components 469 z t e 2 8 Internal components 3 of 3 Figure 8 8 Parts and diagrams 470 Table 8 10 Internal components 3 of 3 Ref 1 10 10 10 12 13 14 14 16 16 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 Description Support lifter drive assembly Duct fan 2 right side LJ 4300 Duct fan 2 right side LJ 4250 4350 Guide left Guide right Holder thermistor plastic Holder thermistor metal Cover fan connector Guide connecting cable Dc controller LJ 4200 Dc controller LJ 4250 4350 Dc controller LJ 4300 Screw rs m3x10 Screw s m3x8 Fan right LJ 4300 Fan right LJ 4250 4350 Fan left LJ 4200 4300 Fan left LJ 4250 4350 Thermistor LJ 4200 4300 Thermistor LJ 4250 4350 Spring tension Microswitch top cover Bushing paper delivery Cable door switch Cover envelope Cover inner front right Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4200 Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4300 Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 Fuser 220 240 V LJ 420
149. 00tn 4200dtn 4200dtns 4200dtnsL 4200L 4200L n 4250 4250n 4250tn 4250dtn 4250dtnsl 4300 4300n 4300tn 4300dtn 4300dtns 4300dtnsL 4350 4350n 4350tn 4350dtn and 4350dtnsl laserkirjoitin on k ytt j n kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasers teen p syn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty standardin EN60825 1 1994 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP LaserJet 4200 4200n 4200tn 4200dtn 4200dtns 4200dtnsL 4200L 4200Ln 4250 4250n 4250tn 4250dtn 4250dtnsl 4300 4300n 4300tn 4300dtn 4300dtns 4300dtnsL 4350 4350n 4350tn 4350dtn and 4350dtnsl kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita k ytt j n k sikirjassa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitettuja yll pitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja VARO Mik li
150. 1 100 pin DDR DIMM 48 MB LJ 4250 4350 Q6007 67951 1 100 pin DDR DIMM 64 MB LJ 4250 4350 Q2625 67951 1 100 pin DDR DIMM 80 MB LJ 4250 4350 Q6008 67951 1 100 pin DDR DIMM 96 MB LJ 4250 4350 Q6009 67951 1 100 pin DDR DIMM 128 MB LJ 4250 4350 Q2626A Q2626 67951 1 100 pin DDR DIMM 256 MB LJ 4250 4350 Q2627A Q2627 67951 1 100 pin DDR DIMM 512 MB LJ 4250 4350 Q2628A Q2628 67951 1 Font DIMM Korean language LJ 4200 4300 D4838A 1 Font DIMM Simplified Chinese language LJ 4200 4300 C4293A 1 Font DIMM Traditional Chinese language LJ 4200 4300 C4292A 2 EIO hard disk 20 GB J6073 61001 J6073 69001 Pen 450 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 4 Memory fonts and mass storage continued Ref Item Product number Service exchange number 3 Flash DIMM 8 MB LJ 4200 4300 C8530A 3 Flash DIMM 12 MB LJ 4200 4300 C7867A Consumables and accessories 451 Cables and connectivity Table 8 5 Cables and connectivity Ref Item Product number Service exchange number 1 HP Jetdirect 615n Fast Ethernet internal print server for J6057A J6057 69001 HP LaserJet 4200 4300 printers only 1 HP Jetdirect 620n Fast Ethernet internal print server for J7934A J7934 61001 J7934 69001 HP LaserJet 4250 4350 printers 1 HP Jetdirect 625n Gigabit internal print server for J7960A J7960 61001 HP LaserJet 4250 4350 printers 1 HP Jetdirect 680n 802 11b wireless Ethernet internal print J6058A
151. 1 Check the fuses FU1 and FU2 on the power supply 2 Replace the power supply assembly if necessary The main cooling fan located on the An operational fan indicates the following conditions left side of the printer does not turn on when the printer is started m The ac power is present in the printer x The dc power supply is functional 24 V 5 V and 3 3 V are being generated m The dc controller s microprocessor is functional If the fan is not working 1 Turn the printer off and remove the formatter Disconnect the optional accessories 2 Turn the printer on and check the fan again If the fan is still not working 1 Verify that the fan is connected to the power supply 2 Replace the fan See Main cooling fan left side Troubleshooting process 307 Table 7 2 Power on defect or blank display continued Problem Action 3 Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 4 Replace the dc controller See Dc controller PCA Note The fan only operates during the initial startup and while printing and when the temperature inside the printer is too high If the temperature is too high the fan turns on to cool the inside of the printer The fan works but the control panel 1 Print an engine test Engine test page display is blank 2 If the engine test is successful perform the following steps in order e Reseatthe control panel and formatter connector See Control panel assembly and Formatte
152. 2 20 7 0 07 HP LaserJet 4200tn printer 580 W 23 21 8 0 07 HP LaserJet 4200dtn printer 580 W 24 24 2 0 07 HP LaserJet 4200dtns printer 580 W 26 24 1 0 07 HP LaserJet 4200dtnsL printer 580 W 26 at least 24 2 0 07 Values are subject to change See http www hp com support lj4200 for current information Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages HP LaserJet 4200 speed is 35 ppm Letter size and 35 ppm A4 size PowerSave default activation time is 30 minutes Ron Table 1 13 Power consumption HP LaserJet 4200L average in watts Product model Printing Ready PowerSave Off HP LaserJet 4200L printer 580 W 21 20 4 0 07 HP LaserJet 4200Ln printer 580 W 22 20 7 0 07 Values are subject to change See http www hp com support lj4200 for current information Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages HP LaserJet 4200L speed is 35 ppm Letter size and 35 ppm A4 size PowerSave default activation time is 30 minutes BO HM 1 Product information Table 1 14 Power consumption HP LaserJet 4250 average in watts Product model Printing Ready Sleep Off HP LaserJet 4250 675 W 20 W 18W 0 2W HP LaserJet 4250n 675 W 20W 18W 0 2W HP LaserJet 4250tn 675 W 20W 18W 0 2W HP LaserJet 4250dtn 675 W 21W 19W 0 2W HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl 750 W 22W 19W 0 2W eae eee een eee se a NECK CC NNGELSOG E UECAGNCM EES Values subject to change
153. 2 Covers Overlay control panel EN FR DE NL LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 60113 Covers Overlay control panel EN RU LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 60111 Covers Overlay control panel EN RU TR LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 60106 Covers Overlay control panel ES PT IT LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 60105 Covers Overlay control panel FR LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 60109 Covers Overlay control panel Greek LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 40023 Covers Overlay control panel Hebrew LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 40022 Covers Overlay control panel IT ES PT SP LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 60110 Covers Overlay control panel NO SV FI LJ 4250 4350 Q5400 60104 Covers Overlay control panel NO SW FI LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 60109 Covers Overlay control panel Turkish LJ 4200 4300 Q2431 40021 Covers Paper delivery assembly RM1 0026 040CN Internal components 3 of 3 Paper pickup assembly 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 1134 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Paper pickup drive assembly 500 sheet feeder RM1 0056 000CN 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 PCA 1 500 sheet feeder RG1 4374 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 PCA 500 sheet feeder RM1 1122 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Pickup drive assembly Pickup drive assembly 1 500 sheet feeder Pickup sensor cable assembly LJ4200 4300 RM1 0034 040CN RM1 1133 000CN RG1 4221 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Internal components 2 of 3 Pickup sensor cable assemb
154. 2 feed rollers This disengages the roller lifting arm from the clutch gear amp 9 5i Gs Figure 6 49 Paper pickup drive assembly 4 of 5 9 Rotate the top of the paper pickup drive gear assembly away from the printer and then lift the assembly out of the printer Main assemblies 225 226 pr ws Figure 6 50 Paper pickup drive assembly 5 of 5 si V Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the tray 2 drive gears and shaft verify that the gears are seated on the shaft locking bars and that the shaft collars are correctly positioned in the paper pickup drive gear assembly mounting bracket and printer chassis Table 6 2 Tray 2 drive gear and shaft Pickup drive unit E ring Bushing 23T gear Retard roller drive shaft 6 Removing and replacing parts Tray 2 lifter drive assembly 1 Main assemblies Remove the following assemblies Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door Top cover See Top cover Right side cover See Right side cover Formatter cover See Formatter cover Formatter See Formatter assembly Paper pickup drive assembly See Paper pickup drive assembly Unplug the tray 2 lifter drive assembly connector from the dc controller PCA location J93 and the two flat cables callout 1 locations J80 J81 Unweave the wire harness from the cable guide callout 2 ET NOTE You might have to remove additi
155. 2000 XP and Server 2003 On the File menu in the software program click Print Select the printer and then click Properties or Preferences The steps can vary this procedure is the most common Click Start click Settings and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes Right click the printer icon and then select Printing Preferences Click Start click Settings and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes Right click the printer icon and then select Properties Click the Device Settings tab Macintosh OS V9 1 On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus On the File menu click Print As you change settings on the pop up menu click Save Settings Click the desktop printer icon From the Printing menu click Change Setup Macintosh OS X V10 1 On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus and then on the main pop up menu click Save Custom Setting These settings are saved as the Custom option To use the new settings you must select the Custom option every time that you open a program and print Delete the printer and reinstall it The driver will be auto configured with the new options when it is reinstalled NOTE Use this procedure for AppleTalk connections only Configuration setting
156. 21 67901 2 Preventive maintenance kit LJ 4250 4350 printers 220 240 V Q5422A Q5422 67901 2 Preventive maintenance kit LJ 4300 printers 110 127 V Q2436A Q2436 67905 2 Preventive maintenance kit LJ 4300 printers 220 240 V Q2437A Q2437 67905 3 1 000 staple cartridge 3 pack Q3216A Q3216 60500 Consumables and accessories 447 Accessories Figure 8 2 Accessories Table 8 3 Accessories Ref Accessory Product number Service exchange number 1 500 sheet tray and feeder Q2240B Q2440 67903 2 1 500 sheet tray and feeder Q2444B Q2444 67902 3 Duplexer Q2439B Q2439 67902 4 75 sheet envelope feeder Q2438B Q2438 67902 5 500 sheet stapler stacker Q2443B Q2443 67908 6 500 sheet stacker Q2442B Q2442 67902 7 Printer stand Q2445B Q2445 60102 Consumables and accessories 449 Memory fonts and mass storage Figure 8 3 Memory fonts and mass storage Table 8 4 Memory fonts and mass storage Ref Item Product number Servicelexchange number 1 Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 base model Q2453 67925 1 Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 all models except for base model Q2453 67906 1 Firmware DIMM LJ 4200L Q2453 67932 1 Firmware DIMM LJ 4300 Q2453 67915 1 SDRAM DIMM 8 MB LJ 4200 4300 C7842 67901 1 SDRAM DIMM 16 MB LJ 4200 4300 C7843 67901 1 SDRAM DIMM 32 MB LJ 4200 4300 C7845 67901 1 SDRAM DIMM 64 MB LJ 4200 4300 Q1887 67901 1 SDRAM DIMM 128 MB LJ 4200 4300 C9121 67901
157. 250 4350 Mode This feature on the configuration menu conserves power after the printer has been idle for a specific period of time When the printer is in PowerSave or Sleep mode the control panel backlight is turned off but the printer retains all printer settings downloaded fonts and macros The default setting is POWERSAVE ON or SLEEP ON with a 30 minute idle time PowerSave Sleep can also be turned off from the resets menu on the control panel The printer exits PowerSave or Sleep mode and enters the warm up cycle when any of the following occurs m A print job valid data ora PML or PUL command is received at the parallel port serial port or EIO card m A control panel key is pressed m The top cover is opened m Atray is opened m The engine test button is pressed ET NOTE Printer error messages override the PowerSave or Sleep message The printer enters PowerSave or Sleep mode at the appropriate time but the error message continues to appear Formatter system 161 162 Resolution Enhancement technology The formatter contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology REt which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the dc controller PCA to produce smoothed line edges The REt can be turned on or off from the control panel or from some software programs The default setting is medium ET NOTE The REt settings that are sent from software programs or printer drivers override the control
158. 290 6 Removing and replacing parts 3 Lift the door straight up and off of the door hinge pins Figure 6 119 1 500 sheet feeder door 3 of 3 E NOTE The door hinge pins are not captive when the door is removed If the feeder must be turned on its side or placed upside down remove the hinge pins and the door spring callout 2 Place the pins and the spring where you will not lose them 1 500 sheet feeder rear cover 1 Locate the upper rear cover locking tabs callout 1 on each side of the rear cover Use a flat blade screwdriver to release these tabs Figure 6 120 1 500 sheet feeder rear cover 1 of 2 Accessories 291 Rotate the top of the cover away from the feeder Lift up on the cover to release it 1 500 sheet feeder rear cover 2 of 2 1 500 sheet feeder right side cover Remove the following assemblies e Door See e Rear cover See Remove one screw callout 1 1 500 sheet feeder right side cover 1 of 3 292 6 Removing and replacing parts 3 Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the cover locking tab on the door hinge side callout 2 Figure 6 123 1 500 sheet feeder right side cover 2 of 3 4 Rotate the top of the cover away from the chassis and then lift it up and remove it Figure 6 124 1 500 sheet feeder right side cover 3 of 3 Accessories 293 294 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA 1 Remove the following assemblies e Door See 1 500 sheet feeder door e Rear an
159. 328 Oded iin eh il ate dl ae Alene ee aes 333 Critical error messag6s 2 nte beet REL ME be i eti E RE ge er t 333 Alphabetical printer messages errem nennen nen 333 Alphabetical printer messages 334 Numerical printer messages ssssssseeeeeeeee ennemi nnne end 348 Numerical printer messages eiit ei tenete kh e dace desean 348 Paper path roubleshbootng eene nnne nenne eret SENEE ene ESES REEE EEEn 365 QV6OTVIOW icit ese Ipae e ein N rta tede vba Le Dua Ree A 365 JartiTecoVeryi aue dac dme dte e eet teet tm 366 To disable the jam recover nennen nne nnnnes 366 Avolding BCEE 367 Persistent ams ed ter oe goa Ae ge el ege a ud t col iud e edv be eiae 368 Basic troubleshooting for persistent ams 368 Bata collectlon i ttem inte edite i Edd 368 General paper path roubleshootimg eene 368 Paper path checklist 1 tdt e eap base t edt Ei 369 le ee ut 369 To perform a paper path fest 370 BEINING 371 JamisInmtray 2 5 ite bobine iita dieti 372 Jams in tray 3 or tray 4 asiste dte tees ee de a ee ua 373 Jams inthe paper CL edits ted ter Reti ee e io d e Re dee 374 Jams in the duplex path seems 374 Media transport problems era ct t id eet ae Fee ee ok nne Hg on ee ee 375 Multiple pages feed ee NASA eese eod dee do eu ut due oo Ae e ae oda nc 375 Media is wrinkled or folded sss semen eene AA nter 375 Media WE WEE 376 Image formation troubleshooting
160. 350 RM1 1236 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cable laser LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4212 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Table and page Cable laser LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1198 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Cable media size sensor 1 500 sheet feeder RG1 4240 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cable power supply inlet 110 127 V LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4209 000CN Electrical components Cable power supply inlet 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1218 000CN Electrical components Cable power supply inlet 220 240 V LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4230 000CN Electrical components Cable power supply inlet 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1219 000CN Electrical components Cable sensor assembly 500 sheet feeder RM1 1238 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cable sensor top bin full LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4214 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Cable sensor top bin full LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1189 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Cable size sensor 500 sheet feeder RG1 4204 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Clutch CL101 LJ 4200 4300 Clutch CL101 LJ 4250 4350 Connector 6 point 1 500 sheet feeder RH7 5358 000CN RK2 0349 000CN VS1 7334 006CN Feed roller assembly Feed roller as
161. 350 Sensor top bin full PS104 LJ 4200 4300 WG8 5624 000CN WG8 5624 000CN WG8 5362 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Internal components 2 of 3 Internal components 2 of 3 Sensor top bin full stack PS 104 PS 107 LJ 4200 4300 WG8 5362 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Separation pad RL1 0007 000CN Tray 1 pickup assembly Shaft retard drive RL1 0264 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Sheet solenoid damper RC1 0330 020CN Internal components 2 of 3 Size sensing assembly tray 2 RM1 0041 020CN Internal components 2 of 3 Solenoid tray 1 pickup LJ 4200 4300 RH7 5357 000CN Tray 1 pickup assembly Solenoid tray 1 pickup LJ 4250 4350 RK2 0276 000CN Tray 1 pickup assembly Solenoid tray 2 pickup LJ 4200 4300 RH7 5355 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Solenoid tray 2 pickup LJ 4250 4350 RK2 0269 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Spring compression RC1 0213 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Spring leaf grounding top Cover LJ 4250 4350 only Spring tension RC1 0307 000CN RC1 0198 000CN Covers Internal components 3 of 3 Spring torsion RC1 0061 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Spring torsion RC1 0254 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Spring torsion RC1 1923 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Stack
162. 4 mercury specifications 45 messages alphabetical eventlog 80 firmware updates 101 numerical 348 settings 75 troubleshooting 333 Microsoft Windows See Windows model number 8 models features 2 motors 1 500 sheet tray operations 128 500 sheet feeder operations 125 duplexer operations 134 envelope feeder operations 132 locating 414 main 414 operations 109 pickup and feed operations print cartridge 414 removing 245 stacker and stapler stacker stacker operations 137 stapler stacker operations tray 2 operations 119 troubleshooting 306 multiple pages feeding prevention operations 121 troubleshooting 375 333 116 423 142 N networks embedded Web server part numbers 452 Printer Status and Alerts 317 settings 78 troubleshooting 331 Windows firmware updates 93 315 noise specifications 22 Novell NetWare settings 78 number of copies setting default 68 NVRAM initialization 326 operations 164 print cartridge 160 O on off switch locating 9 online help control panel 58 drivers 14 online support 444 OpenVMS drivers 14 operating environment specifications 24 52 operating systems supported 12 13 operations 1 500 sheet tray 128 500 sheet feeder 125 control system 105 dc controller 108 duplexer 134 envelope feeder 132 formatter 161 fuser circuits 110 image formation 106 153 jam detection duplexer 136 jam detection envelope feeder 133 jam detection stacker 141 jam detection staple
163. 464 F or higher the CPU turns off the relay RL101 to interrupt the power to the fusing heater m If the temperature of the fusing heater continues to rise abnormally and the temperature of the thermistor TH1 exceeds about 250 C 482 F the relay 1 RL101 opens up to cut off the power supply to the fusing heater m When the temperature of the heater exceeds about 250 C 482 F the thermal switch TP1 turns off to cut off the power supply to the fusing heater Overcurrent overvoltage protection If a short circuit or other problem on the load side causes an excessive current flow or generates abnormal voltage the overcurrent overvoltage protection systems automatically cut off the output voltage to protect the power supply circuit If the overcurrent or overvoltage protection system are activated and the power supply circuit does not generate dc voltage turn the power off correct the problem and then turn the printer on again The circuit has two fuses FU1 FU2 which break and cut off the output voltage if overcurrent flows through the alternating current ac line General descriptions 111 112 Laser scanner assembly The laser scanner produces the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge The main components of the laser scanner assembly are the laser driver PCA the scanner motor various mirrors and the focusing lenses NDO1 V DO2 NDO1 VDO2 MOP B Dc controller PCA
164. 489 Figure 8 17 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 8 Parts and diagrams Accessories Table 8 19 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Ref 1 11 not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown not shown Description Cover right 1 500 sheet feeder Cover left 1 500 sheet feeder Cover rear 1 500 sheet feeder Screw B M4X8 Screw w washer M3X8 Cover assembly front 1 500 sheet feeder PCA 1 500 sheet feeder Cable interface 1 500 sheet feeder Cable door sensor 1 500 sheet feeder Cable media size sensor 1 500 sheet feeder Motor stepping 1 500 sheet feeder Sensor size inside 1 500 sheet feeder Sensor gear assembly 1 500 sheet feeder Sensor size outside 1 500 sheet feeder Connector 6 point 1 500 sheet feeder Sensor assembly Part number RC1 0661 000CN RC1 0662 000CN RC1 0663 000CN XA9 1523 010CN XA9 1420 010CN RM1 0273 070CN RG1 4374 000CN RG1 4239 000CN RG1 4241 000CN RG1 4240 000CN RH7 1603 000CN RC1 0748 000CN RM1 0286 000CN RM1 0294 000CN VS1 7334 006CN RM1 1135 000CN Qty 491 and stapler Figure 8 18 Stapler stacker stacker Accessories Table 8 20 Stapler stacker stacker and stapler Ref 1 not shown Description Stapler unit only 1 000 staple cartridge 3 pack Stacker Stapler stacker Output bin
165. 63 Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action To continue turn off then on 8X YYYY EIO ERROR The EIO accessory card in slot X has encountered a critical error Reseat the formatter Go to www hp com go ljA200 software www hp com go lj4250 software www hp com go lj4300 software or www hp com go lj4350 software Select Download Drivers and Software Check for the latest firmware image version at the bottom of the page If this firmware image is newer than the one installed on the printer and the printer can receive a firmware update download the newer firmware upgrade Not all HP LaserJet 4200 4300 printers can receive firmware upgrades Replace the formatter See Formatter assembly Replace the firmware DIMM See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only Turn the printer off and then on If the problem persists reseat the EIO card Replace the EIO card Replace the formatter assembly See Formatter assembly 7 Troubleshooting Paper path troubleshooting The following sections describe how to troubleshoot problems in the paper path Overview If a jam message appears on the printer control panel display look for jammed paper or other print media in the locations that are indicated in the following figure Then see the tables in this section for information about clearing the jam You might need to look for media in l
166. 75 inches 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 40 Repetitive defects continued Roller Distance between defects Replacement part Photosensitive drum 94 2 mm 3 75 inches Print cartridge The developer roller circumference is 62 8 mm 2 5 inches A defect that is related to the developing roller will most likely repeat at intervals of 54 0 mm 2 125 inches because of the way the roller is geared ET NOTE Defects on the tray pickup rollers or the tray 1 pickup roller do not cause a repetitive defect Defects on these rollers cause a defect to appear only on the leading edge of the image First occurrence of the defect 37 7 mm 1 5 inches primary charging roller Note The developer roller circumference is 54 0 mm 2 125 inches developer roller see note y 62 83 mm 2 5 inches A defect that is related to the developing roller will most likely een e 75 0 mm 2 95 inches fuser LJ 4200 because of the way the roller is geared 62 8 mm 2 5 inches developer roller see note 94 0 mm 3 75 inches fuser LJ 4250 4300 4350 94 2 mm 3 75 inches photosensitive drum Figure 7 8 Repetitive defect ruler Image formation troubleshooting 401 Troubleshooting the stacker and the stapler stacker When troubleshooting problems are related to the stacker or stapler stacker you might find that it is difficult to distinguish whether the malfunction relates to the stacker the stapler stacker or the pr
167. 8 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 1998 GB17625 1 1998 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 3 For regulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the marketing name or the product number s Boise Idaho USA March 12 2004 For regulatory topics only Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Strasse 140 D 71034 B blingen FAX 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 48 1 Product information Country region specific safety statements Laser safet
168. 8 5 SEI H sanam L eege m c EH lo E TEES 5 IT st nu Zr EHHE Mam 8 as LT Hot 588 E 4 LES Nouma 8 ale Elie Sud 5 ano STI sp 8 S598 E S IHs ano 3 pge SoH ONO a SA EHH SCH 8 a os 8 5 SET awe a d 9 Odd 2 E 5 nun I P UNS a BED o HER E 5 H S FE HS dat E T CIN SER of 6 6 SNSdOL Md 2 I4 8 Bete ee a lat EL KE Its OLET 01 yaan No SL tg ie ya uve elt ieee le 8 3 p e g a fire HET IL ONO a X s Wie e ir EHE 5 5 tL El Za SL ZL SNSdW E S QNO p S iE s 8 is t L L HOZHLOIM 5 z ano sl tg hga LEES ZU rt ONS 55 e Jz 9 E Peo OR ISZHLQIW S8 WH LT EH P SETZE F SL SI SN EZ ONG D Se n EM s eme Fees 55 ONS ONG 3 3 IG mem f avo GNO INS 2 E 5 a oral o D S 5 2 822 alMe sean ON QN 5 em A op AE DE aS d E ACE B gt e a lz We B 3 e ZK GND Ace cf aen Nouns ST E 8 S A E 3 GER A ND ses 8 nyo EE ER NYS 5 LE amp ON AG oi H NVO es QNO 5 Wa lg le A n S Sons ano EISE ACC Z ell Z SE o a AGEL Ei JAS ld t SOA Ag e Ej SH ag E zE o 2 OL 2 We HAs Sodd z Soda ete AEET Z Salz a Nee EL AS Xodd Odi we HaT eE peer 5 foal 2 AS E El OOZOW dd b v AS lt Ag e EI AE M 8 5 002OV ER Obert Odd t E hi Ag Ja ACEN T z 5 8 xouaz j iqus4 A 8 GNO UL ME CERERI Ko SIUE a LOS i jequsa 2 B AS Et fe nee 4 sz zr zaus Tr j 34vsus4 E on S ed AE z quor qui 6 Ag e N1Gd d aavsuss B ER WU en 5 ao A04 ee ler un 5 E ONS Spo z Z WrTan QNO H
169. 8 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 inches Table 1 28 Optional envelope feeder supported sizes and weights Size Dimensions Weight Capacity Monarch 7 3 4 98 x 191 mm 75 to 105 g m 20 to 28 Ib Up to 75 envelopes 3 9 x 7 5 inches Commercial 10 105 x 241 mm 4 1 x 9 5 inches DL ISO 110 x 220 mm 4 3 x 8 7 inches C5 ISO 162 x 229 mm 6 4 x 9 0 inches 1 Product information Table 1 29 Optional stacker or stapler stacker supported sizes and weights Size Dimensions Weight Capacity Stacker or stacker part of stapler stacker only Letter 216 x 279 mm 60 to 120 g m 16 to 32 Ib 500 sheets of 75 g m 8 5 x 11 inches 20 Ib paper A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 3 x 10 5 inches Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 inches Custom Vaid Se SS ER E NOTE For additional information about using 5 8 x 8 3 inches custom media refer to the note available in General Maximum 216 x 356 mm guidelines 8 5 x 14 inches Stapler part of stapler stacker only Letter 216 x 279 mm 60 to 120 g m 16 to 32 Ib 15 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib 8 5 x 11 inches paper A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 1 The printer supports a wide range of sizes Check the printer software for supported sizes Capacity can vary depending on the paper wei
170. 80 repeating defects 390 400 settings 72 toner smear 389 transparencies 378 troubleshooting 379 white lines 394 white spots 396 quick copy jobs 74 519 R RAM disk settings 76 Ready light 57 rear output bin locating 9 removing 203 settings 69 recovery jam 76 366 recycling 45 registration assembly operations 121 removing 266 registration settings 71 registration roller assembly locating 410 regulatory statements Canadian DOC statement 49 Declaration of Conformity 47 FCC 43 Finnish laser statement 50 Japanese VCCI statement 49 Korean EMI statement 49 laser safety 49 remote firmware updates downloading 91 FTP 93 HP LaserJet Utility 98 HP Web JetAdmin 100 LPR command 99 messages 101 troubleshooting 102 UNIX 93 Windows local port 92 Windows network 93 removing parts 168 repeating defects 390 400 replacement intervals parts 88 replacing maintenance kit 86 parts 168 stapler unit 89 Resets menu 78 resolution 72 Resolution Enhancement technology REt 72 162 restoring default settings 78 325 retention job Retrieve Job menu 62 settings 74 Retrieve Job menu 62 520 right side cover locating 9 removing 195 rollers 1 500 sheet tray 418 1 500 sheet tray operations 128 1 500 sheet tray removing 288 500 sheet feeder 416 500 sheet feeder operations 125 500 sheet feeder removing 278 cleaning 82 duplexer operations 134 envelope feeder operations 132 feeding operations 116 image formation o
171. 9 8 ES M es z e 438k 00 dag EEGEN 259 293 83082 ton i Rs zz iso oro2zzz EE EE ES una F Je ee FC BERETT Rz i 223985386 E een Re ASRS KZG on E NON v0lSd upm jeded aed jo doy v s 9 7 8 89 iTz e v 8 9 2 ter S Zt zielle Ss 1osues inj jeded 50009 ISvigu3snd SSES SET DEn Tele tris 19 Jojow eum 6r Aen uwop a2e 4 v E l M 1fdNI3N DI ooeurL E 9 elei wee Eng VISSYETI Eesen amp Savzir j varelr ddd Aiddnssemod LOELL EEN v eje iK riell lavar Z Deeg nyaaa E Zolsd dog z IH31v3H ev Eee n e 5 Z VAbZ wa fe Ee eBeyon ybiy qns al Gd d TEONE deir 94WQ QNO fo maaszer 9 s v ez 1 9 H o3awa doses E Po Vien 26 21 t DESS eur COINS pesma wer lols v elz og B ou mei Hele E are zi uey Buljoo9 H Z NO Sex eer racione tem E TOLNA ddiet i vie e1nje1edue gasorr San 4ay9e S a dejg 10 19x2e1s aere Viele Iv ds do HE UB BUIOOD vetueian zk ral i vive J iz 1nosdo 3 ano irs 8 Scal NiSdO Jee A dc Dale B Sp L RT 1 sniosao LES Uer CS n A 9 pem QNO Y E Od Jenup 1exoejs ejdeis E O mz TN god Jenup i S Pi9 2OVWW gnats i z 10 god JeAup 19498 S wt sg II DI Suxedng E Zoe D wun Buixejdng t S ano AMD E H d 80LSd e 6 OND tonr Joes enge E Kallek oer mi Hl Zeep soded Ser vasoLr voorr i yun Buixi4 asorr Igor ne eee 7 Troubleshooting Figure 7 28 HP LaserJet 4300 wiring di
172. 97 Remote firmware update using the HP LaserJet utility Mac OS 8 6 and OS 9 x only Follow these instructions to update the firmware by using the HP LaserJet utility 1 98 The first step is to make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update You will need the HP LaserJet utility and the RFU file which is the firmware file for the printer The HP LaserJet utility is on the HP LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 4350 printing system software CD that came with the printer If you do not have the software CD you can obtain the HP LaserJet utility by downloading the latest printer installer from http www hp com The firmware file can be downloaded from http www hp com go lj4200 firmware When you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet utility you are ready to begin the upgrade process Start the HP LaserJet utility Click Select Printer and locate the printer that you want to upgrade on the network Select the printer on the right side of the dialog box and click OK An information dialog box for the printer appears On the left side of the information dialog box click Files A dialog box appears that you can use to select a file to be downloaded to the printer Click Select File Locate the RFU file on the hard disk and click the file name to highlight it Then click Select The Files dialog box updates showing the RFU file under File to download Click Download The HP LaserJet utility starts
173. A location J1 Sr topmost slot If you are installing additional DIMMs the second DIMM must be installed in slot 2 formatter location J2 second slot down from the top If another DIMM is installed the third DIMM must be installed in slot 3 formatter location J3 third slot down from the top If another DIMM is installed the fourth DIMM must be installed in slot 4 formatter location J4 bottom slot The printer will not recognize DIMMs if they are not installed in the correct order Formatter assembly ET NOTE Print a menu map and a configuration page See Configuration page Use the information on the configuration page to restore any user set product configuration options after you install a replacement formatter If you cannot print a configuration page ask the customer for a recent configuration page 1 Remove the formatter cover See Formatter cover 2 Remove two screws callout 1 Figure 6 37 Formatter assembly 1 of 2 Main assemblies 211 212 3 Slide the formatter assembly toward the rear of the printer to remove it Figure 6 38 Formatter assembly 2 of 2 ZN CAUTION Correct reinstallation of the formatter is critical to correct operation of the printer If you are installing a new formatter follow instructions in the reinstallation tips If you are installing a new formatter and a new dc controller in an HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series printer see the special section that follows this format
174. AVO bus es QNO gape SE e D HN Ze ONS SC IOQA ejers E Oe re Janz TNVO Ze 82 NOHMd LOON SIS AS B aave Ta Suz NOUMd 82 z Bed SIE oa a u 00 181 uc W S I lano S aNd Jos Lad E QNO IND An Ki 19S B as 3 Li du g ONO FF Ge one Te n 5 tas d EL ano D oan Tr jWwdHSd ana EI z 5 8 aNd Odd L NMdHS4 Br El WMdOQA3Q OND 8 9 tre E Odd ASt Oma gt gt ba de PE JE ona SI Y E Ae PR Ida S288 ba vul ER LWMddJUL Sgan 2 ibis Idd SodJ vis P S g amp Dia SL wade LET IO banwa e H 9 SodJ Hdd E 55 38 EE Ep XOd3uL EE i wooqud ae ios 4H e t EIE ELITS wie EA MOO Leen eure En w EA HL OVA3 o 7 ZS ael Kees ENEE 8 T S i zu 990A3Q B BREET E E 9 m wmdoaud Cl 9 ZdSHNL E lt d 5 o CG eats PEL eene ZdSUNL S ERC a E S 5 g Go otal zm i 1dSHNL TE NOOvA3Q mms g E S55 Stat L5 NOOVA3Q p wOOvA3Q a ETE 5 S 8 255 x00vA3q E Z D5vud oN LAG RE m mm 8 b S e Su xoovud z LL WMdld ure 9 15 gm 3 5 SE CRT Ze Le Wudpa Tt JO me sie Hs toss 5 Zsrl t r 4 4s y Fle Zins 5 Se Ui S o ONS v L M Y SES u inosdo EIS i z E HU B T Es Ce En C once NISdO 7 L 17 l Ca ee SLL JS 8 8R em zs AE erg EFH 8 A66 wiosdo iT 8 ga 9 ot 3 as 5 5 Feds CS Gan ASE I8 EH P NO z g8 SL HH ow SZ 58 oy 5 288 QNO rent ETH ano 3 SS m EG 7 ZS SZ GND Zea i Zano SS E SS e 5 5 GND 9881 SET wave 5 A Eee E ur rel wu AR S E we eo 2 Lr S 85 a YA 8 S zs as 8 5 Eg E NOW 28 SSC mc ure Ce 5 5
175. AaBbCc AaBbCcc AaBbCc AaBbCc 388 Defective fuser film Possible cause The media does not meet specifications or is not stored correctly Replace the fuser Recommended action s 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The inside of the printer is dirty toner leaked out of the print cartridge Clean the inside of the printer see chapter 3 and install a new print cartridge The operating environment does not meet specifications Make sure that the printer is installed in an area that meets the environmental specifications See Operating environment 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 25 Grey background continued Possible cause Recommended action s The customer is printing on the envelope seams Printing on an envelope seam can cause a background scatter problem The toner density setting is wrong Move the text to an area that has no seams Open the print quality menu at the control panel and adjust the toner density setting See Print quality submenu Make sure that EconoMode is off The high transfer setting is turned off Open the print quality menu at the control panel see Print quality submenu Select OPTIMIZE
176. Cleaning the printer and accessories Performing preventive maintenance Maintaining the stapler unit Downloading a remote firmware update Remote firmware update using FTP through a browser Remote firmware update using Fetch Mac OS 8 6 and OS 9 x only Remote firmware update using the HP LaserJet utility Mac OS 8 6 and OS 9 x only Remote firmware update using the LPR command Using HP Web JetAdmin to download the firmware to the printer Printer messages during firmware update Troubleshooting a firmware update 81 Cleaning the printer and accessories 82 To maintain superior print quality and performance thoroughly clean the printer and the paper handling accessories at the following times m Every time you change the print cartridge m After printing approximately 10 000 pages m Whenever print quality problems occur Clean the outside surfaces of the printer and accessories by using a water dampened cloth Clean the inside parts as indicated see Table 4 1 Cleaning the printer Observe the following warning and caution when cleaning the printer accessories A WARNING Before beginning the cleaning steps turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard Be careful when cleaning around the fusing assembly area It might be hot A CAUTION To prevent permanent damage to the print cartridge do not use ammonia based cleaners on or around the printer
177. EE ue EE 266 ee TE Re ET 268 Tray 2 500 sheet feeder media size sensor DSI01 269 Tray 2 media size sensor PS101 sssssssssee emm 269 500 sheet feeder media size senseor 270 Tray 1 paper sensor Cl i dte n ED X Ee dd 272 Door switch WIDE 273 Solenoids and cl tches TEE 274 Tray 2 pickup solenoid SLT0 iiit diee DI nere etae EE enun a REID E 275 Tray 1 pickup Solenoid SL102 reete nr tnn nean innui 276 Feed roller clutch CLIO EE 277 Leen 278 500 sheet feeder assembly cecinere nete nen acce secu AN Dae aan Rd qaaa ETKNR 278 500 sheet feed rollers eene 278 500 sheet feeder right side Cover 278 500 sheet feeder control PCA eene nnns 281 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly ssseee 282 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assemblv nnen 283 1 500 sheet feeder assembhy eene 288 1 500 sheet feeder feed rollers 288 1 500 sheet feeder separation roller seseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenne 288 1 500 Sheet feeder dOo0r ird aie era NEES ENEE 290 1 500 sheet feeder rear Cover 291 1 500 sheet feeder right side cover sess 292 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA eee 294 1 500 sheet feeder media sizesensor 296 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly ssssee 297 1 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembhy 300 7 Troubleshooting Chapter contents te eege eegene idee 301 rte el Tee mp cM 302 Troubleshooting ege
178. F 6 LnOdd SS A Te e 53 ui c z 6 8 IHdl 3 9 SS zg SS 2 s y 8 L ZOON ks 25 Ss 2 aw 1 Jeo6 o 2 S Z 9 ZOGA ga 83 22 SW101 J905 n 5 E E 9 E ZINO ZS agi Speer IRE 5 S LIN E g a O6 YF NS PS104 Q Gun J905M quen 7 sHs ehz 10am fa SL101 Sun c rz ET Jf8DA b A oF STI 100A ERE SL SL G t oe E 7 Ji18D H S m lee TS reu TN a H pz 5 5 E fo N FER EM sde J88 Zand 924 a e Sn 5 EH ge ke Jeder E 5 zm mg Ig 8 TA L SHHS he E EIS Z0 g H 5 rH Sons BEL Eu mg SS SS 24 zZ OOVWS zoo x2 ag E z STI ges Dasz D 2 DEI t L 3909 GI a Eg 5 e g S 5 i x P e EJ e 3 3 2 an9 PEN Fiag a aA 5 GM ra BRE z Olio g Je 8109 ano 6 s H c FE Z v09 4 2 enm e E AGE gt T L ano 8 Tg t A S axLiol SZ VI T QNO Z Z y K E s IS E SOV H 9 S 5 8 EE E e E a uve Ss 2 22 m Spam n 5 uve 2 17 2 SC 228 oe S 2 ure VELIT 8 5 SEI H sanam L eege m c EH lo E TEES 5 IT st nu Zr EHHE Mam 8 as LT Hot 588 E 4 LES Nouma 8 ale Elie Sud 5 ano STI sp 8 S598 E S IHs ano 3 pge SoH ONO a SA EHH SCH 8 a os 8 5 SET awe a d 9 Odd 2 E 5 nun I P UNS a BED o HER E 5 H S FE HS dat E T CIN SER of 6 6 SNSdOL Md 2 I4 8 Bete ee a lat EL KE Its OLET 01 yaan No SL tg ie ya uve elt ieee le 8 3 p e g a fire HET IL ONO a X s Wie e ir EHE 5 5 tL El Za SL ZL SNSdW E S QNO p S iE s 8 is t L L HOZHLOIM 5 z ano sl tg hga LEES ZU rt ONS 55 e Jz 9 E Peo OR ISZ
179. HLQIW S8 WH LT EH P SETZE F SL SI SN EZ ONG D Se n EM s eme Fees 55 ONS ONG 3 3 IG mem f avo GNO INS 2 E 5 a oral o D S 5 2 822 alMe sean ON QN 5 em A op AE DE aS d E ACE B gt e a lz We B 3 e ZK GND Ace cf aen Nouns ST E 8 S A E 3 GER A ND ses 8 nyo EE ER NYS 5 LE amp ON AG oi H NVO es QNO 5 Wa lg le A n S Sons ano EISE ACC Z ell Z SE o a AGEL Ei JAS ld t SOA Ag e Ej SH ag E zE o 2 OL 2 We HAs Sodd z Soda ete AEET Z Salz a Nee EL AS Xodd Odi we HaT eE peer 5 foal 2 AS E El OOZOW dd b v AS lt Ag e EI AE M 8 5 002OV ER Obert Odd t E hi Ag Ja ACEN T z 5 8 xouaz j iqus4 A 8 GNO UL ME CERERI Ko SIUE a LOS i jequsa 2 B AS Et fe nee 4 sz zr zaus Tr j 34vsus4 E on S ed AE z quor qui 6 Ag e N1Gd d aavsuss B ER WU en 5 ao A04 ee ler un 5 E ONS Spo z Z WrTan QNO H i ND E aadd 49 z qe 2s E WAN MYND 144 ONS dOL t 5 o z n 3 GND zi L SO0N E mj E ez SE Asaan dn e S dran ZOON l fi zooa 8 KC Brio E Sa HA Nl HO ON o ER 3 NE SA ug Kuba gi ON ui az xos ur a SdWLAN3 TE Z dLAN3 9 ree XOS E E dLAN3 dlLLAN3 Z ON dND Zi E Ss os Ee HHE DAANG Au 28 8 SL oS Ne Began E EC 5 ols yds 61 Oz 10901 wE il ssi 3 APIS yousyy Kb i ei zOQN E 3 Ae q E d 5 s xOUS3 v y z sane Men 2 Z Nlad BI ao 9 t U E lo T Il RECHE WEE SE SE S E t T 5 Sz HNVO Mir der 2x E m ace EIS OND 4 37 H
180. J6058 61201 server for HP LaserJet 4250 4350 printers 1 HP bt1300 Bluetooth wireless printer adapter J6072A J6072 61001 J6072 69001 Connectivity card for USB serial and Local Talk J4135A J4135 61001 2 IEEE_1284 parallel cable 2 meter 6 6 feet C2950A 5063 1256 2 IEEE_1284 parallel cable 3 meter 9 9 feet C2951A 5063 1257 3 USB cable 2 meter 6 6 feet C6518A 4 Power cord 2 meter 6 6 feet with 90 degree C13 8120 5301 receptacle For 120 Vac in the United States Canada Latin America Korea Taiwan and Thailand 5 Power cord 2 meter 6 6 feet with straight C13 receptacle 8121 0740 For 120 Vac in the United States Canada Latin America Korea Taiwan and Thailand EH 452 8 Parts and diagrams Formatters laser scanners power supplies and fusers Table 8 6 Formatters laser scanners power supplies and fusers Item Product number Service exchange number Formatters Formatter LJ 4200 Q9652A C9652 67902 C9652 69001 Formatter LJ 4200L C9652 67903 C9652 69003 Formatter LJ 4300 Q9651A C9651 67901 C9651 69001 Formatter LJ 4250 4350 base models Q3653A Q3653 67901 03653 69001 Formatter LJ 4250 4350 network models Q3652A Q3652 67901 03652 69001 Laser scanners Laser scanner LJ 4200 RM1 0045 000CN Laser scanner LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1067 000CN Laser scanner LJ 4300 RM1 0113 000CN Power supply assemblies Power supply assembly LJ 4200 110 127 V RM1 0019 050CN
181. LED PCA 7 Troubleshooting Printer and accessory wiring diagrams The following sections contain wiring diagrams for the printer and its accessories Printer and accessory wiring diagrams 425 HP LaserJet 4200 wiring diagram CH eS EET l g9d 1ejonuoo oepiA Jepae e dojo u3 yoap 1edeg 10 Japaay Jaded TSM oo HORE AEEA aes Soar Re seyoums z s aded josuos Jaded onosseo
182. LSd 10sues inj Jaded Kei uwop eoe4 80LSd 10sues Jaded fiewjep yun Bu Jj Dot zedin 100 xoiddy 901Sd 10sues pi jedeq SU m i fa OLSd 10sues eBed jo doy iagram 29 0 xoiddy a gt ZOLSd 10sues peej eJq M 1 ST E LOL1S piouajos dn yoid y sseg d uonejoJ paads jyeH EOLNA zit uej Buroo mm em LOLNA L uej Bujooo oorsloosd og z o xoiddy SL xoddy iming 40 OW JeuUEDS SCD od 91 0 Xoiddy Z o xoiddy gt Z O xoddy la LOL19 yano eg pee Z O xouddy f Z o Xoiddy ZO LN 1010W wnq g o xoiddy LOLW 4010UJ uren ZOQN ZOdA LOAN LOGA oepiA dO 1 eBed jo doy L033 uoneu amp isep es Jud 05033 uoneubisep uore uesai jud ube spuooes uf A NO yous Jamog HP LaserJet 4300 general t 7 Troubleshooting Figure 7 39 HP LaserJet 4300 general timing diagram 440 iagram d iming d i o E o o e uw e wv d o gt ue o o n I E EH Peer P ZH LH 1ejeeu Joen S Seq J9J o eansseJgd z seig wy sasn
183. M 462 ACCESSOS oec ie IUUD LM MEL iE cepe eire ees 484 Alphabetical CIE 494 ITI Bo u S EEEE E EEE 503 Ee 513 1 Product information Chapter contents Chapter contents Printer configurations Model and serial numbers Printer overview Software components Specifications Media specifications Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement Service approach Regulatory information Regulatory statements Country region specific safety statements Printer configurations The HP LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 and 4350 Series printers are available in a total of six models Base model Table 1 1 Printer descriptions base models Base model Availability Configuration EB HP LaserJet 4200 48 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB Z printer Q2425A x One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray wa HP LaserJet 4200L 48 MB RAM expandable to 288 MB printer Q3993A xm One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray This model is not available in all countries regions HP LaserJet 4250 48 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB printer Q5400A m One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray HP LaserJet 4300 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB printer Q2431A x One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray 2 1 Product information n model Table 1 2 Printer descriptions n mod
184. Ong L a oe a se lle eee aoe ee a od ane ke ui Face down Sc LS ue delivery rollers a L D zo ou aper C ke D ap af DUPLEX FEED MOTOR DRIVE signal Duplex feed roller Figure 5 18 Duplexer pickup and reversing diagram Paper pickup and feed system 135 136 Duplexer jam detection The following sensors detect whether or not the print media is present and is feeding normally Tray 2 paper sensor PS101 Pre feed sensor PS102 Top of page sensor PS103 Face down tray paper full sensor PS104 Tray 1 multipurpose tray paper sensor PS105 Paper width sensor PS106 Fuser delivery sensor 1 PS108 The microprocessor on the dc controller PCA detects a jam by using the sensor to check for media presence at a specific timing that is stored in the memory If the dc controller PCA detects that a jam has occurred it stops the print operation and an error message appears on the control panel display See Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages 5 Theory of operation Stacker and stapler stacker The stacker delivers media from the printer to the stacker delivery bin The stapler stacker also delivers media from the printer to the stacker delivery bin but can staple the media together before delivering it to the stapler stacker delivery bin The dc controller PCA controls the stacker and stapler stacker When the stacker or s
185. Open the print quality menu at the control panel see Print quality submenu Select OPTIMIZE and set HIGH TRANSFER ON The line detail setting is turned off Open the print quality menu at the control panel see Print quality submenu Select OPTIMIZE and set LINE DETAIL ON Table 7 36 Blurred print Possible cause Recommended action s A The media does not meet specifications or is not stored correctly 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media for type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The operating environment does not meet specifications Make sure that the printer is installed in an area that meets the environmental specifications See Operating environment The toner density setting is incorrect Open the print quality menu at the control panel and adjust the toner density setting See Print quality submenu Image formation troubleshooting 397 398 Table 7 36 Blurred print continued Table 7 37 Black page Possible cause The high transfer setting is turned off The line detail setting is turned off Possible cause The print cartridge is defective Recommended action s Open the print quality menu at the control panel see Print quality
186. PS1104 PS1103 7 Upper delivery roller Paddle V V E SE E ower delivery roller BO o enr Feed oy t PS1102 elivery tray roller CJ a Be Upper XA H delivery guide U roller Delivery flapper FEED MOTOR DRIVE signal DEFLECTOR SOLENOID DRIVE signal Figure 5 22 Stapler stacker motors solenoids and sensors block diagram Stacker and stapler stacker 143 144 Staple mode feed and delivery In this mode 2 to 15 pages of media are stapled into one set and the stacks are then delivered to the delivery bin After the leading edge of the media reaches the fuser delivery sensor PS108 in the printer the dc controller PCA sends a signal to the stapler stacker driver PCA The stapler stacker driver PCA activates the deflector solenoid SL101 for a specific amount of time to move the delivery deflector into place which routes the media to the stapler stacker rather than to the top output bin The stapler stacker driver PCA activates the paddle motor M1101 to rotate counterclockwise the upper and lower delivery rollers to disengage them It also activates the stacker motor which rotates at the same speed as the printer main motor to rotate the feed and delivery rollers Upper delivery roller Lower delivery roller Printer Delivery deflector Fuser delivery sensor Le S Q SS E Media path Figure 5 23 Staple mo
187. Paper pickup drive assembly 500 sheet feeder 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RM1 0101 200CN Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 0102 200CN Fuser 220 240 V LJ 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 0107 000CN Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4300 also see Figure Internal components 1 of 3 8 9 Electrical components RM1 0107 000CN Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4300 Electrical components RM1 0108 000CN Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4300 also see Figure Internal components 1 of 3 8 9 Electrical components RM1 0108 000CN Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4300 Electrical components RM1 0113 000CN Laser scanner assembly LJ 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0114 020CN Cover cartridge door LJ 4300 Covers RM1 0237 000CN Cover rear assembly stacker Stapler stacker stacker and stapler RM1 0248 000CN Output bin fits stapler stapler stacker or stacker Stapler stacker stacker and stapler RM1 0273 070CN Cover assembly front 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RM1 0273 070CN RM1 0286 000CN Cover assembly front 1 500 sheet feeder Sensor gear assembly 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RM1 0294 000CN Sensor size outside 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500
188. Press Here button for detailed information 2 Press A Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions 3 Close the open door 4 If this message persists replace the stacker or stapler stacker PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE alternates with Ready For menus press Y To ensure optimum print quality the printer prompts you to perform routine maintenance every 200 000 pages default setting Install an HP LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 4350 printer maintenance kit See the instructions that come with the kit or Continue printing and order a printer maintenance kit For information about how to order a maintenance kit see Parts and diagrams Performing A firmware upgrade is in progress A CAUTION Do not turn the printer upgrade off until the printer returns to the Ready state The printer will be damaged if the power is turned off during a firmware upgrade Printing The printer is generating the registration Follow the instructions on the printed pages REGISTRATION PAGE page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press Y The RAM disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used 1 Turn the printer power off and then on again 2 If this error persists a defective memory DIMM might be installed in the printer on the formatter Replace the mem
189. QNS I 6 Z VAvz Ono Ty 8 l 1H I 5 inosdo I sojow ven hg Hen H NV2 z n I l 5 I l I NISdO L s shi TNVO E 9 i l z T mu e I y ENER I ano Y S godenup 1exoeis ejdes z H l E 5 o3aWW QNS s t I 30 EL eizi I godseaup 3 2OVINW 10 god JeAUp ees z UUl Ser Leer I Pa NOUMd S sir I seul eod Z Buxejdng an9 vc z I E a a Ll a a l I yun Buixeidng z Soe vAve 8 I I di d 801Sd j I zar Sy RS Wiel l I Brera Tm Josues l Ser vasoLr vm I i Kee I l l Geor 19017 Figure 7 26 HP LaserJet 4200 wiring diagram 7 Troubleshooting 426 HP LaserJet 4250 wiring diagra m
190. R invalid and have been reset to the factory 2 Turn the printer off and then on default Pressing Y SeLecT button should For help press clear the message Printing can continue 3 Check the printer settings to determine but the printer might behave unexpectedly which settings have been changed in response to the changed settings See Settings and defaults and Control alternates with panel menus X Description 4 Perform a NVRAM initialization See 68 X NVRAM initialization 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action PERMANENT STORAGE ERROR To continue press Y 0 onboard NVRAM 1 flash DIMM or hard drive 5 Replace the formatter assembly See Formatter assembly 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL For help press alternates with 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL To continue press Y A nonvolatile storage device is full Pressing Y Sevect button should clear the message Printing can continue but the printer might behave unexpectedly in response to the changed settings X Description 0 onboard NVRAM 1 flash DIMM or hard drive Press Y Se ect button to continue For 68 0 errors turn the printer off and then on If a 68 0 error persists Initialize NVRAM See the caution and note in To initialize NVRAM For 68 1 errors use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive If th
191. Ready appears on the control panel 3 Type the word exit at the command prompt to close the command window Remote firmware update using the LPR command 99 Using HP Web JetAdmin to download the firmware to the printer 100 The following procedure requires that you install HP Web JetAdmin version 7 0 or later on your computer Complete the following steps to update a single printer through HP Web JetAdmin after downloading the RFU file from the HP Web site 1 2 10 Start HP Web JetAdmin Type the TCP IP address or IP host name of the printer in the Quick Device Find field and then click Go The printer Status window appears Open the Device Management folder in the drop down list in the Navigation panel Navigate to the Device Lists folder Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices Locate the printer that you want to update in the list of printer and click the file to select it Locate the drop down box for Device Tools in the upper right corner of the window Select Update Printer Firmware from the Choose Action list If the name of the RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure If the filename is listed select it Click Upload to move the RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web JetAdmin server Refresh the browser Sel
192. Scanner motor PCA VDO1 VDO2 ACC DEC MDO1 VDO2 CNTO CNT1 CNT2 Laser driver Scanner motor m cw A Scanner s Pa di la o mirror diy CN Al lt di OV Focusing lens BD mirror Mirror Photosensitive drum inside the print cartridge Laser beams Figure 5 4 Laser scanner assembly The laser scanner uses two laser diodes to scan two lines simultaneously producing high speed laser scanning After receiving the print command from the host computer the dc controller PCA activates the scanner motor which rotates the six sided scanner mirror The laser driver PCA emits light from the two laser diodes according to signals from the dc controller PCA The two laser beams 5 Theory of operation strike the six sided scanning mirror and are directed through the focusing lenses and onto the photosensitive drum The modulated laser beams generate the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according to the image data signals that the dc controller PCA sends 1 As it receives a print command from the formatter the dc controller outputs the SCANNER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal ACC and rotates the scanner motor in order to rotate the six sided mirror As the scanner motor starts rotating the dc controller uses a LASER CONTROL signal CNTO CNT1 CNT2 to receive the BD INPUT signal BDI and force the laser to emit light The dc controller detects the
193. See Jetdirect page Embedded Jetdirect page HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers The Jetdirect page contains valuable network related information about the printer If the host system and printer are still not communicating replace the formatter and or the EIO card and reconfigure the printer If the host system and printer continue to not communicate replace the entire formatter The following illustration shows the contents of the Jetdirect page Interface troubleshooting 331 Jetdirect page Embedded Jetdirect page HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers hp LaserJet 4250 4350 series D Figure 7 6 Jetdirect page Embedded Jetdirect page HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers 1 HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates UO card status status model number hardware firmware version port select port configuration auto negotiation manufacturing identification and manufactured date 2 Security Settings information 3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received unicast packets received bad packets received framing errors received total packets transmitted unsendable packets transmit collisions and transmit late collisions 4 TCP IP information including the IP address 5 IPX SPX information 6 Novell NetWare information 7 Appletalk information 8 DLC LLC information 332 7 Troubleshooting Display message troubleshooting The following tables explain the messages that
194. Supplies status e PS font list e File directory Press v to select and print the selected information page The informational pages for the printer are also available in the embedded Web server Not all information pages are discussed in detail in this manual For more information see the HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Use Guide or the HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Use Guide The following are the information pages e Menu map A menu map shows how individual items are configured within the high level user set values menus The last page of the menu map series contains instructions about how to use the control panel buttons Print a menu map before changing printer settings or before replacing the formatter assembly e Configuration page The configuration page lists printer configuration information For example the printer serial number and tray size settings appear on the configuration page Print a configuration page before servicing the printer to help restore values after servicing the printer e Supplies status This page shows the levels of the printer supplies a calculation of the number of pages that can be printed before the supplies are replaced and cartridge usage information e File directory This page provides information about files on the RAM disk or installed EIO disk drives and flash DIMMs if those memory accessories are installed e Usage page The usage page is only available if an optional hard disk is installed It prov
195. TEE t I soer goer vor O0 9gOBLUOPRTVOPRUPORBDSORZSORLZSO29O 90Q 90 90 90 90 20 20 l a SSOSSSSBOITPRSSRSESSSSSSSSSOOIZSSTOSSOZOO2II ads S XXI LYT H XXX FTT asorr O90900200095555555559993509099008502509000220550747m7 BE 22999292995555555559399090099995592999559559 35213 See See Fn S S565 RSF Fo Re Ree BeBeEMeTROS 76895590599577507 829 Our Oz BER Tele Jasotr dod S 8 8 Od eipeuueju vasiir gagiir vasoir gasotr 2 G9 28 6 OL ZLELPLSL OL AI Bt GL OZ LZ 22 EC vc SC 92 1287 oor n RER DO tyyty rr rr oyejejzjojs r ejz t BEIEN E E esr rou Y EF F 9 Ts G OM Zieh vi sts Li Bt ol 02 Le ze ee ve Se 92 zee er BER d See ter kl 390259959505 O559055 z z amp TANNA ODS SQODSKMDFOLHHFABIOHOODV o5 Zo 9970 OLAN zo Y 954429579220 KEKKER S 928200 Pozz aagzmz o8m2332 PERR FANFA 9968522 99883299299 ogag 73895 66986688676 29Q98mE 6725 EISE S5 328 EELER EE E S 259 Bx ch Zu Ses 222 ezg b 92 20 ug 98 ve sm 2 RS 8 5 56 ON AR o b KE 3 53 oeems Olld owns Od 1elonuoo 20 FEE 88 Tow quud 19 68 EE o Ae on zje ser SOU vare L z 5 yono esr 7 8 3a 3 zs a J333 ER 984 101101 paa x A Qon_ 339 io oBS o Sod pNan dA gt 969 z i284222235822222 5 ooot z Zes309025 OZZOZZUZZUZZz ooo 5995252 399095o3 ooos3228022982402050 eaZZZze RSC SE SE 22255558 055272297 Leem 22209222200000299090 Be ME DEED iTe e v s 9 Z 8 6 ourer 28 6622225XZ2gO026u mouxnzu4kaov5 8 SBODOEZOZAAAAAEMIZAAE OCF sre ee z
196. TION signal HP STAPLE MOTOR DRIVE signal quum cm o o Staple detection switch Paid sacl o7 o detection switch os STAPLE LEVEL DETECTION signal LS Figure 5 30 Stapler unit I O block diagram 1 Stapler unit 2 Stapler stacker 148 5 Theory of operation Stapler unit operation The stapler unit uses the stapler unit motor M104 staple cam staple press head plates staple arm and support base to staple media together Use the printer settings to turn on the staple mode see Stapler stacker submenu The stapling procedure begins when media enters the staple guide and the dc controller PCA sends the end of job signal to the stapler stacker driver PCA Stapler unit RSs i E o D o UE 4 Staple press head plates Staple motor M104 Staple cams Figure 5 31 Stapler unit After the paddle and jogger guides align the edges of the media the stapler stacker PCA activates the stapler unit motor M104 The two staple cams begin to rotate Support base aw Media gt Staples Staple press um Staple press J trea plate 2 Ec head plate2 c Staple press Staple press head plate 1 head plate 1 A N Ar Staple cam 2 Staple cam 1 Sta
197. URATION and then press v 3 Use A or Y to scroll to PRINT QUALITY and then press Y 4 Use A or Y to scroll to FUSER MODES and then press Y 5 Use A or Y to scroll to the submenu item that you want and then press Y 6 Press the Pause Resume button or the Menu button to close the menu Image formation troubleshooting 393 Table 7 31 Creases AaBbCc Possible cause The media does not meet specifications or is not stored correctly Recommended action s 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media for type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The operating environment does not meet specifications The media is not loaded correctly or the trays are not adjusted correctly Make sure that the printer is installed in an area that meets the environmental specifications See Operating environment Make sure that the media is loaded correctly and that the guides fit snugly against the stack The wrong tray is in use Print from tray 1 when you use a media that can cause image formation or paper path problems The wrong output bin is in use Print to a different output bin top or rear output bin An obstruction exists in the paper path 1 Check the paper path for debris
198. VRAM Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings return to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types default symbol sets and Web access alerts The elapsed time for an update depends on the UO transfer time as well as the time that it takes for the printer to reinitialize The I O transfer time depends on a number of things including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I O method parallel or network The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the printer such as the number of EIO devices installed the presence of external paper handling devices and the amount of memory installed If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded when RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control panel the firmware file must be sent again If power is lost during the remote firmware update process when UPGRADING PRINTER appears on the control panel the update is interrupted and the message Resend upgrade appears in English only on the control panel The update must be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the printer Finally any print jobs ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed ET NOTE The printer automatically turns off and then on again after
199. When fewer than 70 staples remain in the cartridge the staple detection flag is no longer blocked and it moves to the raised position The staple detection switch opens and the stapler stacker driver PCA identifies a low staple condition A low staple message appears on the control panel display After the stapler stacker PCA sends the staple command 70 more times a staple out message appears on the control panel display See Alphabetical printer messages Stapler stacker PCA Zn ga Stapler unit OG uu 5 O O L luo So a y m More than 70 staples in the cartridge i Staples W n 7 M Staple detection switch Fewer than 70 staples in the cartridge Figure 5 35 Staple level detection Stack mode feed and delivery In this mode media is stacked in the delivery bin without being stapled After the leading edge of the media reaches the fuser delivery sensor PS108 the dc controller PCA sends a signal to the stacker driver PCA The stacker driver PCA activates the deflector solenoid SL101 for a specific amount to move the delivery deflector into place which routes the media to the stacker rather than to the top output bin The stacker driver PCA also activates the stacker motor which rotates at the same speed as the printer main motor to rotate the feed and delivery rollers The feed roller moves the media into the stacker If the dc controller PCA sends a following page si
200. a is not loaded correctly or Make sure that the media is loaded the trays are not adjusted correctly correctly and that the guides fit snugly against the stack The registration assembly is not Make sure that the registration installed correctly or is damaged assembly is installed correctly If necessary replace the registration assembly See Registration assembly 392 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 30 Curl or wave Possible cause Recommended action s The media does not meet 1 Turn over the stack of media in the specifications or is not stored correctly tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media for type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The operating environment does not Make sure that the printer is installed in meet specifications an area that meets the environmental specifications See Operating environment The wrong output bin is in use Print to a different output bin top or rear output bin The fuser setting is incorrect for the Open the configure device menu at the media type control panel and change the fuser mode setting or select another media type See Configure device menu 1 Press Y SeLecT button or the Menu button to open the menus 2 Use A UP Arrow button or V Down Arrow button to scroll to Continued CONFIG
201. able door sensor 1 500 sheet feeder RG1 4241 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cable door switch RG1 4213 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Cable envelope feeder connecting LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4224 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Cable envelope feeder connecting LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1193 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Cable feeder connector LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4223 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Cable feeder connector LJ 4250 4350 Cable flat J80 J50 LJ 4250 4350 Cable flat J81 J51 LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1192 000CN RK2 0290 000CN RK2 0288 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Electrical components Electrical components Cable fuser LJ 4200 4200L RG1 4205 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Cable fuser LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1216 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Cable fuser LJ 4300 RG1 4231 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Cable interface 1 500 sheet feeder RG1 4239 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cable interface lower 500 sheet feeder LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4202 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cable interface lower 500 sheet feeder LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1237 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cable interface upper 500 sheet feeder LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4201 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cable interface upper 500 sheet feeder LJ 4250 4
202. aecaeseeeeteeeeeneeaeees 170 Parts remioval tr e e eec teda ed does eee at nde doe e eee de eode 171 Printer input tray and cabinet wheel Iocks nenne 172 Dc controller PCA diagram 2 eicere tete heeds ime o edite Wedel Tuba ga iran 173 Usersreplaceable patts once Ri dee tet Pod e o E tA oae det ti ined 175 Print cartridge EE 175 Transfer roler 5 5 in tei tee met ette docete Re ke e REM ENTE E dude gu 177 EMS EE e EE E 178 Tray T pickup roller nr tectam aetatum 179 BC V WEE eu E 181 Thay Aic 182 Covers tray 1 and the rear output bim 186 Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door 187 Formatter CoVer c uii eoa nodo e e HH Rp ee eti dete os eet 191 Eorum C 192 Right side Coven s nina aul mains hae ane ae arene eat 195 Left SId tweet ugeet e reel tee il eto a ade el ee eed 197 FRONUCOVEI E S 198 RRC EE 200 ear output DID TT 203 Gontrol panel display n e ER dB D eer E RR MR Rd 204 Control panel overlay I tetendit eda eus 204 Gontrolpane l assembly 5 5 tie tre E EE ca DU EP AER 205 Main assemlbli8s 3 2 2 5 b tq deter erit bite e atte egene 209 Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only 210 Formatter assembly dep oer doa ee ede Rue ed ee 211 Reinstallation notes formatter enema 212 Installing a new formatter and a new dc controller LJ 4250 4350 only 213 OQutput delivery assembly 54 Les ttc s ette tet rte te ee ERR ee ade 214 Dup
203. age are correct verify that the tray paper out sensor is operating See Printer switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs INSTALL CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press The cartridge is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer Insert the cartridge or make sure that the cartridge is fully seated Press Hz button for detailed information Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions If the error persists replace the cartridge Verify that the connectors between the power supply and transfer assembly are not damaged Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply INSTALL FUSER For help press The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer The fuser is not fully seated or has been removed and must be reinstalled for printing to continue See Fuser e If the fuser is in the printer remove and reinstall it e If the fuser is not in the printer install it Push the fuser firmly into the printer until the blue levers on both sides click into place Press Here button for detailed information Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions If the error persists replace the fuser assembly See Fuser Replace the dc controlle
204. agram 428 HP LaserJet 4350 wiring diagra m
205. ain access to help For help press 2 Press A Up Arrow button and Y Down Arrow button to step through the instructions alternates with 3 Print a configuration page and verify 41 3 UNEXPECTED that the tray settings match the media in the tray See Configuration page SIZE IN TRAY XX TYPE SIZE d 4 Verify that the pre feed top of page For helbnress 2 and fuser delivery sensors Ppress PS102 PS103 PS108 are operating and the sensor flags can move freely See Printer switches and sensors 5 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 41 X A printer error has occurred 1 Press Y SeLect button to continue or PRINTER ERROR press f Hep button for more information X Description For help press m 2 If the message persists turn the printer 1 unknown misprint error power off and then on again alternates with SEET 3 If these errors becomes a frequent 4 no VSYNC error problem replace the dc controller PCA 41 X See Dc controller PCA 7 feed delay error PRINTER ERROR 9 signal noise error To continue press Y 49 XXXX A critical firmware error has occurred that 1 Press Cancel Jos to clear the print job caused the processor on the formatter to from the printer memory PRINTER ERROR abort the operation 2 Turn the printer off and then on To continue turn off then on This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands corrupt data or invalid 3 Goto www hp com go ljA200 softwar
206. amp keeps the page from being pushed out of position by the pages that follow Stacker and stapler stacker 145 146 Jogger guides Upper delivery roller A LL delivery roller SL1102 PS1101 4 Waiting position Figure 5 26 Staple mode feed and delivery diagram 4 of 6 Stapler stacker operation depends on whether the device detects the final page in the staple job m No The feed motor M1101 changes speed and another page enters the stapler stacker The stapler stacker driver PCA activates the jogger motor and the jogger guide moves to align the media stack horizontally The stapler stacker driver PCA activates the paddle motor and the paddle pushes the page up against a guide to align the media stack vertically The delivery deflector moves into position to allow the next page to enter the stapler stacker m Yes The feed motor M1101 turns off The stapler stacker driver PCA activates the jogger motor and the jogger guides move inward to align the media stack horizontally The stapler stacker driver PCA activates the paddle motor and the paddle pushes the page up against a guide to align the media stack vertically Then the pages are stapled Jogger guide Media Jogger guide aligns the media stack horizontally i Paddle aligns the i media stack Hi H i vertically Ter Staple Figure 5 27 Staple mode feed and delivery diagram 5 of 6 After the pages are staple
207. an the paper path See Stacker and stapler stacker paper path m The rollers are worn dirty or defective Inspect all of the stacker or stapler stacker rollers Clean any dirty rollers If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker Malfunction errors Table 7 44 Malfunction error troubleshooting Possible cause Recommended action s No power The stacker or stapler stacker connector is not fully seated or is damaged x Inspect the stacker or stapler stacker connectors on the unit and on the printer Verify that these connectors are not damaged and that the stacker or stapler stacker is installed correctly and fully seated If the stacker or stapler stacker was installed when the printer power was on turn the power off and then on again x Turn the printer power off Remove and reinstall the stacker or stapler stacker Turn the printer power on again The stacker or stapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the stacker or stapler stacker No stapling stapler stacker only The staple cartridge contains no staples Replace the stapler unit staple cartridge See Stapler stacker stapler assembly The stapler unit is defective Replace the stapler unit See Stapler stacker stapler assembly The print job contains more than one paper size When using the stapler stacker limit the print job to a single page size The stapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the
208. and set HIGH TRANSFER ON The print cartridge is defective The high voltage connector springs are dirty or damaged Replace the print cartridge The high voltage connector springs protrude into the print cartridge cavity Clean the springs if they are dirty Replace the springs if they are damaged or missing The power supply is defective Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply Table 7 26 Loose toner or toner smear Possible cause Recommended action s AaBbCc AaBhec AaBk Cc AaBt Cc AaBbCc The interior of the printer is dirty 1 Print a few more pages and see if the problem corrects itself 2 Clean the inside of the printer see chapter 4 3 Process a printer cleaning page See Running the cleaning page manually The fuser roller is dirty Process a cleaning page see Running the cleaning page manually Several pages might be required if the fuser is very dirty The media surface is too smooth or too rough for toner adhesion Use media that meets HP specifications see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide The static eliminator teeth just beyond the transfer roller are contaminated or are not grounded which allows a static charge to remain on the page Clean the static eliminator teeth by using a small brush or compressed air Replace the assembly if it is damaged Image formation troubleshooting 389
209. and trays fully opened 29 1 inches Printer model Width Depth Height HP LaserJet 4200 4200n 4200L 4200Ln 4300 and 4300n 418 mm 16 5 inches 1045 mm 41 1 inches 547 mm 21 5 inches HP LaserJet 4250 4250n 4350 and 4350n 418 mm 16 5 inches 936 mm 38 9 inches 547 mm 21 5 inches HP LaserJet 4200tn 4200dtn 4300tn and 4300dtn 418 mm 16 5 inches 1045 mm 41 1 inches 670 mm 26 4 inches HP LaserJet 4250tn 4250dtn 4350tn and 4350dtn 418 mm 16 5 inches 936 mm 38 9 inches 668 mm 26 3 inches HP LaserJet 4200dtns 4200dtnsl 4300dtns and 4300dtnsl HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl and 4350dtnsl 418 mm 16 5 inches 418 mm 16 5 inches 1045 mm 41 1 inches 936 mm 38 9 inches 740 mm 29 1 inches 734 mm 28 9 inches 1 Product information Table 1 9 Printer accessories Accessory Width Depth Height Weight 500 sheet feeder 418 mm 451 mm 121 mm 7 kg 15 4 Ib 16 5 inches 17 8 inches 4 8 inches 1 500 sheet feeder 416 mm 514 mm 286 mm 13 kg 28 7 Ib 16 4 inches 20 2 inches 11 3 inches Stacker 211 mm 427 mm 351 mm 4 2 kg 9 3 Ib 8 3 inches 16 8 inches 13 8 inches Stapler stacker 211 mm 427 mm 351 mm 4 2 kg 9 3 Ib 8 3 inches 16 8 inches 13 8 inches Printer cabinet stand 660 mm 660 mm 381 mm 19 8 kg 43 6 Ib 26 0 inches 26 0 inches 15 0 inches Duplex printing accessory 332 mm 347 mm
210. asterisk next to it Table 7 3 Resets submenu Item Values Explanation RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS No values available Performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory default settings This item also clears the input buffer for the active I O Restoring factory settings does not affect the network parameter settings on the optional HP Jetdirect print server CAUTION Restoring memory during a print job cancels the print job POWERSAVE OFF ON Turns the PowerSave Sleep mode on HP LaserJet 4200 4200L 4300 only or off The PowerSave Sleep mode affects the printer in two ways SLEEP HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only x Minimizes the amount of power that the printer consumes when it is idle x Reduces wear on the electronic components in the printer for example it turns off the display backlight although the display can still be read The printer automatically leaves the PowerSave Sleep mode when you send a print job press a printer control panel button open a tray or open the top cover You can set the amount of time that the printer remains idle before it enters the PowerSave Sleep mode For more information see System Setup submenu ees 320 7 Troubleshooting Diagnostics menu Administrators can use this menu to isolate parts and to troubleshoot jam and print quality issues The following section lists the settings and their possible values in the DIAGNOSTICS menu The default value for
211. at remains in HP supplies 0 represents that a supply is empty This page also shows the type and size of print media set for each tray To change the default settings click Change Settings m Configuration page Shows the information that is contained on the printer Configuration page Troubleshooting tools 315 Supplies Status Shows the life that remains in HP supplies 0 represents that a supply is empty This page also provides supplies part numbers To order new supplies click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window To visit this or any Web site you must have Internet access m Event log Shows a list of all printer events and errors m Usage page Shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed grouped by size and type this page is only available if an optional hard disk is installed m Device Information Shows the printer network name address and model information To change these entries click Device Information on the Settings tab Settings tab Use the Settings tab to configure the printer from your computer The Settings tab can be password protected If the printer is on a network always consult with the network administrator before changing settings on this tab The Settings tab contains the following pages Configure Device Use this page to configure all of the printer settings This page contains the traditional printer menus Information Paper Handling Configur
212. ay For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages Stapler stacker delivery jam If the paper delivery sensor PS1102 does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specified period of time after the feed motor has been activated following the completion of the stapling operation the dc controller PCA determines that a stapler stacker feed delay jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages Stapler stacker residual media jam If the paper inlet sensor PS1101 or the paper delivery sensor PS1102 detects media during the initial drive period the dc controller PCA determines that a stapler stacker feed delay jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages ET NOTE This jam message only appears if the paper delivery sensor PS1102 detects media at the start of the initial drive 5 Theory of operation Image formation system The image formation system is the main system in the printer It consists of five stages m Electrostatic latent potential image formation During this operation a uniform negative charge
213. ay from the printer Sensors and switches 269 270 500 sheet feeder media size sensor 1 Remove the 500 sheet feeder right side cover See 500 sheet feeder right side cover 2 Remove the 500 sheet feeder PCA See 500 sheet feeder control PCA 3 Remove two screws callout 1 4 Push the locking tab callout 2 and slide the sensor toward the front of the feeder to release it Figure 6 92 500 sheet feeder media size sensor 1 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts 5 Liftthe sensor out of the 500 sheet feeder Figure 6 93 500 sheet feeder media size sensor 2 of 2 ET NOTE When you install the media size sensor verify that the locator pins are correctly positioned in the corresponding holes in the chassis Sensors and switches 271 272 Tray 1 paper sensor PS105 1 Remove the tray 1 pickup assembly See Tray 1 paper pickup assembly 2 Remove the grounding plate callout 1 3 Lift the tray 1 paper sensor callout 2 away from the printer Figure 6 94 Tray 1 paper sensor 6 Removing and replacing parts Door switch SW101 1 Remove the inner front right cover according to the tray 1 paper pickup assembly removal procedures See Tray 1 paper pickup assembly 2 Release two tabs callout 1 that secure the door switch callout 2 Figure 6 95 Door switch 3 Lift the door switch out of the cover Sensors and switches 273 Solenoids and clutches This section provides instr
214. ber listed are not field replacement parts and cannot be ordered Related documentation and software Order documentation and software from the companies that are listed in the following table some documentation and software is available at the following Web sites Table 8 1 Technical support Web sites HP Channel Services Network CSN for HP partners http www hp com partners csn HP CSN is an Internet site that is created exclusively for our partners You can easily find all the HP information that you need for your daily business And you can get it earlier than from any other site HP Customer Care Online Software drivers support documentation and answers to frequently asked questions http www hp com support Select your country region in the Select a country or region field located on the Web page Select the support block HP Technical Training Classes and schedules USA http www hp com go onlinelearning Canada http www canada hp com Asia http partnercare asiapac hp com Latin America http www conecta latinamerica hp com Parts Parts information http www hp com go parts http www hp com go partners csn http www partsurfer hp com Supplies paper Ordering information for supplies and media USA http www hp com go orderssupplies na Canada http www hp ca catalog supplies Europe http www hp com go supplies
215. bit microprocessor in the paper feeder driver controls the 500 sheet feeder sequences and the communication with the dc controller PCA The paper feeder driver drives the solenoid in response to the pickup command The paper feeder driver also reports the paper feeder status to the dc controller PCA The printer delivers a charge of 24 Vdc to the paper feeder which then generates 5 V for the integrated circuits Printer 500 sheet feeder driver PCA quaai LL Pickup solenoid 3 3V 24V Regulator CPU 10803 IC801 Sensors Reset C RESET pon el 1C802 Switches i PE EE Figure 5 10 500 sheet feeder I O block diagram 125 126 500 sheet feeder pickup and feeding Three switches on the paper feeder driver detect the media size and the presence of the 500 sheet tray The relationship between the switch combinations and the paper sizes is the same as for the printer The main motor M101 drives the paper feeder When the dc controller PCA sends a print command the main motor begins to rotate When the scanner motor reaches its prescribed speed the paper feeder driver receives the pickup command from the dc controller PCA and activates the paper feeder pickup solenoid The main motor drives the pickup roller feed roller and separation roller The pickup roller when the solenoid activates it rotates once and picks up the media in the tray The separati
216. bly If after replacing the laser scanner the problem persists replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA If after replacing the dc controller PCA the problem persists replace the Formatter assembly See Formatter assembly Image formation troubleshooting 395 396 AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc z AaBbCc ufui Table 7 34 White spots on black Table 7 33 Smudged lines either direction Possible cause The paper path is contaminated or damaged Recommended action s 1 Perform the half self test functional check See Half self test functional check If the drum is damaged replace the print cartridge 2 Process a printer cleaning page See Running the cleaning page manually If the problem persists replace the fuser See Fuser 3 Check the tray 1 feed roller and the rollers in the other trays Clean or replace the rollers as necessary 4 Check for other sources of contamination or damage in the paper path and clean or replace parts as necessary This type of defect might also be a repetitive defect See Repetitive defects troubleshooting The print cartridge has passed its life expectancy Possible cause The media does not meet specifications or is not stored correctly The print cartridge has an expected life of 12 000 pages for the HP LaserJet 4200 printer and 18 000 pages for the HP LaserJet 4300 printer Replace t
217. bly where its skew is corrected The sheet advances through transfer separation and fusing stages passes through the delivery unit and is delivered to the output bin ET NOTE The 1 500 sheet feeder detects pickup and feed jams the same way the printer does See Jam detection 129 130 Drum motor LJ 4300 Main motor Pre transfer roller PS102 gc Registration arm N ee Feed roller Feeder driver PCA Media stack surface sensor PLFTSNS SR2 PEXTSNS p SR3 D Size detection signals Separation Detection sensor roller Pickup roller Pickup arm Pickup solenoid drive signal SOLON Lifter motor drive signals DW Size detection switch Lifter Lifter motor Figure 5 13 1 500 sheet feeder pickup and feed diagram Pickup solenoid E JI 5 Theory of operation 1 500 sheet feeder lifting mechanism The lifting mechanism maintains the media stack surface at a specific position inside the 1 500 sheet feeder So that the feeder can perform a stabilized pickup operation regardless of the size of the media in the feeder Two wire cables lift the lift plate inside of the feeder A motor M1 uses pulleys in the feeder to wind the wires When the front door of the feeder is opened the pulley gears and the motor gear are disengaged and the lift plate lowers under its own weight The
218. ce and then stay on This might take up to 10 seconds 3 Release v and press 4 Up Arrow button to scroll to NEW MAINTENANCE KIT 4 Press v to reset the maintenance kit counter ET NOTE Perform this procedure only after a maintenance kit has been installed Do not use this procedure to temporarily clear the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message Maintenance kit part numbers Table 4 2 Maintenance kit part numbers Part name Part number Description 110 V maintenance kit LJ 4200 4200L Q2429 67904 The maintenance kit contains user replaceable o parts and instructions for printer maintenance 110 V maintenance kit LJ 4300 Q2436 67905 The printer maintenance kit components are consumable items Typically the associated 110 V maintenance kit LJ 4250 4350 Q5421 67901 components are not covered under the original 220 V maintenance kit LJ 4200 4200L Q2430 67904 warranty of most extendad warranty options 220 V maintenance kit LJ 4300 Q2437 67905 220 V maintenance kit LJ 4250 4350 Q5422 67901 Performing preventive maintenance 87 88 Expected life of components The following table shows the expected life of certain components in the printer To order parts see Ordering parts and supplies Table 4 3 Component life expectancies and part numbers Part name Part number Expected life Tray 1 pickup roller RL1 0019 000CN 100 000 pages Tray 1 separation pad
219. ce used It also shows the number of one sided versus two sided pages that have been printed ET NOTE This item appears only if a mass storage device that contains a recognized file system is installed in the printer such as an optional CompactFlash card This item generates a page containing information that can be used for accounting purposes PRINT FILE DIRECTORY This item appears only if a mass storage device that contains a recognized file system is installed in the printer such as an optional CompactFlash card The file directory shows information for all installed mass storage devices PRINT PCL FONT LIST PRINT PS FONT LIST The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts that are currently available to the printer The PS font list shows all the PS fonts that are currently available to the printer Control panel menus Paper handling menu If paper handling settings are correctly configured at the printer control panel you can print by selecting the type and size of media in the program or the printer driver For more information about supported media types and sizes see Supported media weights and sizes and Paper and print media Some items on this menu such as duplex and manual feed are available in the program or the printer driver if the appropriate driver is installed Program and printer driver settings override control panel settings The section that follows lists the settings and possible
220. city 1 500 sheet tray 28 envelope feeder 28 stapler stacker 29 tray 1 26 tray 2 27 card stock fuser modes 71 specifications 37 carriage returns settings 70 cartridge motor removing 253 cartridges print EconoMode 72 image formation operations 153 low 76 memory chip 160 out 76 part numbers 447 recycling 45 replacing 175 supplies status page 314 troubleshooting 380 warranty 41 cartridges staple level detection operations 151 loading 90 partnumbers 447 settings 77 characters misprinted troubleshooting 386 symbol sets 70 circuits fuser 110 513 classes 444 cleaning page automatic 73 85 manual 83 cleaning stage image formation operations 159 cleaning the printer 82 clearable warnings setting 75 clutches pickup and feed operations removing 277 tray 2 operations 119 cold reset 325 communication communications troubleshooting 331 communications settings 77 CompactFlash cards accessing 9 models supporting 163 component locations 409 454 462 configuration page 63 312 Configure Device menu 68 consumables See supplies control panel blank troubleshooting 306 buttons 56 58 clearable warning settings 75 Configure Device menu 68 date time settings 74 default settings 59 Diagnostics menu 80 Help system 58 I O menu 77 Information menu 63 information pages 310 language selecting 59 76 lights 56 57 locating 9 menu map printing 60 311 messages troubleshooting 333 operations 165 Paper Handli
221. cker or stapler stacker LED blinks in amber 4 Open the jam access door and remove all of the pages Close the access door 5 If this error persists replace the stacker or the stapler stacker 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message 13 13 00 JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER For help press Description A page is jammed inside of the duplexer Recommended action 1 Press Herr button for detailed information about clearing the jam Press A Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions Check the inside of the duplexer for scraps of media that might have been torn off when a jam was cleared Turn the power off Remove the duplexer and turn the power on If this error persists replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Replace the duplexer 13 1C 00 FUSER JAM For help press A jam exists in the fuser area The media is probably wrapped around the fuser roller Remove the fuser Turn the blue knob to remove the jammed media If necessary replace the fuser See Fuser 13 98 00 open input trays then open and close top cover The face up tray was opened when the printer was attempting to send a page to the duplexer A page shorter than 200 mm 7 87 inches was sent to the duplexer A page less than 120 mm 4 72 inches in width was sent to the duplexer A multi feed paper jam has occurred
222. curred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages Stacker feed stationary jam If the paper inlet sensor PS1101 does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specified period of time after the paper inlet sensor PS1101 detected the leading edge of the media the dc controller PCA determines that a stacker feed delay jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages Stacker residual media jam If the paper inlet sensor PS1101 or the paper delivery sensor PS1102 detects media during the initial drive period the dc controller PCA determines that a stacker residual media jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages ET NOTE This jam message only appears if the paper delivery sensor PS1102 detects media at the start of the initial drive Stacker and stapler stacker 141 Stapler stacker The dc controller PCA controls the stapler stacker by sending signals to the stapler stacker PCA The stapler stacker PCA contr
223. d and sensors When the printer power is turned on dc power from the printer low voltage supply circuit is supplied to the stacker The stacker performs the power on sequence and enters the standby mode When it receives a signal from the dc controller PCA the stacker driver PCA activates the motors and solenoids as needed to perform the stack operation Stacker feed and delivery The stacker feed and delivery system consists of several feed rollers and guides that the stacker motor and solenoids drive Sensors along the stacker paper path detect the arrival and passing of media and confirm the position of the jogger guide The jogger guide helps to align the pages before placing them in the delivery bin Table 5 5 Stacker components Component Purpose Motor Feed motor M103 Rotates the feed and delivery roller Solenoid Deflector solenoid SL1101 Operates the delivery deflector Sensor Paper inlet sensor PS1101 Detects jams Paper delivery sensor PS1102 Detects jams Delivery paper full sensor PS1106 Detects that the delivery bin is full Switch Door open switch SW1101 Detects an open door After the leading edge of the media reaches the fuser delivery sensor PS108 in the printer the dc controller PCA sends a signal to the stacker driver PCA The stacker driver PCA activates the deflector solenoid SL101 for a specific amount of time to move the delivery deflector into place to route the media to the stacker ra
224. d the stapler stacker driver PCA activates the feed motor M1103 counterclockwise to again engage the upper and lower delivery rollers The stapled stack is moved all of the way out onto the jogger guides The stapler stacker driver PCA activates the jogger motor 5 Theory of operation M1102 to move the jogger guide into the turn out position and allow the stack to drop into the delivery bin Jogger guide Jogger guide moves into the f rad turn out position MW Stapled media See gere Print media i Figure 5 28 Staple mode feed and delivery diagram 6 of 6 Unit second Delivery Notice Command Paper inlet sensor PS1101 1st page 2nd page Paper delivery sensor PS1102 Deflector solenoid SL1101 Paddle motor M1101 D 1 1 Feed motor 11103 INNER NN D Jogger motor M1102 Printer feed speed Stacker feed speed Clamp solenoid SL1102 Wait position alignment position Turn out position Figure 5 29 Staple mode timing diagram Stacker and stapler stacker 147 Stapler unit The major components of the stapler unit are the stapler motor M104 the staple cartridge the staple detection switch and the staple module home position switch The staple cartridge holds a maximum of 1 000 staples The stapler stacker driver PCA controls the stapler unit Stapler stacker driver PCA A A f SAMPLE HOMEPOSITION DETEC
225. d V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions 3 Replace the staple cartridge 4 If this error persists Replace the stapler unit see To remove and replace the stapler unit followed by the stapler stacker if necessary TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO STAPLE NOTE The stapler stacker LED is continuously illuminated in green this error applies to the stapler stacker only The maximum number of sheets the stapler can staple is 15 The print job finishes printing but is not stapled Reduce the number of pages in the print job or print and staple in batches of 15 or fewer pages TOO MANY INSTALLED Turn power off and unistall a tray Too many optional input trays are installed The printer accommodates a maximum of two optional trays Turn off the printer power and remove a tray TRAY XX CONTAINS UNKNOWN MEDIA The printer cannot determine the media type or size in the specified tray 1 To change the media type press Y SELEcT button Use 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to scroll to the type and then press Y to select it 2 To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal leave the tray switch in the Standard position 3 Tochange the media size to other sizes move the tray switch to Custom adjust the paper guides against the paper and close the tray Use A and V to scroll to the media size and then press Y to select it 7 Troubleshooting
226. d or tray 4 jams Cause Solution The feed or separation rollers are dirty worn or damaged Clean the rollers If they are dirty after cleaning or if they are worn or damaged replace the rollers See 500 sheet feed rollers or 1 500 sheet feeder feed rollers or 1 500 sheet feeder separation roller The pickup roller is worn or damaged Replace the pickup roller The drive transmission gear is damaged Check the gears and replace any damaged or worn parts The tray 3 or tray 4 paper pickup drive gears are damaged or the assembly is defective Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged See 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly or 1 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly The connector to the printer has poor contact Inspect the connector to the printer Replace any damaged connectors The paper feeder pickup solenoid is damaged 1 Disconnect the connector for the paper feeder solenoid from the feeder control PCA 2 Measure the resistance between the cable connectors 3 If the measured resistance is not approximately 160 ohms for the HP LaserJet 4200 4300 or 110 ohms for the HP LaserJet 4250 4350 replace the paper feeder pickup solenoid See 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs The tray 3 or tray 4 lifter
227. d right side covers See 1 500 sheet feeder rear cover and 1 500 sheet feeder right side cover 2 Unplug six wire harness connectors callout 1 Figure 6 125 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA 1 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts Accessories Remove two screws callout 2 Use needle nose pliers to squeeze the top of one of the nylon PCA tabs callout 3 Gently pop the PCA off of the tab Repeat the procedure on the remaining tab Remove the PCA Figure 6 126 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA 2 of 2 295 1 500 sheet feeder media size sensor 1 2 3 4 296 Remove the following assemblies e Door See 1 500 sheet feeder door e Rear and right side covers See 1 500 sheet feeder rear cover and 1 500 sheet feeder right side cover Unplug the sensor wire harness at the sensor callout 1 Remove one screw callout 2 Remove the sensor CAUTION Two plastic locator pins are on the back of the sensor Be careful not to break them when you remove the sensor Figure 6 127 1 500 sheet feeder media size sensor Ned Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the sensor verify that the sensor body is flush Sr with the chassis 6 Removing and replacing parts Accessories 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies e Door See 1 500 sheet feeder door e Rear and right side covers See 1 500 sheet feeder rear cover and 1 500 sheet feeder right Side cover
228. d then remain on This might take up to 10 seconds Press 4 Ur Arrow button Press the Pause Resume button LJ 4200 4300 or the Menu button LJ 4250 4350 The display should show SKIP DISK LOAD Press 4 until NVRAM INIT is highlighted Press v The printer initializes NVRAM and then continues its power on sequence 7 Troubleshooting Hard disk initialization A CAUTION A hard disk initialization erases and reformats the printer hard disk Perform a hard disk initialization only if an error code on the control panel indicates an EIO disk error Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it ET NOTE Before performing a hard disk initialization print a menu map and a configuration page see Menu map and Configuration page Use the information on the configuration page to reset any customer set printer configuration values that the hard disk initialization procedure changes To initialize the hard disk 1 Turn the printer power off 2 For HP Laserjet 4200 4300 Series printers Hold down the Pause Resume button and then turn the printer power on For HP Laserjet 4250 4350 Series printers Turn the printer power on and then hold down the Menu button when the memory count begins 3 Continue holding down the button until all three printer control panel lights flash once and then remain on This might take up to 10 seconds 4 Press Back Arrow button The display should show INITIALIZE DISK 5
229. d to one tray m Print the job in both the simplex and duplex mode to identify whether the problem occurs only in one mode or the other m Try printing on paper from an unopened ream that has been stored correctly If the jam does not occur with this media then the customer s media might be causing the problem m Ifthe jam occurs when the printer is first turned on check the paper path for small torn pieces of media Also check for broken sensors or flags and check for loose or defective connections m If the media is torn folded or wrinkled typically along the leading edge inspect the paper path for items that might be causing the damage m If the customer is using non HP supplies try replacing those supplies with genuine HP supplies to see if the problem is resolved m f necessary explain the correct methods of media storage media loading and printer operation to the customer Make sure that the customer knows not to remove media from the output bin especially during duplex printing until it completely exits the output delivery assembly Paper path checklist m Verify that the media is correctly loaded in the input trays and that all length and width guides are set correctly m Clean the printer Toner and paper dust in the paper path can inhibit free movement of the media through the printer and can block the sensors m Use the paper path test on the Diagnostic menu to select various printer input and output options to
230. d to step 2 1 Remove the following e Top accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door e Formatter cover See Formatter cover 2 Open the rear output bin the print cartridge door and the front cover 3 Use needle nose pliers to release the print cartridge drive arm tab callout 1 si O Hint Push the print cartridge drive arm callout 2 back into the printer to avoid Sr damaging it when you remove the top cover Figure 6 20 Top cover 1 of 3 6 Removing and replacing parts 4 Remove four mounting screws callout 3 N Figure 6 21 Top cover 2 of 3 Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 193 5 Grasp the top cover and carefully rotate the left edge up and away from the printer Do not apply stress to the control panel wire harness callout 4 when rotating the top cover away from the printer A CAUTION The accessory pin callout 5 is not captive Do not lose the pin C Figure 6 22 Top cover 3 of 3 6 Disconnect the control panel wire harness callout 4 from the dc controller PCA Remove the top cover A CAUTION When the top cover is reinstalled make sure that the wire harnesses are correctly routed through the cable guides If the wire harnesses are not routed correctly they can be damaged when the top cover is reinstalled Q Hint The control panel wire harness connector can become disconnected when you reinstall Sr the top cover If the
231. de HP recycled an average of 8096 of the print cartridge by weight consisting primarily of plastic and metals Recycled plastics and metals are used to make new products such as HP products plastic trays and spools The remaining materials are disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner U S returns For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies HP encourages the use of bulk returns Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single prepaid preaddressed UPS label that is supplied in the package For more information in the U S call 800 340 2445 or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site at http www hp com recycle Non U S returns Non U S customers should call the local HP Sales and Service Office or visit the http www hp com recycle Web site for mpre information about the availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide Go to http www hp com support ljpaperguide to download this guide in PDF format This product is suitable for the use of recycled media according to EN12281 2002 Material restrictions This HP product does not contain added mercury This HP product might initially contain lead in solder that might require special handling at end of life This product will eventually switch to
232. de feed and delivery diagram 1 of 6 The jogger guide motor M1101 moves the jogger guides to the waiting position and the stapler stacker driver PCA again activates the paddle motor M1101 counterclockwise to engage the upper and lower delivery rollers 5 Theory of operation Jogger guides Upper delivery gt lt Lower delivery Ee roller Sa deg a E La Waiting position gt lt Turn out position Printer Media Figure 5 24 Staple mode feed and delivery diagram 2 of 6 At a specific time after the paper inlet sensor PS1101 detects the leading edge of the media the stapler stacker PCA changes the speed of the feed motor M1103 to synchronize the feed rollers with the speeds of the other stapler stacker motors and rollers The stapler stacker PCA then activates the paddle motor M1101 counterclockwise to again disengage the upper and lower delivery rollers The delivery deflector returns to its normal position Jogger guides Upper delivery roller Lower delivery roller EC Stapler stacker PS1101 r 1 Waiting position WRe Printer L ea Delivery deflector Figure 5 25 Staple mode feed and delivery diagram 3 of 6 At a specific time after the paper inlet sensor PS1101 detects the trailing edge of the media the stapler stacker driver PCA activates the clamp solenoid SL 1102 The cl
233. der paper sensor SR3 5 1 500 sheet feeder paper pickup solenoid SL1 6 1 500 sheet feeder door sensor SR1 7 Troubleshooting Stapler stacker stapler assembly Figure 7 22 Location of the stapler stacker stapler unit 1 Stapler unit stapler stacker accessory only Accessory component locations 421 Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors Figure 7 23 Location of the stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors 1 Delivery roller disengaging sensor stapler stacker only PS1104 2 Paddle home position sensor stapler stacker only PS1103 3 Paper delivery sensor PS1102 4 Paper full sensor PS1106 5 Jogger home position sensor stapler stacker only PS1105 6 Door open switch SW1101 7 Paper inlet sensor PS1101 422 7 Troubleshooting Stacker and stapler stacker motors and solenoids Figure 7 24 Location of the stacker and stapler stacker motors and solenoids 1 Deflector solenoid SL1101 2 Paddle mechanism and motor stapler stacker only M1101 3 Jogger mechanism and motor stapler stacker only M1102 4 Clamp solenoid stapler stacker only SL1102 5 Feed mechanism and motor M1103 Accessory component locations 423 424 Stacker and stapler stacker PCAs Figure 7 25 Location of the stacker and stapler stacker PCAs 1 Stacker or stapler stacker driver PCA 2 Stacker or stapler stacker
234. der pickup and feed diagram Envelope feeder jam detection The envelope feeder uses the envelope multiple feed sensor PS902 along with sensors in the printer to detect the presence of media and to determine whether the media is feeding correctly or is jamming If a jam occurs in the envelope feeder the error message 13 xx yy appears on the control panel display For more information see Numerical printer messages Envelope feeder pickup delay jam If the pick up sensor PS103 does not detect the leading edge of the envelope within a specified period of time after the envelope is picked up it attempts to pick up the media several times before determining that a pickup jam has occurred If the pre feed sensor inside of the printer P5102 does not detect the leading edge of the envelope within a specific amount of time after the re pick operation stops the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 xx yy message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Numerical printer messages Envelope feeder pickup stationary jam If the envelope multiple feed sensor PS902 detects multiple envelopes after the pickup operation begins the transport process stops and a 13 xx yy message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Numerical printer messages Paper pickup and feed system 133
235. des in a non standard configuration The printer is prompting you to use the control panel to specify a predefined non standard paper size a custom paper size or an any custom or an any size setting The user s software program defines the any custom and any size settings Use the control panel to select the appropriate custom paper size Press Y SeLecT button If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal sized the tray switch should be set to Standard Set the tray switch to Custom for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set to custom before the size can be selected at the control panel Print a configuration page and verify that the tray size settings match the actual tray settings If the settings do not match verify that the tray size sensors are functioning correctly If they are not replace the media size sensors SW102 SW801 or SW1 See Printer switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs Verify that the sensor fingers inside the tray are engaging the tray sensor correctly See Tray 2 500 sheet feeder and 1 500 sheet feeder media size detection 345 Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To change type press Y alternates with TRAY XX
236. determine where each type of screw is used The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the material that is being fastened Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one in its original location ET NOTE When you are disassembling the product place the screws into the chassis holes from which they were removed This prevents their loss and ensures that the proper type and length of screw for each location is used when the product is reassembled Table 6 1 Common fasteners used in this product Drawing and description Purpose This screw is used to fasten metal to metal when good electrical contact is needed This screw also provides high resistance to loosening Phillips head machine screw with captive star washer This screw is used to fasten sheet metal or plastic to plastic K frames the deep coarsely spaced threads provide an Ree increased holding capability while decreasing the possibility of stripping the target hole Phillips head screw with self tapping threads Reinstallation note To install a self tapping screw first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten it You will feel resistance and hear the screw click when it engages the existing threads in the hole Do not overtighten the screw If a self tapping screw hole becomes stripped repair the screw hole or replace the affected assembly
237. display EDGE TO EDGE NO Use this item to turn the edge to edge mode on or off for all OVERRIDE print jobs YES COURIER FONT REGULAR Use this item to select the version of Courier font to use DARK REGULAR The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet 4 Series printers DARK The internal Courier font that is available on the HP LaserJet III Series printers WIDE A4 NO Use this item to change the number of characters that can be printed on a single line of A4 size paper Control panel menus Item Values Explanation YES NO Up to 78 10 pitch characters can be printed on one line YES Up to 80 10 pitch characters can be printed on one line PRINT PS OFF Use this item to select whether or not a PS error page prints or not ERRORS ON OFF PS error page never prints ON PS error page prints when PS errors occur PRINT PDF OFF Use this item to select whether or not a PDF error page prints or not ERRORS HP LaserJet ON 4250 4350 only OFF PDF error page never prints ON PDF error page prints when PDF errors occur PCL FORM LENGTH FORM LENGTH Use this option to set vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size ORIENTATION ORIENTATION Use this option to select default page FONT SOURCE orientation to portrait or landscape FONT NUMBER FONT SOURCE Allows you to select the font source as Internal CARD SLOT 1 2 or 3 Internal disk or EIO disk FONT PITCH FONT NUMBER The printer assigns a numb
238. downloading the file to the printer A progress bar keeps you updated on how much of the file has been downloaded When the file is downloading RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control panel After the file downloads to the printer Performing upgrade appears on the control panel ET NOTE The printer automatically turns off and then turns on again after processing the upgrade After the printer turns on again and finishes initializing print a configuration page to make sure that the new firmware is installed Press 22 on the control panel to print a configuration page 4 Maintenance Remote firmware update using the LPR command ET NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 S Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 Follow these instructions to update the printer software remotely by using the LPR command 1 From a command window type lpr P lt IPADDRESS gt S lt IPADDRESS gt o FILENAME or lpr S lt IPADDRESS gt Pbinps FILENAME where lt IPADDRESS gt can be either the TCP IP address or the hostname of the printer and where FILENAME is the filename of the RFU file ET NOTE The parameter o consists of a lowercase O not a zero and a lowercase L not the numeral 1 This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode 2 Press Enter A message appears on the control panel See Printer messages during firmware update At the end of the upgrade process
239. driver is installed Program and printer driver settings override control panel settings In general it is better to change these settings in the printer driver if applicable The section that follows lists the settings and possible values In the Values column the default value for each setting is the one that has an asterisk next to it Item Values Explanation COPIES 1 to 32000 Use this item to set the default number of copies by selecting any number from 1 to 32000 Use 4 Up Arrow button or V Down Arrow button to select the number of Copies or use the numeric keypad if available to specify the number of copies Use Y Setect button after specifying the number of copies The Setting saved message appears This setting applies only to print jobs that do not have the number of copies specified in the program or printer driver such as an MS DOS UNIX or Linux program ET NOTE Itis best to set the number of copies in the program or printer driver Program and printer driver settings override control panel settings DEFAULT LETTER Use this item to set the default image size for paper and envelopes The item name changes from paper to envelope PAPER SIZE LEGAL as you scroll through the available sizes This setting applies only to print jobs that do not have the paper size EXECUTIVE specified in the program or printer driver STATEMENT 8 5 x 13 A4 A5 B5 JIS 68 3 Operation Item Values
240. dvise the customer to turn EconoMode on or off from the printer driver or software program because those settings override the control panel settings EconoMode settings can also be changed from the print quality menu on the control panel CAUTION Hewlett Packard does not recommend full time use of EconoMode If EconoMode is always used the toner supply will probably outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge 7 Troubleshooting Half self test functional check The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following stages m Cleaning removes excess toner from the drum surface m Conditioning places a uniform electrical charge on the drum m Writing the laser strikes the surface of the drum to create an electrostatic image m Developing forms the toner image on the drum m Transferring charges transfer the image to the print media m Fusing heat and pressure produces a permanent image The purpose of the half self test check is to determine which process is malfunctioning Use this procedure to perform the test 1 Print a configuration page from the control panel INFORMATION menu 2 Open the top cover after the paper advances half way through the printer about 3 to 5 seconds after the main motor begins rotation The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the print cartridge 3 Remove the print cartridge 4 Open the print cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface If a dark and di
241. e operations www hp com go lj4250 software www hp com go lj4300 software or In some instances electrical noise in the www hp com go lj4350 software cable can corrupt data during transmission Select Download Drivers and to the printer Other causes include poor Software Check for the latest firmware quality parallel cables poor connections or image version at the bottom of the specific software programs page If this firmware image is newer than the one installed on the printer Sometimes the formatter itself is at fault and the printer can receive a firmware which is usually indicated by a 79 Service update download the newer firmware Error upgrade Not all HP LaserJet 4200 4300 printers can receive firmware upgrades 4 Try printing a job from a different software program If the job prints go back to the first program and try printing a different file If the message Display message troubleshooting 355 Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Recommended action Control panel message Description appears only with a certain software program or print job contact the software vendor for assistance If the message persists when using different software programs and attempting specific print jobs disconnect all cables that connect the printer to the network or a computer Turn the printer off Remove all memory DIMMs or third party DIMMs from the printer Do not remove the firmware DIMM in slot
242. e swing Internal components 2 of 3 RL1 0015 000CN Kicker assembly Internal components 2 of 3 RL1 0019 000CN Roller pickup Tray 1 pickup assembly RL1 0264 000CN Shaft retard drive Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0001 030CN Main drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 also see Figure 8 10 Internal components 1 of 3 Main drive assembly RM1 0001 030CN Main drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 Main drive assembly RM1 0002 020CN Duplexing pendulum assembly Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 0004 060CN Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4200 4300 also see Figure 8 12 Internal components 3 of 3 Tray 1 pickup assembly RM1 0004 060CN Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4200 4300 Tray 1 pickup assembly RM1 0005 020CN Tray 1 Tray 1 pickup assembly RM1 0011 060CN Registration assembly Internal components 1 of 3 RM1 0012 020CN Feed roller assembly also see Figure 8 11 Feed roller assembly Internal components 1 of 3 RM1 0012 020CN Feed roller assembly Feed roller assembly RM1 0013 140CN Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4200 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 0014 140CN Fuser 220 240 V LJ 4200 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 0019 050CN Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4200 also see Figure Internal components 1 of 3 8 9 Electrical components RM1 0019 050CN Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4200 Electrical components RM1 0020 000CN Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4200 also see Figure Internal components 1 of 3 8 9 Electrical components RM1 0020 000CN Power supply assemb
243. e Device and Diagnostics Alerts On networks only Use this page to establish e mail alerts for various printer and supplies events E mail On networks only Use this page in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e mail as well as to establish e mail alerts Security Use this page to set a password that must be typed to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs Also use it to enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server Other Links Use this page to add or customize a link to another Web site The link you establish appears in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages The following permanent links always appear in the Other Links area HP Instant Support Order Supplies and Product Support Device Information Use this page to name the printer and assign an asset number to it Use the name and e mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer Language Use this page to specify the language in which the embedded Web server information appears Networking tab The network administrator uses this tab to control network related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP based network This tab does not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer or if the printer is connected to a network with anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server 316 7 Troubleshooting Other links This section of the
244. e control panel display after you replace the paper feed assembly verify that this sensor flag spring is installed correctly Use the antistatic bar see Cooling fan right side HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 Series printers only to release the sensor spring Hook the spring over the flag tab callout 1 in Figure 6 84 Correctly install the paper feed assembly sensor flag Fasten the paper feed assembly to the chassis with the flag spring positioned in the hole in the transfer assembly Release the spring from the tab on the flag callout 2 in Figure 6 84 Correctly install the paper feed assembly sensor flag Verify that the flag is held in the upright position can freely move and always returns to the rpright position If the flag does not move freely or does not return to the upright position an error message 13 20 00 JAM will appear on the control panel display when you turn on the printer power 6 Removing and replacing parts Main drive assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies e Top and right side covers See Top cover and Right side cover e hRight side fan and fan duct HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 Series printers only See Cooling fan right side HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 Series printers only e Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 Series printers only See steps 1 through 6 of Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series printer only e Main motor See Main motor e Dc c
245. e dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 58 4 Power supply 1 Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 359 Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action 59 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 59 XY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on A printer motor error has occurred X Description 0 main motor error 1 motor startup error 2 motor rotation error 4 print cartridge motor error LJ 4250 4300 4350 only A print cartridge motor error LJ 4250 4300 4350 only Y Description Y 0 59 00 59 10 59 20 Motor failure 1 Turn the printer off and then on 2 Reconnect the main motor wire harness on the dc controller PCA location J98 3 Replace the main motor See Main motor 4 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 59 A or 59 4 print cartridge motor failure LJ 4250 4300 4350 only 1 Turn the printer off and then on 2 Reconnect the print cartridge motor wire harness on the dc controller PCA location J86 3 Replace the print cartridge motor See Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series printer only 4 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 59 2 Main motor Rotation error The main motor is not functioning correctly 1 Turn the printer off and then on 2 Reconnect the main motor wire harness on the dc controller
246. e display Use the 4 Up Arrow button or v Down Arrow button to scroll to the language that you want to see on the display 6 Press v to save your choice An asterisk appears next to the selected language Using the control panel 59 Control panel menus Most routine printing tasks that the printer performs originate from a computer software program or a printer driver These two methods are the most convenient way to control the printer and they override the printer control panel settings See the Help file for your program for more information Printer settings can also be changed by using the printer control panel Use the control panel to gain access to printer features that are not supported by the software program or the printer driver The following control panel menus are available Retrieve job menu Information menu Paper handling menu Configure device menu Printing submenu Print quality submenu System setup submenu Stapler stacker submenu I O submenu Resets menu Resets submenu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only Diagnostics menu Diagnostics menu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only Service menu Service menu service PIN codes Printing control panel menus To see the current settings for the menus and items that are available at the control panel print a control panel menu map You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference ET To print a control panel menu map 1 2 60
247. e instructions in this section Failure to follow these instructions can result in a printer configuration downgrade For example an HP LaserJet 4350 printer could perform as an HP LaserJet 4250 1 Turn the printer off 2 Remove the formatter see Formatter assembly and replace it with the new formatter 3 Turn the printer on and then wait for five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state ET NOTE Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written The same five minute wait is required several times during this procedure Turn the printer off Turn the printer on again and then wait five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state Turn the printer off Remove the dc controller see Dc controller PCA and replace it with the new dc controller Turn the printer on and wait for five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state o o OO A Turn the printer off 10 Turn the printer on again and then wait five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state 11 Print a configuration page to verify against original settings 12 Verify the printer series 4250 4350 Main assemblies 235 Power supply 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear output bin See Rear output bin Rear accessory cover and tray 2 extension door See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door Top right side and left side covers See Top cover through Left side cover Fuser See Fuser
248. e print cartridge is replaced or at an automatic interval that the user establishes If an optional duplexer is installed then run the cleaning page manually The cleaning procedure takes about 2 5 minutes to complete A message either CREATING CLEANING PAGE or CLEANING appears on the printer control panel display during the cleaning processes m See Running the cleaning page manually m See Running the cleaning page automatically Running the cleaning page manually In order for the cleaning page to work properly print the page on copier grade paper not bond heavy or rough paper ET NOTE If an optional duplexer is installed this cleaning method is the only one that can be used Make sure that automatic cleaning option is not selected To ensure good print quality run the cleaning page every time the print cartridge is replaced If the cleaning page is needed frequently then use a different type of paper for everyday printing To run the cleaning page manually 1 Ifa duplexer is installed open the rear output bin 2 Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus 3 Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down AnROw button to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE and then press v 4 Use or Y to scroll to PRINT QUALITY and then press v Cleaning the printer and accessories 83 84 5 Use Aor v to scroll to CREATE CLEANING PAGE LJ 4200 4300 or PROCESS CLEANING PAGE LJ 4250 4350 and then press v 6 Follow
249. e printer make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave or Sleep mode Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control panel Open a command window on your computer Type ftp lt TCP IP PRINTER ADDRESS gt For example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type ftp 192 168 0 90 Press Enter When prompted for the user name press Enter When prompted for the password press Enter Type the word bin at the command prompt Press Enter The message 200 Types set to I Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window Type put FILENAME where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file that was downloaded from the Web including the path For example type put C LJ 4250FW RFU and then press Enter E NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type put c My Documents LJA42 5Ofw rfu The following series of messages appears in the command window e 200 PORT command successful e 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection e 226 Ready e 226 Processing Job e 226 Transfer complete A message containing transfer speed information appears The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer This can take about five minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer ET NOTE The printer automatically turns off and then on again after processing t
250. e screw shown in callout 5 Figure 6 89 Registration assembly 2 of 2 5 Lift the registration assembly out of the printer Pickup and feed assemblies 267 Sensors and switches This section provides instructions for removing and replacing FRU sensors and switches PS103 S P Psto7 P9102 ren PS105 psios amp e ee Figure 6 90 Sensors and switches SW101 Top cover open switch SW102 Paper size switch PS101 Tray 2 paper sensor PS102 Pre feed sensor PS103 Top of page sensor PS104 Output bin full sensor PS105 Tray 1 paper sensor on the tray 1 pickup assembly PS106 Paper width sensor 1 PS107 Paper stack position sensor PS108 Fuser assembly delivery sensor PS109 Paper width sensor 2 LJ 4250 4350 only TH2 Fuser temperature sensor LJ 4250 4350 only 268 6 Removing and replacing parts Tray 2 500 sheet feeder media size sensor PS101 Tray 2 and the 500 sheet feeder each contain a media size sensor Tray 2 media size sensor PS101 1 Remove the following assemblies e Top cover See Top cover e Right side cover See Right side cover e Formatter assembly See Formatter assembly 2 Unplug the sensor cable callout 1 3 Remove two screws callout 2 4 Press the locking tab callout 3 and then slide the sensor toward the front of the printer to release it Figure 6 91 Tray 2 media size sensor 5 Liftthe sensor aw
251. e that the software program is not sending incorrect page length requests or extra page eject commands The network configuration is incorrect Some sharing devices on networks might generate a blank page as a print job separator Check with the network administrator Multiple feeds are occurring The printer might be feeding two or more pages at on time intermittent problem Remove the media from the tray and flex the stack in one direction and then the other to separate the pages Do not fan the stack Replace the stack in the tray The sealing tape was left in the print cartridge Remove the sealing tape The print cartridge is empty or defective Replace the print cartridge The laser scanner shutter door is not opening correctly No transfer roller voltage is being generated 1 Remove and reseat the print cartridge 2 Verify that the laser scanner shutter door can open correctly If necessary replace the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly Without transfer roller voltage toner does not transfer correctly from the surface of the drum to the paper Perform the half self test functional check see Half self test functional check to check the electrophotographic process If necessary replace the transfer roller See Transfer roller Continued The high voltage connector springs are dirty or damaged The high voltage connector springs prot
252. e the end user contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program that is in use and request a driver for the printer Software components 13 14 Additional drivers The following drivers are not included on the CD but are available from the Internet m OS 2 PCL 5 or PCL 6 printer driver m OS 2 PS printer driver m UNIX model scripts m Linux drivers m HP OpenVMS drivers ET NOTE The OS 2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS 2 They are not S available for Simplified Chinese Korean Japanese or Traditional Chinese Select the correct printer driver for your needs Select a printer driver based on the way that the printer is used Certain printer features are available only in the PCL 6 drivers See the printer driver Help for available features m Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of printer features For general office printing the PCL 6 driver is recommended to provide optimum performance and print quality m Use the PCL 5 driver if backward compatibility with previous PCL printer drivers or older printers is necessary m Use the PS driver when printing primarily from PostScript specific programs such as Adobe and Corel amp for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs or for PS CompactFlash font support ET NOTE The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages Printer driver Help Each printer driver has Help screens that can be activated by using t
253. e top of the window to view a list of previous jobs that were sent to the printer from your computer 7 Troubleshooting Control panel menus Use the control panel menus to control various printer functions For example you can use the RESETS submenu to quickly reset and restore most of the factory default printer settings Not all of the available menus are described in this manual For more information about control panel menus see Control panel menus Using control panel menus 1 Press v Sg scr button or the Menu button to open the menus 2 Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll to the menu that you want and then press v 3 Some menus might have several submenus Use 4 or Yx to scroll to the submenu item that you want and then press v 4 Use 4 or Y to scroll to the setting and then press v An asterisk appears next to the selection on the display indicating that it is now the default Some settings change rapidly if 4 or v is held down 5 Press Pause Resume to close the menu Control panel menus 319 Resets submenu To find the RESETS submenu use the control panel to open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu see Using the control panel Items on the Resets submenu are used to return settings to the defaults and to change settings such as PowerSave Sleep The following section lists the settings and their possible values in the RESETS submenu The default value for each setting is the one that has an
254. eL 303 Initial troubleshooting checkltet emen 303 Troubleshooting flowchart sssssssneeeneen menm enm eene 305 Power on checks ttt tn ESA ANEA EEEEENANEEEEEEEEEEEAEPEEEEEEEE EENES EESE EEEEE EEEE nEt 306 OVGEVIOW cni ertt erede a a aa a e Pe a RE E a e ai 306 Troubleshooting tools sse eene nennen nennen en nnnn inen nennen nennen nen nennen 309 tte Mee RE 310 Menu IMAP m OO 311 Configuration le rite a re hdd pce eni tie 312 Supplies status PAGE pem 314 Embedded Web server s ssosssenrsneseesttnnttesttettttnttnsntt EtA AAAEASAEEEEEEAAA ASSAR E EEEn AAAS annn nanenane 315 Gaining access to the embedded Web server 315 Information TAD EE 315 Settings taD TTT 316 Klee le citi T pr dni te Tete iet dtu 316 Other IKE ut nim gt ron bete utetur ubere 317 Printer Status and Alerts software ssssssssssssseee eene nnne 317 To select status messages a e tige eene esed Eee eene Redde 318 To view status messages and Imformation senes 318 Control panel menus iie c gc tette ittis aci Mieter tibia ee 319 Using control panel mens 319 Resets submenu 4 tec d ee elder teda dete oai ene eod a ede d 320 Eeleren UNENEE 321 Service menu service PIN codes ci ci eid cei dor d eei e de dus 323 fH p E 324 Converting the Service ID to an actual date 324 Restoring the Service ID eene tenente enne been d nbt enn nan 324 Prin
255. each setting is the one that has an asterisk next to it Table 7 4 Diagnostics menu Item Values Explanation PRINT EVENT LOG No values available Press Y SELECT button to generate a list of the 50 most recent entries in the event log The printed event log shows the error number page count error code and description or personality that was in use when the event occurred SHOW EVENT LOG No values available Use 4 Up Arrow button or Down Arrow button to scroll through the event log contents PAPER PATH TEST No values available Generate a test page which is useful for testing the paper handling features PRINT TEST PAGE of the printer m SOURCE PRINT TEST PAGE Press Y the SeLect button to start the paper path test that uses the Source tray destination output bin duplex and number of copies settings DESTINATION S DUPLEX that you set in the other items on the Paper Path Test menu Set the other E COPIES items before selecting PRINT TEST PAGE m SOURCE Select the tray for the paper path that you want to test You can select any m ALL_TRAYS tray that is installed Select ALL_TRAYS to test the paper path for m TRAY 1 every tray Paper must be loaded in the selected trays m TRAY2 m TRAY lt N gt DESTINATION Select the output bin for the paper path that you want to test You can select m ALLBINS any output bin that is installed Optional bins stacker or stapler stacker bin
256. eae ede aeu de a na una ects 68 Printing SUBMENU gees 68 Praorgualiy submenu rio riot herr ERE RR AREE RE da HE Saa uted avec dates 71 System Setup SUBMENU iioii sedente ik duae e eL Lade ee RAE SEENEN 74 Stapler stacker submenu sse eene 7T VO Ree 7T Resets submenu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only 78 Diagnostics menu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only sse 80 4 Maintenance Chapter ee 81 Cleaning the printer and accessories ssssssssssee nennen errem nennen nnns 82 Cleaning the TUSE m 83 Running the cleaning page manual 83 To run the cleaning page manual 83 Running the cleaning page automattecalhy nnne 85 To run the cleaning page automatcallhy 85 Cleaning spilled tonet 2 caia dice A ae ca aeu e Eee xpo e Dit s 85 Performing preventive malntenance eene eene nennen nri n nnne nennen nnns 86 Resetting the maintenance kit counter LJ 4200 4300 seen 86 Resetting the maintenance kit counter LJ 4250 4350 sse 87 Maintenance kit part numbers sssssssssssssssseseeeeeeneeeee enne nne n nen nenenremrrnn nnne 87 Expected life of components ssssssssssssssseneeenerr nennen nennen 88 Maintaining the Stapler Hp ENEE emat Ie Lt ated ee te petet b SEENEN Ee EUR CERE ee 89 To remove and replace the stapler unt 89 Loading Ee EE 90 To load staples ee 90 Downloading a remote firmware update 91 Download
257. ecessary to process several cleaning pages through the printer See Running the cleaning page manually 7 Troubleshooting Image defects This section helps you define print quality problems and solutions Often print quality problems can be resolved by making sure that the printer is correctly maintained using print media that meets HP specifications or running a cleaning page ET NOTE Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low temperature inks such as those that are used in some types of thermography Do not use raised letterhead The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the media Make sure that any colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with the printer s temperature of 230 C 446 F for 0 05 second Avoid using paper that has already been used in a printer or copier Also do not print on both sides of envelopes transparencies or labels Image quality When you are working with customers obtain a print sample before you begin troubleshooting their printer Ask the customer to explain the quality that is expected from the printer The print sample will also help clarify the image quality issue Table 7 18 Image quality checks Image quality check Action Does the problem repeat on the page Use the repetitive defect table to determine the cause of the repeating defect See Repetitive defects troubleshooting Is the print cartridge full and is it manufactur
258. ect the RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop down menu Click Update Firmware HP Web JetAdmin sends the selected RFU file to the printer A message appears on the control panel See Printer messages during firmware update At the end of the upgrade process Ready appears on the control panel Use HP Web Jetadmin 6 5 to perform multiple or unattended installations 1 2 Start HP Web Jetadmin Create a device group A simple way to do this is to follow these steps a Click Device Management and then click All Devices b Hold down the Shift key and then click to select printers that you want to be included in the group and then click OK c When prompted type a name for the new device group and then click OK To modify several printers in a group click the group name and then click Open The drop down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window Scroll if necessary to view it In the Device Group Tools drop down box select an action Type in the appropriate information and then click Return to Device Group when you are finished 4 Maintenance Printer messages during firmware update The printer shows three messages that appear during a normal update process Table 4 4 Update messages Printer message Explanation RECEIVING UPGRADE Appears when the printer recognizes the start of an RFU update and remains until the printer verifies the validity and integrity of the RFU update
259. ect the option to notify you when the print cartridges are low directly connected printers that support Printer Status and Alerts generate a message when the print cartridges are low However none of the networked printers generate this message unless the alert affects a user specific job Troubleshooting tools 317 318 To select status messages 1 Open Printer Status and Alerts in one of these ways e Double click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon which is near the clock in the Tray Manager e On the Start menu click Programs click Printer Status and Alerts and then click Printer Status and Alerts 2 Click the Options icon on the left side of the window 3 In the For field select the printer driver for this printer or select All Printers 4 Clear the options for the messages that you do not want to appear and select the options for the messages that you do want to appear 5 n Status check rate select how frequently you want the software to update the printer status information that the software uses to generate the messages The status check rate might not be available if the network administrator has restricted the rights to this function To view status messages and information On the left side of the window select the printer for which you want to see information The information that is provided includes status messages supplies status and printer capabilities You can also click the job history clock icon at th
260. ectly If the rollers do not rotate replace the stacker or stapler stacker The feed rollers are worn or defective Clean the rollers if they are dirty If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 41 Printer connection area jam troubleshooting continued Possible cause Recommended action s The inlet sensor PS1101 arm cannot move freely or is damaged The inlet sensor PS1101 spring is defective or damaged Inspect the inlet sensor PS1101 See Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors Verify that the sensor arm can move freely If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker Reseat the inlet sensor PS1101 spring See Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker The stacker or stapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the stacker or stapler stacker The leading edge of the media has not emerged from the top of the printer The deflector cannot move freely or is defective Inspect the deflector Verify that it can move freely and is not damaged If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker The deflector solenoid SL1101 is damaged If necessary replace the deflector mechanism in the printer The stacker or stapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the stacker or stapler stacker Table 7 42 Delivery area jam troubleshooting Possible cause Recomme
261. ed by HP Check the print cartridge as described in this chapter and verify that you are not using the EconoMode setting when sending the print job See Check the print cartridge and EconoMode Is the customer using print media that meets all HP For more information about HP s media specification standards standards see chapter 1 or the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide See Supported media weights and sizes and Paper and print media Is the print sample similar to one in the print quality tables Compare the sample to the print quality tables in this See Image defect tables chapter and perform the corresponding procedures that are recommended See Image defect tables Is the problem in the print cartridge the transfer roller or the Perform the half self test functional check and the drum fuser rotation functional check to determine the location of the defect See Half self test functional check and Drum rotation functional check If the toner image is present on the drum surface assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem If the image on the media is correct before it enters the fuser then the problem exists in the fuser ipo eae Image formation troubleshooting 379 380 Check the print cartridge Image formation defects are often the result of problems with the print cartridge If you
262. ed during the day to prevent unwanted moisture changes Supported types of media The printer supports the following types of paper and other print media m Plain m Letterhead m Prepunched m Bond m Color m Rough m Preprinted m Transparency m Labels m Recycled m Card stock m Envelopes Media specifications 31 32 Guidelines for using paper For best results use conventional 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib paper Make sure that the paper is of good quality and free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles voids and curled or bent edges If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading such as bond or recycled check the label on the package of paper CAUTION Some paper might cause print quality problems jamming or damage to the printer Symptom Problem with paper Solution Poor print quality or toner adhesion m Too moist too rough too smooth m Try another kind of paper one that or embossed is between 100 to 250 Sheffield with 4 to 6 moisture content m Ragged edges x Change the fuser mode See Print m Faulty paper lot quality submenu Dropouts jamming curl m Stored improperly m Store paper flat in its moisture proof wrapping Increased gray background shading m Too heavy x Use lighter paper m Use a higher toner density setting See Print quality submenu m Too smooth m Useless smooth rougher paper Excessive curl problems with feeding m Too moi
263. ed it absorbs any excess moisture causing light print and dropouts Also as paper loses and gains moisture it can distort This can cause jams As a result paper storage and handling are as important as the paper making process itself Paper storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be easily used in a short time about 3 months Paper stored for long periods might experience heat and moisture extremes which can cause damage Planning is important to prevent damage to a large supply of paper Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use Opened packages of paper have more potential for environmental damage especially if they are not wrapped with a moisture proof barrier The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum printer performance The required condition is 20 to 24 C 68 to 75 F with a relative humidity of 1 Product information 45 to 55 The following guidelines should be helpful when evaluating the paper storage environment m Paper should be stored at or near room temperature m The air should not be too dry or too humid because of the hygroscopic properties of paper m The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture proof wrapping If the printer environment is subject to extremes unwrap only the amount of paper that is to be us
264. eet feeder right side cover Unplug six wire harness connectors callout 1 Remove two screws callout 2 bk OO N Remove the PCA A EN UM 6 104 500 sheet feeder control PCA Figure Accessories 281 282 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 1 Remove the 500 sheet feeder right side cover See 500 sheet feeder right side cover 2 Unplug the lifter drive harness connector from the assembly PCA location J803 callout 1 Disconnect the tension spring callout 2 and remove one screw callout 3 Doe Figure 6 105 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 1 of 2 3 Pull the tray lifter drive assembly out towards the right side of the chassis until its pivot shaft clears the tray guide Rotate the lifter drive assembly up and out of the chassis to remove it Figure 6 106 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 2 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts Accessories 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies e 500 sheet feeder right side cover See 500 sheet feeder right side cover e 500 sheet feeder tray lifter drive assembly See 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 2 Unplug the main drive solenoid harness connector callout 1 from the PCA location J802 Remove the harness from the harness clip callout 2 Figure 6 107 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly 1 of 7 283 284 Remove two screws callout 3 Remove the tray
265. efault value of one copy is a temporary setting The printer continues to use the temporary setting until it receives another software request or until it is reset Control panel default A value that is set at the control panel when you select a menu item An asterisk appears next to the setting indicating that it is the default setting The printer retains this default when power to the printer is turned off Factory default The value that is set for each menu item at the factory Factory defaults are listed in the item column of the menu tables starting with Retrieve Job menu ET NOTE For information about the resets submenu the diagnostics menu and the service menu see Resets submenu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only Diagnostics menu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only and Service menu service PIN codes Setting the control panel display language The control panel display can be set to show messages in different languages The default setting is English Turn the printer power off 2 For HP Laserjet 4200 4300 Series printers Hold down Setect button and then turn the printer power on For HP Laserjet 4250 4350 Series printers Turn the printer power on and then hold down v SELEcr button when the memory count begins 3 Continue holding down v until all three printer control panel lights flash once and then remain on This might take up to 10 seconds 4 Release v 5 The message Select language appears on th
266. efore returning online OFF If an error occurs that prevents printing the message remains on the printer control panel display and the printer remains offline until you press Y SeLecT button Control panel menus Item Values Explanation CARTRIDGE STOP Use this item to specify how the printer behaves if the print cartridge is low For the HP LaserJet 4250 Series printer the LOW CONTINUE message first appears when about 1596 10 000 page cartridge or about 896 20 000 page cartridge of the life remains in the print cartridge For the HP LaserJet 4350 Series printer the message first appears when about 25 10 000 page cartridge or about 1596 20 000 page cartridge of the life remains in the print cartridge Print quality is not guaranteed if you print after receiving this message STOP The printer pauses printing until you replace the print cartridge or press Y SeLecT button each time you turn the printer on The message appears until you replace the print cartridge CONTINUE The printer continues to print and the message appears until you replace the print cartridge CARTRIDGE STOP Use this item to specify how the printer reacts if the print cartridge is empty OUT CONTINUE STOP The printer stops printing until you replace the print cartridge CONTINUE The printer continues to print and the REPLACE CARTRIDGE message appears until you replace the print cartridge HP does not guarantee print quality if
267. egularly Replace the affected roller The registration assembly is defective Replace the registration assembly See Registration assembly The cassestte separation claw does not move smoothly oris Replace the side guide plate deformend AALLCLCLECLEAEOELCCS AZ1ZAZAZAZAZAZAZLZLA1AZAZAZAZAZZAZLZAZALZAZAZAZAZAZZAZTAZAZAZAAAXA ZAAZAZAAAZALZAZZZLZZ K k K lL LZ NR 376 7 Troubleshooting Image formation troubleshooting The image formation system is the central hub of the printer During image formation an image is formed with toner and then fused onto the paper The image formation system consists of the following physical components Laser scanner Print cartridge Fuser Transfer roller Supporting circuitry power supply and dc controller PCA Before beginning the image formation troubleshooting check that the media meets the specifications listed in chapter 1 and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide See Supported media weights and sizes and Paper and print media Media related print quality problems Some print quality problems occur when inappropriate media is used Use media that meets HP specifications See the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide The surface of the media is too smooth Use media that meets HP specifications See the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide The printer driver is set incor
268. el n model Availability HP LaserJet 4200n printer Q2426A Configuration 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection HP LaserJet 4200Ln printer Q3994A 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection HP LaserJet 4250n printer Q5401A 64 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network HP LaserJet 4300n printer Q2432A 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection HP LaserJet 4350n printer Q5407A 80 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB One 100 sheet tray and one 500 sheet tray HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network Printer configurations tn model Table 1 3 Printer descriptions tn model tn model Availability Configuration HP LaserJet 4200tn printer Q2427A 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection HP LaserJet 4250tn printer Q5402A 64 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connectin
269. els peeling or adhesive contamination that can severely damage the printer All materials in the laser label stock must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process CAUTION To avoid damaging the printer use only labels that are recommended for use in laser printers To prevent serious jams always use tray 1 to print on labels and always use the rear output bin Do not use the duplexer to print on labels and do not leave the printer default set to duplex on Do not staple labels in the stapler stacker Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once or print on a partial sheet of labels When selecting labels consider the quality of each component m Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at 200 C 392 F the printer fusing temperature m Arrangement Only use labels that have no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams m Curl Before printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm 0 5 inch of curl in any direction m Condition Do not use labels that contain wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation ET NOTE Choose labels in the printer driver Transparencies Use tray 1 to print on overhead transparencies The overhead transparency film must be designed specifically for use with monochrome laser printers Photocopy transparency film might not be compatible with laser printers because of higher
270. embedded Web server contains links that connect you to the Internet You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links If you use a dial up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server you must connect before you can visit these Web sites Connecting to the Internet might require that you close your Web browser and reopen it m HP Instant Support connects to the HP Web site to help you find solutions This service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information that is specific to your printer m Order Supplies connects to the HP Web site so you can order genuine HP supplies such as print cartridges and paper m Product Support connects to the support site for the HP LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 4350 printer where you can search for help regarding general topics Printer Status and Alerts software Printer Status and Alerts is supported only for Windows 95 and later versions The Printer Status and Alerts software is available to users of both networked and directly connected printers To use Printer Status and Alerts software with a directly connected computer you must select the Custom installation option when you install the printer driver and then select the option to install Printer Status and Alerts For network connections Printer Status and Alerts is installed automatically with the Typical software installation option Use this so
271. emove two screws callout 1 Slide the power supply PCA guide callout 2 towards the rear of the printer and remove it we Paper pickup drive assembly 1 of 5 6 Removing and replacing parts 4 Lift up the power switch connector bar callout 3 and swing it away from the paper pickup gear Main assemblies assembly ONSE AN NL ei CL e C a L11023A 100 127V 50Hz EVALUATION Se NOT FOR SALE Canon Inc MADE IN CHINA Figure 6 47 Paper pickup drive assembly 2 of 5 Unplug the solenoid connector from the dc controller PCA location J92 Unweave the solenoid wire harness from the wire guide and the cable clips I Q Hint You might have to remove additional wire harnesses from the wire guide to gain Sr access to the solenoid wire harness 223 224 Remove one e clip callout 4 and the shaft collar callout 5 and then push the tray drive gear shaft callout 6 into the tray 2 cavity E NOTE The large gear inside of the paper pickup drive assembly is not captive and will slide off of the shaft and be loose inside the paper pickup drive assembly see Table 6 2 Tray 2 drive gear and shaft T Figure 6 48 Paper pickup drive assembly 3 of 5 7 Lift the tray drive gear shaft out of the tray 2 cavity 6 Removing and replacing parts 8 Remove four screws callout 7 Reach inside the printer and push the rear tray 2 feed roller up into its raised position see Tray
272. en turned off and then on again since the most recent print job the page will print from tray 2 The printer will continuously print test pages as long as the test page switch is depressed The printer will not print a test page if it is in PowerSave or Sleep mode ET NOTE Adamaged formatter might interfere with the engine test If the engine test page does not print try removing the formatter and performing the engine test again If the engine test is then successful the problem is almost certainly with the formatter the control panel or the cable that connects them 329 330 Formatter test page To verify that the formatter is functioning print a configuration 1 Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus 2 Press Y Down Arrow button to scroll to INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press Y to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION 5 Press v to select PRINT CONFIGURATION 7 Troubleshooting Interface troubleshooting The following sections provide instructions for interface troubleshooting Communications checks ET NOTE Communication problems are normally the customer s responsibility Time spent attempting to resolve these problems might not be covered by the Hewlett Packard product warranty Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems If the printer is not connected directly to a Windows or MS DOS based host see EIO troublesh
273. ens menus gt Back ARROW Backs up one level in the menu tree or backs up one numeric entry Exits menus if held down for more than one second A UP ARROW Navigates to the previous item in the list or increases the value of numerical items Y DowN ARROW Navigates to the next item in the list or decreases the value of numerical items HELP Provides information about the message on the graphical display Using the printer Help system This printer features a Help system at the control panel that provides instructions for resolving most printer errors Some Help topics include animations that appear on the printer control panel display to show you how to resolve an error To view Help for a message if one is available press HELP button If the Help topic is longer than four lines use 4 UP ARRow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll through the entire topic To close the Help system press HELP button again 58 3 Operation Settings and defaults The printer makes most printing decisions based on either temporary settings or permanent defaults ET NOTE Settings that are sent from software programs override printer defaults Table 3 1 Settings and defaults Setting or default Explanation Temporary setting A value that is set in the software program for the current print job For example a request from the software to print three copies instead of the control panel d
274. ent Ground the printer chassis before servicing the product Li ESD CAUTION The yellow and blue heavy gauge wires that are connected to dc controller PCA locations TB85 and TB86 callout 3 are not terminal lug connectors These terminals are soldered to the dc controller PCA Do not attempt to unplug these connectors 2 Unplug all of the wire and cable connectors from the dc controller PCA 6 Removing and replacing parts 3 Unweave the flat cables callout 1 and all other cables callout 2 from the cable guide callout 3 y Inci NE ZENNO zy 5 40 wv v DINN vizo W a Figure 6 54 Dc controller PCA 1 of 5 Reinstallation tip When replacing the cables to the dc controller PCA replace the wire cables first and then replace the flat cables Main assemblies 231 232 Remove the two screws callout 4 that secure the formatter connector bracket to the chassis Unweave the formatter connector wire harness from the cable guides callout 5 ET NOTE You might have to remove additional wire harnesses from the wire guide to gain access to the formatter connector harness Figure 6 55 Dc controller PCA 2 of 5 PAS CAUTION Do not remove the screws callout 6 on the interface connector Aal Figure 6 56 Dc controller PCA 3 of 5 6 Removing and replacing parts 5 Remove the flat cable callout 7 from the flat cable guide callout 8 Figure 6 57 Dc controller PCA 4 of
275. eparation and tray 1 pickup m Tray 1 rollers m Rollers for optional 500 sheet feeders m Rollers for optional 1 500 sheet feeder Installation instructions L ET NOTE The printer maintenance kit components are consumable items that are not typically covered under the original printer warranty or under most extended warranties Resetting the maintenance kit counter LJ 4200 4300 After a maintenance kit is installed the maintenance kit counter must be reset by using the following procedure 1 Turn the printer power off 2 Hold down v Select button and then turn on the printer power Continue holding down until all three printer control panel lights flash once and then remain on This might take up to 10 seconds 3 Press 4 Up Arrow button to scroll to NEW MAINTENANCE KIT 4 Press v toreset the maintenance kit counter ET NOTE Perform this procedure only after a maintenance kit has been installed Do not use this procedure to clear the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message temporarily 4 Maintenance Resetting the maintenance kit counter LJ 4250 4350 After a maintenance kit is installed the maintenance kit counter must be reset by using the following procedure Turn the printer off and then on N When 000MB the beginning of the memory count appears on the control panel display press and hold down v Uc cc button Continue holding down v until all three printer control panel lights flash on
276. er 3 500 sheet feeder pickup roller 4 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 5 500 sheet feeder pickup gear assembly 416 7 Troubleshooting 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs Figure 7 18 Location of the 500 sheet paper feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs 1 500 sheet feeder paper size switch SW801 2 500 sheet feeder control PCA 3 500 sheet feeder paper stack position sensor PS802 4 500 sheet feeder paper pickup solenoid SL801 5 500 sheet feeder paper sensor PS801 Accessory component locations 417 418 1 500 sheet feeder main parts Figure 7 19 Location of the 1 500 sheet paper feeder main parts 1 of 2 1 1 500 sheet feeder lifter drive assembly 2 1 500 sheet feeder pickup gear assembly 7 Troubleshooting c9 e Bw bw L SCH Pia A Figure 7 20 Location of the 1 500 sheet paper feeder main parts 2 of 2 1 1 500 sheet feeder feed roller 2 1 500 sheet feeder pickup roller 3 1 500 sheet feeder separation roller in the door E Accessory component locations 419 420 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs Figure 7 21 Location of the 1 500 sheet switches sensors solenoids and PCAs 1 1 500 sheet feeder paper stack position sensor SR2 2 1 500 sheet feeder paper size sensor SW1 3 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA 4 1 500 sheet fee
277. er A CAUTION Do not expose the print cartridge to bright light or direct sunlight for long periods of time This can damage the cartridge which will result in print quality defects If the cartridge must be removed from the printer for an extended amount of time cover it and keep it out of bright light or direct sunlight M Say KAS ee Es Figure 6 4 Print cartridge 2 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts Transfer roller 1 Open the control panel door and tray 1 CAUTION Do not touch the black rubber on the roller Skin oils on the roller can cause print quality problems The use of disposable gloves is recommended when you remove the transfer roller 2 Useatransfer roller removal hook callout 1 to lift the left end of the metal shaft out of place near the blue gear callout 2 If a removal hook is not available use a flat blade screwdriver Slide the transfer roller to the left to remove it CAUTION Be careful to release and lift the left side of the roller first and then slide the roller out Figure 6 5 Transfer roller D 20 Reinstallation tip When you install the transfer roller make sure that the black collar on er the left side is oriented correctly with the open end face down the solid end is face up User replaceable parts 177 Fuser WARNING The fuser might be very hot After turning off the printer power allow the fuser to cool for at least 30 minutes before removing
278. er Remove and then reinstall the accessory Turn the printer on If the error persists replace the envelope feeder FLASH DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press Y A flash DIMM is installed in one of the formatter slots Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the flash DIMM Press Y Select button to continue If the message persists remove and reinstall the flash DIMM See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only If the message persists replace the flash DIMM See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action FLASH FILE The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an 1 Printing can continue OPERATION FAILED illogical operation for example a command 2 Turn the printer off and then on to to download a file to a non existent delete the message from the display directory alternates with 3 If the message reappears a problem might exist with the software program Ready For menus press Y FLASH FILE The printer received a PJL file system 1 Use HP Web Jetadmin Device Storage command that attempted to store Manager software to delete files from SYSTEM IS FULL something on the file system The attempt the flash memory and then try again was unsuccessful because the file system is full 2 Press Y Sriec
279. er Q2442 67902 Stapler stacker stacker and stapler Stapler unit only RM1 1164 000CN Stapler stacker stacker and stapler Stapler stacker Q2443 67908 Stapler stacker stacker and stapler Stop detent Alphabetical parts list RC1 3303 000CN 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 501 502 Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Support lifter drive assembly Part number RC1 0200 020CN Table and page Internal components 3 of 3 Swing plate assembly RM1 0043 020CN Internal components 2 of 3 Thermistor LJ 4200 4300 RH7 7116 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Thermistor LJ 4250 4350 RK2 0359 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Transfer roller LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0699 020CN Internal components 1 of 3 Transfer roller LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1110 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Tray 1 RM1 0005 020CN Tray 1 pickup assembly Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0004 060CN Tray 1 pickup assembly Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4200 4300 also see Figure 8 12 Tray 1 pickup assembly RM1 0004 060CN Internal components 3 of 3 Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1097 000CN Tray 1 pickup assembly Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 12 Tray 1 pickup assembly RM1 1097 000CN Internal components 3 of 3
280. er components that process and print the image data that the host computer sends Introduction 105 106 Pickup and feed system overview The pickup and feed system consists of a motor various rollers and sensors that detect the presence of media transport the media into and through the printer and deliver the media to an output bin During the transport process if the media does not reach specific sensors in a specified time the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA halts the motor and a jam message appears on the control panel display Laser scanner system overview The laser scanner system forms a latent or potential image on a photosensitive drum according to signals that the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA sends The main components of the laser scanner assembly are the laser driver PCA the scanner motor and a six sided mirror The dc controller PCA sends image data signals to the laser scanner assembly The laser scanner PCA converts these data signals into a laser beam that strikes a six sided mirror The mirror reflects the light onto a photosensitive drum in the print cartridge creating a latent image on the drum Image formation system overview The image formation system uses toner in the print cartridge to transfer the latent image on the the photosensitive drum to the media Heat and pressure from the fuser are used to permanently bond the toner image to the media The photosensitive drum in
281. er size to the media size that is in tray 1 If the media being used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal size the tray switch should be set to standard Set the tray switch to custom for all other media sizes The custom size switch must be set before the size can be selected at the control panel Print a configuration page and verify that the tray size settings match the actual tray settings If the settings do not match verify that the tray size sensors are correctly functioning If they are not replace the media size sensors SW102 SW801 or SW1 See Printer switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs Verify that the sensor fingers inside the tray are engaging the tray sensor correctly See Tray 2 500 sheet feeder and 1 500 sheet feeder media size detection Replace the indicated feeder control PCA For the 500 sheet feeder see 500 sheet feeder control PCA For the 1 500 sheet feeder see 1 500 sheet feeder control PCA Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Standard output bin full Remove all paper from bin Display message troubleshooting The top standard output bin is full and must be emptied Empty the top output bin If the error persists verify that the output bin sensor PS104 is operating and that the sensor arm can freely move See Printer sw
282. er to each font FONT POINT SIZE and lists the numbers on the PCL Font List The range is 0 HP LaserJet 4250 4350 to 999 only FONT PITCH Use this option to select the font pitch This SYMBOL SET item might not appear depending on the font selected The range is 0 44 to 99 99 APPEND CR TO LF FONT POINT SIZE Use this option to select the font point SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES size This appears only if a font with a scalable point size is selected as the default font The range is 4 00 to 999 75 MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING SYMBOL SET Use this option to select any one of several available symbol sets at the printer control panel A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font PC 8 or PC 850 is recommended for line draw characters APPEND CR TO LF Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed encountered in backward compatible PCL jobs pure text no job control Some environments such as UNIX indicate a new line by using only the line feed control code Use this option to append the required carriage return to each line feed SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES When generating your own PCL extra form feeds are included that would cause a blank page s to be printed Select YES for form feeds to be ignored if the page is blank MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING Use this element to select between classic or standard media source mapping 3 Operation Print quality submenu Some items on this menu are available in the program or
283. ers These accessories are discussed later in this chapter The tray 1 paper sensor on the tray 1 pickup assembly PS105 detects media in tray 1 The tray 2 paper sensor PS101 detects media in tray 2 The paper size sensor PS106 and the paper size switch SW102 detect the media that is loaded in the tray 2 cassette Two motors a clutch and a solenoid that are controlled by the dc controller PCA drive all of the rollers in the HP LaserJet 4200 Series printers The HP LaserJet 4250 4300 and 4350 Series printers use three motors a clutch and a solenoid See Motor and fan control The pre feed top of page and fuser assembly delivery sensors PS102 PS103 PS108 detect media arriving and passing along the paper path If the media does not reach or pass these sensors within a specific amount of time the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA halts the printer functions and a jam error message appears on the control panel display See Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages For information about the location of printer switches sensors and motors see Printer switches and sensors and Printer motors and fans 5 Theory of operation Dc controller PCA E wn o onja m 2 e 4 aA o ala E z z zizioz s S z z oz Os 29 0 00 050 S o n 7 lo EIS SI J EIJE 3 L a DI za ELA S 25 w oi l9i O ra SiS w o i A
284. erval occurred Cleaning spilled toner Defective or worn print cartridges can develop leaks Also after a jam has occurred some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer The pages that print immediately after the jam might pick up this toner Clean spilled toner with a cloth that has been dampened with cold water Do not touch the transfer roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers Do not use a vacuum cleaner unless it is equipped with a micro fine particle filter Cleaning the printer and accessories 85 Performing preventive maintenance 86 Replace specific parts when the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message appears on the printer control panel display This helps the printer maintain optimum performance The maintenance message appears every 200 000 pages on HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers or every 225 000 pages on HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers The message can be temporarily cleared for approximately 10 000 pages by using the CLEAR MAINTENANCE MESSAGE item on the Resets submenu see Control panel menus To check the number of pages that the printer has printed since new maintenance kit components were installed print either a configuration page see Configuration page or a supplies status page see Supplies status page To order the printer maintenance kit see Parts and diagrams The kit includes the following components m Fuser m Printer rollers transfer feed and s
285. ess weight Ib m mm 16 41 22 27 33 37 60 17 43 24 29 35 39 64 20 50 28 34 42 46 75 21 54 30 36 44 49 80 24 60 33 41 50 55 90 27 68 37 45 55 61 100 28 70 39 49 58 65 105 29 74 41 50 61 68 110 32 80 44 55 67 74 120 36 90 50 62 75 83 135 0 18 39 100 55 67 82 91 148 40 101 55 68 83 92 150 0 20 43 110 60 74 90 100 163 45 115 63 77 94 104 170 0 23 47 119 65 80 97 108 176 51 128 70 86 105 117 190 53 134 74 90 110 122 200 54 137 75 93 113 125 203 58 146 80 98 120 133 216 65 165 90 111 135 150 244 66 169 92 114 138 154 250 67 171 94 115 140 155 253 70 178 98 120 146 162 264 72 183 100 123 150 166 271 U S postcard measurements are approximate Use for reference only Text and book grades actually calculate out to 51 61 71 and 81 but are standardized to book text weights of 50 60 70 and 80 Standard weight for the grade Moa w Media specifications 33 34 Envelopes If you do not have an optional envelope feeder always print on envelopes from tray 1 If envelopes curl or jam try opening the rear output bin A CAUTION Do not use the duplexer to print on envelopes Damage to the printer might result Do not send envelopes to the stacker or stapler stacker Damage to the stacker or stapler stacker might result Envelope construction Envelope construction is critical Envelope fold lines can vary considerably not only between manufacturers but also with
286. et feeder assembly 500 sheet feed rollers E NOTE The removal procedure for the two feed rollers in the 500 sheet feeder is the same as the procedure for the tray 2 feed rollers See Tray 2 feed rollers 500 sheet feeder right side cover 1 Remove two screws callout 1 and the front cover callout 2 Figure 6 99 500 sheet feeder right side cover 1 of 5 278 6 Removing and replacing parts Accessories Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the right side cover front locking tab 500 sheet feeder right side cover 2 of 5 Depress the edge of the cover and release the three center locking tabs 500 sheet feeder right side cover 3 of 5 279 280 Use flat blade screwdriver to release the rear locking tab 500 sheet feeder right side cover 4 of 5 Rotate the top of the cover away from the tray assembly and lift it up to remove it 500 sheet feeder right side cover 5 of 5 7 6 Removing and replacing parts 500 sheet feeder control PCA CAUTION The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Always perform service work at an ESD protected workstation If an ESD protected workstation is not available discharge body static by grasping the 500 sheet feeder chassis before touching an ESD sensitive component Ground the 500 sheet feeder chassis before servicing the product Li ESD ch Remove the 500 sheet feeder right side cover See 500 sh
287. f a ON duplexer is installed run the cleaning page manually See CLEANING CREATE CLEANING PAGE below and Cleaning the fuser CLEANING 1000 If auto cleaning is on set how often it runs The intervals correspond to the number of pages that the printer has INTERVAL HP LaserJet 2000 printed This setting is unavailable if an optional duplexer is 4250 4350 only installed 5000 10000 20000 AUTO LETTER If auto cleaning is on set the size of paper that the printer should use when it is cleaning the printer automatically This CLEANING SIZE A4 setting is unavailable if an optional duplexer is installed HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only CREATE CLEANING PAGE HP LaserJet 4200 4300 only There is no value to select Press Y Select button to print a cleaning page manually for cleaning toner from the fuser Open the rear output bin Follow the instructions on the cleaning page For more information see Cleaning the fuser PROCESS CLEANING PAGE HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only There is no value to select Press Y Select button to print a cleaning page manually for cleaning toner from the fuser The cleaning process might take up to 2 5 minutes Control panel menus System Setup submenu Items on this menu affect printer behavior Configure the printer according to your printing needs The section that follows lists the settings and possible values In the Values column the default value for each setting is the one
288. f the print cartridge appears to be an authentic HP cartridge try installing another HP print cartridge that has the same shipment lot number If this clears the error message return the print cartridge that you removed to the supplier and report that it is defective If the error message persists the print cartridge might be a fraudulent cartridge If the error message persists the memory chip on the print cartridge or the connector location J600 might be defective The dc controller PCA might be defective Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action NOTE Printer repairs that are required as a result of using non HP print cartridges are not covered under the HP warranty OUTPUT BIN 1 FULL Remove all paper from bin NOTE The stacker or stapler stacker LED blinks in amber The stacker or stapler stacker output bin is full and must be emptied in order to continue printing 1 Remove the media from the output bin 2 If the error persists verify that the output bin flapper the four plastic paddles hanging down in front of the output bin rollers can move freely 3 Replace the stacker or stapler stacker OUTPUT PAPER PATH OPEN NOTE The stacker or stapler stacker LED blinks in amber The jam access door or the staple cartridge door is open 1
289. features 14 operating systems supported 13 PCL font list printing 63 PCL setting as printer language 75 PDEs Macintosh 17 perform printer maintenance message 78 86 personalities configuration page 312 settings 75 phone numbers 424 HP authorized resellers and support 445 service agreements 445 supplies ordering 446 photosensitive drum image formation operations 106 153 troubleshooting 380 physical specifications 18 52 pickup roller replacing tray 1 179 pickup and feed system operations 1 500 sheet tray 128 500 sheet feeder 125 about 106 114 duplexer 134 envelope feeder 132 fuser delivery block 122 jam detection duplexer 136 jam detection envelope feeder 133 jam detection stacker 141 jam detection stapler stacker 152 jam detection trays 122 multiple feed prevention 121 skew prevention 121 stacker 137 stapler stacker 142 tray 1 117 tray 2 119 PINs Service menu 323 PJL printer job language 164 platforms supported 12 13 PML printer management language 165 ports cables 452 locating 11 operations 162 troubleshooting 331 postcards 26 PostScript error pages 70 PostScript Printer Description PPD files 17 PostScript setting as printer language 75 power specifications 20 troubleshooting 306 power supply Index locating 415 operations 105 110 part numbers 453 removing 236 power switch locating 9 power on bypass 328 PowerSave See Sleep mode PPDs included 17 preprinted paper fuser m
290. feed belt is cut or sagged If the duplexing unit feed belt is cut or sagging replace the belt The duplex sensors are defective Replace the duplexer Foreign materials or burrs are present on the reversing or feed guide If foreign materials are present on the reversing or feed guide remove them Replace the guide if it has burrs The dc controller PCA is defective Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 7 Troubleshooting Media transport problems If media is feeding incorrectly use the information in this section to identify and resolve the problem Multiple pages feed Table 7 14 Causes for multiple pages feeding Cause Solution The tray 1 separation pad is worn Replace the separation pad assembly Too much media particularly envelopes is loaded in tray 1 Remove some of the media and resend the print job The separation rollers in the tray are worn or damaged Replace the rollers See Tray 2 feed rollers for tray 2 500 sheet feed rollers for a 500 sheet feeder or 1 500 sheet feeder feed rollers for a 1 500 sheet feeder The media edges are locked together Flex the media stack before loading it into the printer Do not fan the media The cassette claw is deformed Replace the cassette claw The torque limiter is defective Replace the torque limiter The spring that pushes the separation roller or pad is defective Replace the
291. fic to transparencies Also because transparencies are pliable they can be affected by the media handling components in the paper path ET NOTE Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them m Onthe printer driver Paper tab select Transparency as the media type Also make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies m Make sure that the transparencies meet the specifications for this monochrome laserjet printer For more information consult the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide m Handle transparencies by the edges Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots and smudges m Small random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin Try printing the job in smaller batches m To show the printed transparency use a standard overhead projector instead of a reflective overhead projector Print quality problems that are related to the environment m The printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions Verify that the printing environment is within specifications See Operating environment Print quality problems that are related to jams m Make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path m If the printer recently jammed print two or three pages to clean the printer m Repeated jams might require that you use the printer cleaning procedures in chapter 3 It might be n
292. fications 20 settings 75 smeared toner 389 software installing 54 Linux 13 Macintosh 17 Macintosh included 17 18 52 operating systems supported 12 solenoids 1 500 sheet tray 420 500 sheet feeder 417 removing 274 stacker and stapler stacker stacker operations 137 tray 2 operations 119 space requirements 18 52 special media envelopes 34 labels 36 transparencies 36 specifications 1 500 sheet tray 28 accessories 19 acoustic emissions 22 card stock 37 electrical 20 envelope feeder 28 envelopes 34 environmental 52 labels 36 media 25 operating environment 24 paper 30 physical 18 speed 24 transparencies 36 trays media supported 26 specks troubleshooting 385 speed data transmission settings 77 resolution settings 72 specifications 24 stacker component errors 407 component locations 422 feeding operations 137 jams 404 malfunction errors 406 models including 6 paper path 403 paper specifications 29 paper transport errors 406 troubleshooting 402 wiring diagram 434 stand unlocking 172 staple cartridges 423 Index level detection operations 151 loading 90 part numbers 447 stapler unit life expectancy 88 locating 421 operations 148 replacing 89 stapler stacker component errors 407 component locations 422 jams 404 loading staples 90 malfunction errors 406 models including 7 operations 142 paper path 403 404 paper specifications 29 paper path test 80 paper transport errors 406 replacing stapler un
293. figuration page 331 models including 2 part numbers 452 settings 78 jobs retention 74 Retrieve Job menu 62 K keys control panel 56 58 kit printer maintenance message clearing 78 replacing 86 supplies status page 314 L labels fuser modes 71 specifications 36 language control panel languages printer configuration page 312 settings 75 laser safety statements 49 laser scanner locating 409 operations 106 112 part numbers 453 removing 219 LaserJet Utility Macintosh 17 98 left side cover removing 197 letter paper override A4 settings 69 letterhead fuser modes 71 specifications 32 life expectancies parts 88 lifter drive assembly 500 sheet feeder removing 282 locating 409 operations 120 removing tray 2 227 light print setting toner density 73 troubleshooting 383 lights control panel locating 56 line feed settings 70 59 76 lines troubleshooting 72 387 394 396 397 Linux driver support 13 loose toner 389 low toner 76 LPR command firmware updates 99 M Macintosh AppleTalk settings 78 downloading firmware 91 drivers supported 13 FTP firmware updates 93 HP LaserJet Utility 17 98 operating systems supported 12 PPDs 17 software included 17 main cooling fan removing 246 main drive assembly locating 409 part numbers 476 removing 263 maintenance kit contents 86 message clearing 78 replacing 86 supplies status page 314 manual feed 69 74 map menu 60 311 margins envelopes 35 regi
294. figure and set the printer for Internet protocol IP printing ET NOTE The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X but the utility is supported for the Classic environment Software components 17 Specifications 18 Hardware specifications Table 1 7 Product dimensions Printer model Width Depth Height Weight HP LaserJet 4200 4200n 4200L 418 mm 451 mm 366 mm 20 kg 45 Ib 4200L n 4300 and 4300n 16 5 inches 17 8 inches 14 4 inches HP LaserJet 4250 4250n 4350 and 418 mm 451 mm 377 mm 20 kg 45 Ib 4350n 16 5 inches 17 8 inches 14 8 inches HP LaserJet 4200tn and 4300tn 418 mm 451 mm 488 mm 27 kg 60 Ib 16 5 inches 17 8 inches 19 2 inches HP LaserJet 4200dtn and 4300dtn 418 mm 533 mm 488 mm 30 kg 65 Ib 16 5 inches 21 0 inches 19 2 inches HP LaserJet 4250tn and 4350tn 418 mm 451 mm 498 mm 27 kg 60 Ib 16 5 inches 17 8 inches 19 6 inches HP LaserJet 4250dtn and 4350dtn 418 mm 533 mm 498 mm 30 kg 65 Ib 16 5 inches 21 0 inches 19 6 inches HP LaserJet 4200dtns and 4300dtns 418 mm 533 mm 680 mm 33 kg 73 Ib 16 5 inches 21 0 inches 26 8 inches HP LaserJet 4200dtnsl and 4300Gdtnsl 418 mm 533 mm 740 mm 34 kg 76 Ib 16 5 inches 21 0 inches 29 1 inches HP LaserJet 4250dtnsl and 4350dtnsl 418 mm 533 mm 740 mm 34 kg 74 Ib 1 Without print cartridge 16 5 inches 21 0 inches Table 1 8 Product dimensions with all doors
295. for the best performance If data from other ports appear in the middle of your print job increase the timeout value PARALLEL HIGH SPEED Use this item to configure the parallel features INPUT ADVANCED FUNCTIONS HIGH SPEED Select YES to enable the printer to accept the faster parallel communications that are used for connections with newer computers Control panel menus 77 Item Values Explanation ADVANCED FUNCTIONS Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port IEEE 1284 The function allows the printer to send status readback messages to the computer Turning the parallel advanced functions on might slow language switching EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only TCP IP IPX SPX APPLETALK DLC LLC SECURE WEB HP LaserJet 4250 and 4350 only DIAGNOSTICS HP LaserJet 4250 and 4350 only Use this item to select features in the embedded Jetdirect TCP IP Select whether the TCP IP protocol stack is enabled or disabled You can set several TCP IP parameters Select the TCP IP CONFIGURE METHOD to configure the EIO card For the MANUAL option set the values for IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK LOCAL GATEWAY and DEFAULT GATEWAY IPX SPX Select whether the IPX SPX protocol stack in Novell NetWare networks for example is enabled or disabled APPLETALK Enable or disable an AppleTalk network DLC LLC Select whether t
296. ftware to view the embedded Web server information for a particular printer Printer Status and Alerts also generates messages on the computer that explain the status of the printer and print jobs Depending on how the printer is connected you can receive different messages m Networked printers You can receive regular job status messages that appear every time a print job is sent to the printer or every time the print job is complete You can also receive alert messages These messages appear when you are printing to a particular printer if that printer experiences a problem In some cases the printer can continue to print such as when a tray that is not being used is open or a print cartridge is low In other cases a problem might prevent the printer from printing such as when paper is out or a print cartridge is empty m Directly connected printers You can receive alert messages that appear when the printer experiences a problem but can continue printing or a problem that prevents it from printing You can also receive messages that indicate that the print cartridge is low You can set alert options for a single printer that supports Printer Status and Alerts or you can set alert options for all printers that support Printer Status and Alerts For networked printers these alerts only appear for your jobs Even if you set alert options for all printers not all of the selected options will apply to all printers For example when you sel
297. g 63 initialization 327 operations 163 skip disk load 328 heavy paper fuser modes 71 specifications 37 held jobs Retrieve Job control panel menu 62 settings 74 help control panel 58 drivers 14 HP Customer Care Online 444 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 331 models including 2 part numbers 452 settings 78 HP LaserJet Utility Macintosh 17 98 HP OpenVMS drivers 14 HP Partner Portal 445 515 HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program 45 HP Technical Training 444 HP Web JetAdmin firmware updates 100 HP authorized resellers and support 445 humidity specifications paper storing 30 printer requirements 24 l I O menu 77 IBM OS 2 drivers 14 image quality See print quality image formation operations 106 image formation system operations 153 Information menu 63 information pages 310 input trays See trays input output operations installing printer 52 interface ports See ports internal components 462 IPX SPX settings 78 162 J jams 1 500 sheet tray 373 500 sheet feeder 373 avoiding 367 detection operations duplexer 136 detection operations stacker 141 detection operations stapler stacker 152 detection operations trays 122 duplexer 374 envelope feeder locations 365 paper path 374 persistent 368 print quality 378 recovery setting 76 366 133 stacker or stapler stacker 404 tray 1 371 tray 2 372 JetAdmin firmware updates 100 516 Jetdirect print server con
298. g to a 10 100Base TX network HP LaserJet 4300tn printer Q2433A 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection HP LaserJet 4350tn printer Q5408A 80 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network 1 Product information dtn model Table 1 4 Printer descriptions dtn model dtn model Availability Configuration HP LaserJet 4200dtn 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB printer Q2428A xm One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays m HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection x Duplexer for automatic two sided printing HP LaserJet 4250dtn 80 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB printer Q5403A m One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays m HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network x Duplexer for automatic two sided printing HP LaserJet 4300dtn 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB printer Q2434A m One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays m HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server for network connection x Duplexer for automatic two sided printing HP LaserJet 4350dtn 96 MB RAM expandable to 512 MB printer Q5409A m One 100 sheet tray and two 500 sheet trays m HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10 100Base TX network x Duplexer for automatic
299. ge defects Aa Ce AaBbCc AaBb EN z D Aa Ce AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbGE Aa Ce AaBbC AaBbCc AaBbCE Aa Ce AaBbCc AaBbCc AiaBoCe Aa Ce j AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbGc jaBb COE See Table 7 20 Light See Table 7 21 Light See Table 7 22 See Table 7 22 print partial page print entire page Specks or dots Specks or dots cao Told Specks or dots AaBbc c AdBbco AaBbCc AabBbcc Ac BCO AaBbCc AaBbbCc AdBbcG AaRbhCo AaBbCc Acd BDC O a C AaB Cc AdBbcq AaBbCc See Table 7 23 Drop SeeTable7 23Drop See Table 7 23Drop SeeTable7 24lines 50 lable 7 24 Lines outs and character outs and character outs and character voids voids voids AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AO Ge AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBk Cc A AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBtb Cc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc See Table 7 25 Grey See Table 7 26 Loose See Table 7 26 Loose See Table 7 27 See Table 7 27 background toner or toner smear toner or toner smear Repeating defects Repeating defects and repeating images and repeating images AaBbCc Jo r Ge AaBbCc aBpc AaBbCc AQB b c AGBbcc A Ce AaBbCc AGBDCG AaBbCc DC EE See Table 7 28 See Table 7 29 Skew See Table 7 30 Curl See Table 7 31 See Table 7 32 White Distorted images or wave Creases lines 382 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 19 Print
300. ght and thickness as well as the environmental conditions 3 Allsizes can be stacked but only letter legal and A4 can be stapled Media specifications Paper and print media Category Specifications Acid content 5 5 pH to 8 0 pH Caliper 0 094 to 0 18 mm 3 0 to 7 0 mils Curl in ream Flat within 5 mm 0 02 inch Cut edge conditions Cut with sharp blades leaving no visible fray Fusing compatibility Must not scorch melt offset or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200 C 392 F for 0 1 second Grain Long grain Moisture content 4 to 6 by weight Smoothness 100 to 250 Sheffield For complete print media specifications for all HP LaserJet printers see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide To download the guide in PDF format go to www hp com support lipaperguide Printing and storage environment Ideally the printing and paper storage environment should be at or near room temperature and not too dry or too humid Remember that paper is hygroscopic it absorbs and loses moisture rapidly Heat works with humidity to damage paper Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate while cold causes it to condense on the sheets Heating systems and air conditioners remove most of the humidity from a room As paper is opened and used it loses moisture causing streaks and smudging Humid weather or water coolers can cause the humidity to increase in a room As paper is opened and us
301. gnal indicating that the job contains another page the stacker driver PCA again activates the deflector solenoid SL101 The delivery rollers move the media to the delivery bin Stacker and stapler stacker 151 152 Stapler stacker jam detection The following sensors detect the presence of media in the stapler stacker and determine whether the media is feeding correctly or jamming For information about the location of these sensors see Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors m Paper inlet sensor PS1101 m Paper delivery sensor PS102 Stapler stacker feed jam If the paper inlet sensor PS1101 does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specified period of time after the stacker driver has received the paper delivery signal the dc controller PCA determines that a stapler stacker feed delay jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages Stapler stacker feed stationary jam If the paper inlet sensor PS1101 does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specified period of time after the paper inlet sensor PS1101 detected the leading edge of the media the dc controller PCA determines that a stapler stacker feed delay jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel displ
302. has occurred 1 Turn the printer off and then on PRINTER ERROR 2 If the message persists replace the formatter assembly See Formatter For help press assembly alternates with 64 PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 66 00 15 The stacker or stapler stacker was removed 1 Turn the printer power off and then replaced while the printer power EXTERNAL DEVICE FAILURE was on 2 Verify that the stacker or stapler stacker is installed correctly NOTE The stacker or stapler stacker LED is off 3 Turn the printer power on 66 12 XX A stacker or stapler stacker error has 1 Press ier button for detailed occurred information output device failure a em 2 Press A Ur Arrow button and Y For help press ial alata Down Arrow button to step through the instructions NOTE The stacker or stapler stacker LED 01 output lift roller or paddle motor error is continuously illuminated in amber 02 jogger motor error 3 Turn the power off 03 staplermotor eror 4 Verify that the stapler stacker is P installed correctly and that its electrical connector is seated in the connector on the printer 5 Turn the power on 6 If the error 66 12 03 persists replace the stapler unit See To remove and replace the stapler unit 7 If other errors messages persist replace the stacker or stapler stacker 68 X One or more printer settings that were 1 Press Y Scziecr button to continue saved in the nonvolatile storage device are PERMANENT STORAGE ERRO
303. he DLC LLC protocol stack is enabled or disabled SECURE WEB Specify whether the embedded Web server accepts communications by using only secure HTTP HTTPS or by using both HTTP and HTTPS DIAGNOSTICS Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP IP network connection problems Resets submenu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only Items on the Resets submenu relate to returning settings to the defaults and changing settings such as Sleep Mode The section that follows lists the settings and possible values In the Values column the default value for each setting is the one that has an asterisk next to it Item Values Explanation RESTORE There is no value to select Use this item to perform a simple reset and restore most of the factory default settings This item also clears the input FACTORY buffer for the active I O SETTINGS CAUTION Restoring memory during a print job cancels the print job CLEAR There is no value to select This item appears after the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE message can be temporarily cleared for approximately 10 000 pages and then the message MESSAGE appears again When the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message first appears a new maintenance 3 Operation kit should be installed to maintain optimum print quality and feed performance For more information see Performing preventive maintenance To order the p
304. he Help button the F1 button on the computer keyboard or a question mark symbol in the upper right corner of the printer driver depending on the Windows operating system that you are using You can also open printer driver Help by right clicking any item in the driver and then clicking What s This These Help screens give detailed information about the specific driver Printer driver Help is separate from software program Help 1 Product information Using the printer drivers Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from the computer Operating System Windows 98 NT 4 0 and Me To change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed On the File menu in the software program click Print Select the printer and then click Properties The steps can vary this procedure is the most common To change the print job default settings for example to turn on Print on Both Sides by default Click Start click Settings and then click Printers Right click the printer icon and then select Properties Windows 98 and Me or Document Defaults Windows NT 4 0 To change the configuration settings for example to add a physical option such as a tray or to enable or disable a driver feature such as Allow Manual Duplexing Click Start click Settings and then click Printers Right click the printer icon and then select Properties Click the Configure tab Windows
305. he is empty 6 Replace the dc controller PCA See but the paper out sensing De controller PCA mechanism for that tray has failed ee and the printer senses that the tray appears to be loaded 13 02 00 or 13 05 00 or 13 20 00 or A jam exists in the top cover area 1 Press Her button for detailed 13 21 00JAM IN TOP information about clearing the jam A 13 02 00 error message indicates that the COVER AREA media did not pass the top of page 2 Press A Up Arrow button and Y sensor PS103 within the specified time Down Arrow button to step through For help press i i A 13 05 00 error message indicates that the LE media did not arrive at the fuser delivery 3 Check the pre feed top of page and sensor PS108 within the specified time fuser assembly sensors PS102 PS103 and PS 108 and verify that th A 13 20 00 error message indicates that the diio dus move 2 one See printer power was turned on or that the switches and sensors y e printer attempted to initialize while the pre feed sensor PS102 the top of page 4 Ifthe paper feed assembly has been sensor PS103 or the fuser delivery replaced verify that the pre feed sensor PS108 was detecting media sensor PS102 is installed correctly A 13 21 00 error message indicates that the See See assembly top cover open switch SW101 was 5 Replace the top of page activated while a print job was printing the sensor PS103 See Printer switches top cover was opened or the switch is and se
306. he paper feeder status to the dc controller PCA The printer delivers a charge of 24 Vdc to the 1 500 sheet feeder which then generates 3 3 V for the integrated circuits Printer 1500 sheet feeder driver PCA pe ee erin E 5V 24V Regulator I 1C1005 E Reset IC 1C1004 RESET _ CPU 1C1003 Pickup solenoid Lifter motor Sensors Switches POT Figure 5 12 1 500 sheet feeder I O block diagram 5 Theory of operation Paper pickup and feed system 1 500 sheet feeder pickup and feeding Three switches on the paper feeder driver detect the media size and the presence of the 1 500 sheet tray The relationship between the switch combinations and the paper sizes is the same as for the printer The main motor M101 drives the paper feeder When the dc controller PCA sends a print command the main motor begins to rotate When the scanner motor reaches its prescribed speed the paper feeder driver receives the pickup command from the dc controller PCA and activates the paper pick up solenoid The main motor drives the pick up roller feed roller and separation roller The pick up roller when the solenoid activates it rotates once and picks up the media in the tray The separation roller removes any additional sheets and the media travels to the pre feed sensor PS102 The sheet then reaches the registration assem
307. he power is turned on when loose screws are inside the printer 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door Top cover See Top cover 2 Place the top cover upside down on a padded work surface Control panel display 205 206 Remove four screws callout 1 and then lift the control panel cover callout 2 out of the top cover ET NOTE Some models have six screws Figure 6 33 Control panel assembly 1 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts 4 Remove the grounding strip screw callout 3 and the spacer callout 4 RG1 427 TY pere A EX LL Ke Annee H Figure 6 34 Control panel assembly 2 of 2 Control panel display 207 208 5 sil D Unplug the control panel wire harness callout 5 gently pry the front of the print cartridge door away from the control panel display to release the retainer clip and then lift the control panel callout 6 out of the top cover TJ Aaa I is placed in the cable guide under the grounding strip Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the control panel display verify that the wire harness Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the grounding strip callout 5 do not forget to replace the protective clip If the grounding strip is installed without the clip tightening the screw will damage the grounding strip 6 Removing and replacing parts Main assemblies The foll
308. he print cartridge Recommended action s 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media for type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The operating environment does not meet specifications Make sure that the printer is installed in an area that meets the environmental specifications See Operating environment The print cartridge is defective Replace the print cartridge 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 35 Scattered lines Possible cause Recommended action s The media does not meet specifications or is not stored correctly 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media for type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The operating environment does not meet specifications The toner density setting is incorrect The high transfer setting is turned off Make sure that the printer is installed in an area that meets the environmental specifications See Operating environment Open the print quality menu at the control panel and adjust the toner density setting See Print quality submenu
309. he product to make it operate in a country region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement 39 40 TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU 1 Product information Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement This HP Print Cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship This warranty does not apply to print cartridges that a have been refilled refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please
310. he upgrade At the command prompt type the word bye to exit the FTP command At the command prompt type the word exit to return to the Windows interface 4 Maintenance Mac operating systems 1 Downloading a remote firmware update Take note of the TCP IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout Open a Terminal window on the Macintosh You can find the Terminal Program on the computer hard drive in the Applications Utilities folder Type FTP TCP IP PRINTER ADDRESS For example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type FTP 192 168 0 90 Press Enter When prompted for a user name and password press Enter Type put path where path is the location where the RFU file was downloaded from the Web including the path For example type put C LJ 4250FW RFU and then press Enter ET NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type put c My Documents LJFW RFU NOTE To ensure that the entire proper path to the RFU file is placed in the Put command type the word put type a space and then click and drag the RFU file on to the Terminal window The complete path to the file will be automatically placed after the Put command The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer This can take about five minutes Let the process finish witho
311. hp LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 4350 series printers HP LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 and 4350 Series printers Service Manual invent Copyright and License 2004 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company LP Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Part number Q5400 90932 Edition 1 11 2004 Trademark Credits Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Corel is a trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited Energy Star and the Energy Star logo are US registered marks of the United States Environmental Protection Agency Linux is a U S registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Unix is a registered trademark of The Open Group Table of contents 1 Product information Chapter Content m 1 Printer configurations nuce teu ta ev deus Sana e ka e ERE NERA ER evade edna 2 Ba
312. iagram sse ene 439 HP LaserJet 4300 general timing diagram sse 440 HP LaserJet 4350 general timing dagoram eene 441 Stapler stacker timing dagoram nennen 442 8 Parts and diagrams Xii Chapter contents rere rere deeg A e a e d EL RE Ll neve BE ed er ee de ERR a ERR NR Fes 443 Ordering parts and supplies eiie ete rer ea REDE XT RR D ERE ARS an RUN RN Rd Se 444 ccm M M a aE E 444 Related documentation and software 444 HP authorized resellers and support 445 FIP service EE 445 HP Partner Portal tene rers ees 445 SiOrcq S 446 Consumables and accessories 0ccccccceeceeeeeecceaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaecaeeeseeeeeescaaaaaeseeeeeeeesessecsncaeeaeeeeeess 447 Consumables erre eese estet cae accede ee Meee e deed s 447 ee 448 Memory fonts and mass storage ssssssssssssssssmeeeenen enne nennen 450 Cables and connectivity ierit oit dena E De ded e pe arde dn dle ete dedo pide dnd 452 Formatters laser scanners power supplies and user 453 Assembly locations 1 Of et I tiet ete DER RO e eae Hte i d RE Ede neue dde 454 Assembly locations 2 0f 3 paene eter ebd eed nee Ree abren oe E Re dats 455 Assembly locations S Of EE 456 ur p E RR DUEMERMEEE 458 eyTnsr eontere Mace ET
313. ide cover Output delivery assembly Duplexing pendulum assembly Main cooling fan left side Power supply Be Paper feed assembly Tray 1 pickup assembly E NOTE The formatter assembly and fuser are only listed once but they must be removed before you can gain access to some of the other components Removal and replacement strategy 171 172 Printer input tray and cabinet wheel locks When the printer and input trays are placed on the cabinet stand the printer and trays must be locked together to prevent them from tipping over This is not necessary but it is recommended if the printer and trays are placed on a level work surface When servicing the printer and accessories unlatch the locking mechanism and separate the printer and its accessory components The cabinet stand includes locks for the wheels at its base Make sure that the wheels are locked when the printer is in place The wheels should be unlocked only when the printer is being moved Figure 6 1 Location of printer input trays and cabinet wheel locks 6 Removing and replacing parts Dc controller PCA diagram You must disconnect wires or cables from the dc controller PCA before you can remove or replace many of the printer components Use the following diagram to assist with disconnecting the cables and wires from the dc controller PCA Removal and replacement strategy 173 2 Se DUE J80 Figure 6 2 Connector locations
314. ide of the page printed on first u ls long grain paper being used Input trays m Is the correct amount of media loaded in the tray not stacked above the arrows embossed in the tray als the media placed in the tray correctly m Are the paper guides aligned with the stack np Is the tray cassette installed correctly in the printer Print cartridge m Is the print cartridge installed correctly Fuser a Is the fuser installed correctly See Fuser Covers m ls the top cover closed Condensation m Does condensation occur following a temperature change particularly in winter following cold storage If so wipe off the affected parts or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes and then attempt to resume printing m Was a print cartridge opened soon after it was moved from a cold room to a warm one If so allow the print cartridge and the printer to acclimate to room temperature for one to two hours Miscellaneous m Areany non HP components installed Check for any non HP components print cartridges memory modules and EIO cards installed in the printer and remove them Hewlett Packard recommends the use of HP components in its printers m Remove the printer from the network and make sure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting 304 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting flowchart The flowchart highlights the general processes that you can use to isolate and solve pri
315. ides useful accounting information for example the number of pages of various paper Sizes that have been used and data that can be used to calculate toner usage e PCL font list This page lists the PCL fonts that are installed in the printer memory This page also lists fonts on an optional hard disk accessory or flash DIMM if those memory accessories are installed e PS font list This page lists the PS fonts that are installed in the printer memory This page also lists fonts on an optional hard disk accessory or flash DIMM if those memory accessories are installed 7 Troubleshooting Menu map Use the menu map to help navigate the printer submenus and select configuration settings Printing a menu map is very helpful when you are changing numerous printer settings 1 Press v Sg scr button or the Menu button to open the menus 2 Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down ARROw button to scroll to INFORMATION and then press L 3 Use 4 or Y to scroll to MENU MAP and then press v hp LaserJet 4300 printers UJ menu map common functions 1 g RETRIEVE JOB INFORMATION g PAPER HANDLING NO STORED JOBS PRINT MENU MAP TRAY 1 SIZE ANY PRINT CONFIGURATION TRAY 1 TYPE ANY PRINT SUPPLIES S TRAY 2 SIZE LETTER PRINT FILE DIREC TRAY 2 TYPE PLAIN PRINT PCL FONT LIST PRINT PS FONT LIST
316. ielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules Regulatory information 43 44 Environmental product stewardship program This section explains HP s environmental stewardship initiatives Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas 03 Energy consumption Power usage drops significantly while in PowerSave mode which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR Printers Version 3 0 which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy efficient office products CG ENERGY STAR is a U S registered service mark owned by the U S government As an ENERGY STAR partner Hewlett Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency For more information see http www energystar gov Toner consumption EconoMode uses significantly less toner which might extend the life of the print cartridge Paper use This product s automatic duplex feature two sided printing and n up printing multiple pages printed on one page capabilities can reduce media usage and the resulting demands on natu
317. ile an auto continuable error message appears on the control S panel display overrides the auto continue feature and the button function takes precedence For example pressing the Cancel Jos button cancels the job Critical error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the printer off and then on These messages are not affected by the auto continue setting If a critical error persists then service is required Alphabetical printer messages When resolving printer messages perform all listed actions in the order until the message is resolved ET NOTE Not all messages are described in the tables the messages that are not listed are self explanatory Display message troubleshooting 333 Alphabetical printer messages Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages Control panel message Description Recommended action Access denied MENUS LOCKED An attempt has been made to modify a printer menu item but the network systems administrator has enabled the control panel security mechanism The message will disappear shortly and the printer will return to the ready state Contact the network system administrator to change settings BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION The duplexer is not functioning Turn off the printer Remove and then reinstall the accessory Turn on the printer Check the rear accessory power connector
318. in a box from the same manufacturer Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes When selecting envelopes consider the following components m Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105 g m 28 Ib or jamming might occur m Construction Before printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm 0 25 inch curl and should not contain air m Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged m Temperature You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the printer m Size You should use only envelopes within the following size ranges m Minimum 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches m Maximum 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches ET NOTE Use only tray 1 or the optional envelope feeder to print on envelopes You might experience some jams when using any media that has a length less than 178 mm 7 inches This might be caused by paper that has been affected by environmental conditions For optimum performance make sure that you are storing and handling the paper correctly see Printing and storage environment Choose envelopes in the printer driver 1 Product information Envelopes with double side seams Double side seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than diagonal seams This style might be more likely to wrinkle Make sure that the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as illustra
319. in the Presets menu To use the new settings you must select the saved preset option every time that you open a program and print To change the configuration settings for example to add a physical option such as a tray or to enable or disable a driver feature such as Allow Manual Duplexing clicking Applications clicking Utilities and then double clicking Printer Setup Utility Click on the print queue On the Printers menu click Show Info Click the Installable Options menu 1 Product information Software for Macintosh computers The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description PPD files Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs and the HP LaserJet Utility for use with Macintosh computers The embedded Web server can be used with Macintosh computers if the printer is connected to a network PPDs Use PPDs in combination with the Apple PS drivers to gain access to the printer features and to allow the computer to communicate with the printer An installation program for the PPDs PDEs and other software is provided on the CD Use the appropriate PS driver that comes with the operating system HP LaserJet Utility Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver The illustrated screens make selecting printer features easy Use the HP LaserJet Utility to perform the following tasks m Name the printer assign it to a zone on the network and download files and fonts m Con
320. ing the new firmware to the Drirter em 91 Remote firmware update through a local Windows port 92 Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me cccccccasesseeeeceeeaeeeeeeseesessseeeeeees 92 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 93 Remote firmware update through a Windows pnetwork sse 93 Remote firmware update for UNIX ovstems nennen 93 Remote firmware update using FTP on a direct network connection suuuss 93 Windows operating systems ssssesse eem enne 94 Mac operating SyStemis ecu dere aade cee hk de rre ka dee n e kde e Y RR de eR RR re ERR eed kis 95 Remote firmware update using FTP through a browser emen 96 Remote firmware update using Fetch Mac OS 8 6 and OS 9 x only sssssseee 97 Remote firmware update using the HP LaserJet utility Mac OS 8 6 and OS 9 x only 98 Remote firmware update using the LPR commande 99 Using HP Web JetAdmin to download the firmware to the primter 100 Printer messages during firmware update 101 Troubleshooting a firmware update 102 5 Theory of operation Chapter eet EE 103 Introduction E M 104 Basic operation of the printer enne nnn 105 Printer operating seduenCe neret 105 Control system Overview certe rrt e rte Re Re dera npa rna ERR RR Mp RR ae ERR 105 Pickup and feed system Overvlew nennen enne
321. inter The troubleshooting procedures in this section assume that the stacker or stapler stacker is installed on a printer that is working normally Always correct any printer errors before attempting to troubleshoot the stacker or stapler stacker Stacker and stapler stacker errors fall into four groups m Jam errors m Paper transport errors Malfunction errors m Component errors Jam and transport errors result when media does not move successfully from the printer through to the stacker or stapler stacker Malfunction errors cause the stacker or stapler stacker to stop or to operate incorrectly Component errors that are the result of an internal component failure and generate errors messages that appear on the control panel display For more information about control panel messages see Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages Initial checks m Before troubleshooting the stacker or stapler stacker verify that any printer errors have been corrected The printer must be operating normally before you can troubleshoot the stacker or stapler stacker See Alphabetical printer messages and Numerical printer messages m Inspect the stacker or stapler stacker connectors on the unit and on the printer Verify that the connectors are not damaged and that the stacker or stapler stacker is installed correctly If the stacker or stapler stacker was installed while the printer power was on turn the power off and then on agai
322. inter off and on See Display message troubleshooting for help in resolving problems Off The printer is functioning without error Blinking Action is required See the control panel display Using the control panel Control panel buttons Button Function CaNcEL Jos HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers Stop HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers Cancels the current print job in process and expels all of the active pages from the paper path The time that it takes to cancel the job depends on the size of the print job Press the button only once Also clears continuable errors that are associated with the canceled job d NOTE The control panel lights cycle while the print job is cleared from both the printer and the computer and then the printer returns to the ready state Ready light on Pause Resume HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers Menu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers The Pause Resume button on HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers pauses and resumes printing of print jobs in process It also closes menus or closes Help The Menu button on HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers opens and exits the menus Y SELECT Clears an error condition when the condition can be cleared Saves the selected value for an item Performs the action that is associated with the item that is highlighted on the graphical display On HP LaserJet 4200 4300 Series printers the ScLect button also op
323. inter paper path Paper pickup and feed system 121 122 Fuser delivery block The pickup and feed system is divided into two blocks the pickup and feed block and the fuser delivery block 9 A A The El 7 Figure 5 9 Pickup and feed and fuser delivery block diagram 1 Fuser delivery block 2 Pickup and feed block The fuser delivery block consists of rollers sensors the fuser and the output delivery assembly The rollers transport the media through the fuser delivery block paper path The fuser applies heat and pressure to the media to permanently bond the toner image to the media The output delivery assembly sends the printed media either to the rear output bin if the rear output door is open or to the top output bin the default output delivery bin Sensors along the paper path detect media movement jams and the top output bin capacity Jam detection The printer uses the followng sensors to detect the presence of media and to verify whether media is being fed correctly or has jammed For information about the location of these sensors see Printer Switches and sensors m Pre feed sensor PS102 m Top of page sensor PS103 m Fuser delivery sensor PS108 The microprocessor on the dc controller PCA checks for jams by timing the media as it moves past these sensors If the media does not pass the sensor in a specific period of time the transport process is stopped motors are tu
324. is being shared and lt SHARENAME gt is the printer share name For example C V copy B c 4250fw rfu your_server your_computer ET NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C V copy b c My Documents 4250fw rfu V your_server your_computer 2 Press Enter A message appears on the control panel See Printer messages during firmware update At the end of the upgrade process Ready appears on the printer control panel The message 1 file s copied appears on the computer screen Remote firmware update for UNIX systems For UNIX systems any command method that delivers the RFU file to the printer is acceptable including the following At the command prompt type cp yourmachine FILENAME dev parallel gt where yourmachine FILENAME gt contains the RFU file Remote firmware update using FTP on a direct network connection If the HP LaserJet 4200 4250 4300 4350 series printer uses a direct network connection use file transfer protocol FTP to update the HP LaserJet firmware Complete the following steps for the operating system that is in use Downloading a remote firmware update 93 94 Windows operating systems 1 Co s O o Ff 10 11 12 13 Take note of the TCP IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page The HP Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout ET NOTE Before connecting to th
325. is applied to the surface of the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge The drum is then exposed to the laser beam from the laser scanner which neutralizes portions of the drum to create an invisible electrostatic latent image m Developing the image Toner from the print cartridge is applied to the drum The image is now visible m Transferring the image The toner is transferred to the media and the media is separated from the photosensitive drum m Fusing the image Heat and pressure are applied to the media to permanently bond the toner to the media m Cleaning the transfer charging roller and photosensitive drum Residual left over toner is cleaned off of the transfer charging roller this toner is transferred to the photosensitive drum and then off of the photosensitive drum When the dc controller PCA receives the print signal it drives the main motor which rotates the photosensitive drum the HP LaserJet 4250 4300 and 4350 use a separate print cartridge motor to rotate the drum the developing cylinder the primary charging roller the transfer charging roller and the fuser pressure roller The primary charging roller places a uniform negative charge on the surface of the photosensitive drum Modulated laser beams strike the drum to form an electrostatic latent image The latent image that is formed on the photosensitive drum changes to a visual image when toner on the developing cylinder is transferred to the drum The transfer
326. is blank when you turn on the printer check the following items 1 Make sure that the printer is plugged into an active electrical outlet receptacle that delivers the correct voltage 2 Make sure that the on off switch is in the on position 3 Make sure that the fan runs briefly which indicates that the power supply is operational 4 Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected See the hint in the procedure for Top cover 5 HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 Series printers only Make sure that the firmware DIMM and the formatter are seated and operating correctly See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only 6 Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards and then try to turn the printer on again E NOTE If the printer control panel display is blank but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the printer power is turned on try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the control panel display formatter or other printer components See Engine test page If the main cooling fan is not operating check the following items 1 Check the fuse on the power supply location FU2 near the power switch to make sure that it is not open 2 If necessary replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 3 If necessary replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 7 Troubleshooting ET NOTE Itis important to have the printer control panel functional as soon as possible in the t
327. is error message persists replace the formatter assembly See Formatter assembly If the 68 1 error persists reinitialize the hard disk See the caution and note in To initialize the hard disk If the 68 1 error persists replace the disk 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL To continue press Y A nonvolatile storage device is failing to write Pressing Y SeLect button should clear the message Printing can continue but the printer might behave unexpectedly in response to the changed settings X Description 0 onboard NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard Press Y the Select button to continue Turn the printer off and then on If the 68 0 error persists initialize the NVRAM See the caution and note in To initialize NVRAM If this error message persists replace the formatter assembly See Formatter assembly For a 68 1 error message reinitialize the hard disk See the caution and note in To initialize the hard disk If the 68 1 error persists replace the disk 69 X printer error To continue turn off then on The optional duplexer is not functioning Remove the duplexer Turn the printer off and then on Replace the duplexer If the message persists replace the duplexer 79 XXXX PRINTER ERROR A critical hardware error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on If the problem persists reseat the firmware DIMM Display message troubleshooting 3
328. ise Idaho USA 17 April 2002 For regulatory topics only Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Strasse 140 D 71034 B blingen FAX 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Regulatory statements 47 Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP LaserJet 4250 and LaserJet 4350 printer Regulatory Model Number BOISB 0309 00 Model Number Q5400A Q5407A Including optional duplex accesssory Q2439B optional 500 sheet input tray Q2440B optional 1500 Sheet Input Tray Q2440B and optional 500 sheet stapler stacker accessory Q2443B Product Options ALL conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 60950 1999 EN60950 2000 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 A2 EN 60825 1 1994 A11 A2 Class 1 Laser LED Product GB4943 2001 EMC CISPR 22 1997 EN 55022 1998 Class B EN 61000 3 2 1995 A14 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 EN 55024 199
329. it 89 settings 77 timing diagram 442 troubleshooting 402 wiring diagram 435 Stapler stacker menu 77 static precautions for 168 status embedded Web server 315 lights control panel 56 57 Printer Status and Alerts 317 supplies page printing 63 314 storage job Retrieve Job menu 62 settings 74 storing envelopes 35 paper 30 supplies life expectancies 88 ordering 446 partnumbers 447 recycling 45 specifications 19 status page printing 63 314 support 444 switches 1 500 sheet tray 420 500 sheet feeder 417 locating 413 media size detection 119 stacker and stapler stacker stacker operations 137 stapler stacker operations symbol sets selecting 70 system requirements drivers 13 printing software 12 System Setup menu 74 422 142 T technical support 444 Technical Training HP 444 telephone numbers HP authorized resellers and support 445 service agreements 445 supplies ordering 446 temperature protection circuit fuser 111 temperature specifications fusing 36 paper storing 30 printer requirements 24 tests Diagnostics menu 80 drum rotation functional check 381 engine 329 formatter 330 half self test functional check 381 paper path 369 power on bypass 328 stacker 404 stapler stacker 404 time settings 74 324 timeouts I O settings 77 timing diagrams 437 toner cleaning 82 85 density setting 73 EconoMode 72 image formation operations 153 low 76 out 76 smeared 389 tools required 168 top co
330. itches and sensors 343 Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES For help press NOTE The stapler stacker LED is continuously illuminated green this error applies to the stapler stacker only Fewer than 70 staples remain in the optional stapler stacker staple cartridge Printing will continue until the STAPLER OUT OF STAPLES message appears on the printer control panel display 1 Press HeLp button for detailed information 2 Press A Up Arrow button and Y Down Arrow button to step through the instructions 3 f after following these instructions this error persists replace the staple unit See To remove and replace the stapler unit E NOTE The customer is responsible for ordering replacement staple cartridges STAPLER OUT OF STAPLES For help press NOTE The stapler stacker LED blinks in amber this error applies to the stapler stacker only Fewer than 15 staples remain in the optional stapler stacker The printer behavior depends on how the STAPLES OUT setting is configured If STAPLES OUT STOP the printer stops printing until you refill the stapler or press Y SeLecT button This is the default setting If STAPLES OUT CONTINUE printing continues but the jobs will not be stapled 1 Press Hz button for detailed information 2 Press 4 Ur Arrow button an
331. ive at the top of page sensor PS103 within the specified time If the actions listed above do not resolve the issue continue with the following 1 Open and close the specified tray while watching the control panel display A short delay should occur between when the tray closes and the tray size message appears on the control panel display If there is no delay and you do not hear the tray lift motor lift the tray plate into place replace the stack position sensor PS107 PS802 or SR2 in the tray See Printer switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder Switches sensors solenoids and PCAs 2 Replace the tray X pickup solenoid 3 Replace the tray 1 paper pickup assembly See Tray 1 paper pickup assembly Display message troubleshooting 349 Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action ET NOTE The 13 01 00 error can 4 Mars Hs ela i assembly See also be caused by the failure of the RE paper level sensor PS107 If this 5 Verify that the top of page sengor falls me Lerten does sensor PS103 is operating correctly not rotate to lift the paper tray plate and that the sensor flag can freely move Replace the sensor if it is not This error can also be caused Rica GE See Printer when the printer attempts to pick switenes and sensors vp media fronie iray i
332. k the two retaining tabs callout 1 and slip the anti static bar callout 2 off of them Rotate the anti static bar away from the printer remove it from the printer 3 Unplug the fan cable from location J78 on the dc controller PCA 6 Removing and replacing parts Unweave the cable from the cable guide callout 3 si p Hint You might have to unplug connectors or release some wire harness retainer clips to provide enough slack in the fan cable to remove it from the cable guide T Ce m f F f f Figure 6 71 Cooling fan HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series only 1 of 2 Motors and fans 249 250 5 Release the two retaining tabs one at a time callout 4 and pull the fan out of the duct bracket by rocking it from side to side until it comes free mmm a Figure 6 72 Cooling fan HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series only 2 of 2 d Set Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the fan the air must flow into the printer Verify that Sr the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the printer Verify that each harness connector on the dc controller PCA is fully seated These connectors can become partially unplugged when the harnesses are unwoven from the guide on the fan duct 6 Removing and replacing parts Removing the fan and the air duct together 1 Motors and fans Remove the following assemblies e Rearaccessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 exten
333. kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa l katso s teeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 770 800 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser 1 Product information 2 Installation Chapter contents e Operating environment e Site requirements e Software installation Chapter contents 51 Operating environment 52 Place the printer on a sturdy level surface in a well ventilated area that meets the following environmental requirements m Temperature 15 to 32 5 C 59 to 90 5 F m Humidity 10 to 80 relative humidity no condensation m Away from direct sunlight open flames and ammonia fumes m With sufficient space around the printer for access and ventilation see Table 1 7 Product dimensions for a complete list of product measurements 135 mm 5 3 inches i 418 mm i 16 5 inches all models 936 mm 38 9 inches 547 mm 21 5 inches base n 668 mm 26 3 inches tn din 734 mm 28 9 inches dins dinsl Figure 2 1 Printer measurements 2 Installation Site requirements The following environmental specifications must be maintained to ensure the correct operation of the printer
334. l be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF Me RCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country region to country region state to state or province to province HP s limited warranty is valid in any country region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards HP will not alter form fit or function of t
335. l parts list 495 Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Table and page Cover left LJ 4200 4300 RC1 0287 020CN Covers Cover left LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1077 000CN Covers Cover left 1 500 sheet feeder RC1 0662 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cover left 500 sheet tray RC1 0487 020CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cover legal RC1 0509 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cover legal LJ 4200 4300 RC1 0290 000CN Covers Cover legal LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3282 000CN Covers Cover number display plate 500 sheet tray RC1 0500 000CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cover paper handling RC1 0289 000CN Covers Cover rear assembly stacker RM1 0237 000CN Stapler stacker stacker and stapler Cover rear output bin RM1 0027 020CN Covers Cover rear 1 500 sheet feeder RC1 0663 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cover right 1 500 sheet feeder RC1 0661 000CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cover right 500 sheet tray RC1 0488 020CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Dc controller LJ 4200 RG1 4236 040CN Internal components 3 of 3 Dc controller LJ 4200 Dc controller LJ 4250 4350 RG1 4236 040CN RM1 1108 000CN PCAs Internal components 3 of 3 Dc controller LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1108 000CN PCAs Dc controller LJ 4300 RG1 4237 040CN Internal components 3
336. l troubleshooting checklist The following checklist contains basic questions that you can ask the customer in order to help define the problem s quickly For more information about printer and media specifications see Model and serial numbers and Media specifications Table 7 1 Initial troubleshooting checklist Environment m Is the printer installed in a suitable environment See Model and serial numbers m Is the printer installed on a solid level surface Is the supply voltage from the wall receptacle within x 10 of the printer s rated voltage see Model and serial numbers x Is the power cord fully seated into both the printer and the electrical receptacle in the wall m Is the operating environment for example the temperature and humidity levels within the specified parameters that are listed in chapter 1 see Model and serial numbers m Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials m Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight Media m Is suitable media being used in the printer See Supported media weights and sizes and Paper and print media m Does the customer use only supported print media m Is the media in good condition no curl folds or other flaws Troubleshooting process 303 Table 7 1 Initial troubleshooting checklist continued Tt als the media stored correctly and within environmental limits m Is the correct s
337. lace a dot of light every 1 1200th of an inch This is how the printer achieves its true 1200 by 1200 dpi resolution After the writing process the drum surface holds an invisible latent electrostatic image Image formation system 155 At the beginning of each sweep the beams strike the beam detect mirror and generating the beam detect BD signal The BD signal is sent to the dc controller PCA where it is converted to an electrical signal that synchronizes the video data output for one sweep two scan lines and diagnoses problems that exist in the laser diode or scanner motor Developing the image The developing process makes the latent electrostatic image a visible image on the drum The developing unit consists of a metallic cylinder that rotates around a fixed magnetic core inside the toner cavity Toner is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin bound to iron particles which is uniformly attracted to the magnetic core of the cylinder The toner particles obtain a negative surface charge by rubbing against the developing cylinder which is connected to a negative dc supply The negatively charged toner is attracted to the discharged exposed grounded areas on the drum An ac potential is applied to the developing cylinder to decrease the attraction between the toner and the magnetic core of the cylinder and to increase the repelling action of the toner against the areas of the drum that have not been exposed to the laser bea
338. later The most recent printer drivers for all supported operating systems are available at www hp com go lj4200 software www hp com go lj4250 software www hp com go lj4300 software or www hp com 9g0 1j4350 software If you do not have access to the Internet see the support flyer that came in the printer box for information about obtaining the most recent software The following table lists the available software for the printer Software Windows 98 Windows Windows Mac OS UNIX Linux OS 2 Me NT 4 0 2000 XP Server 2003 Windows Installer x x x PCL 6 x x x PCL 5 x x x PostScript emulation x x x HP Web Jetadmin x x x Macintosh Installer x Macintosh PostScript PS x Printer Description PPD files IBM drivers x Model scripts x Available only on the World Wide Web 12 1 Product information Printer drivers Drivers included Printer drivers provide access to the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer by using a printer language Check the install notes Readme and late breaking Readme files on the printer CD for additional software and languages The following printer drivers are included with the printer The most recent drivers are available at www hp com go lj4200 software www hp com go lj4250 software www hp com go lj4300 software or www hp com go lj4350 software Depending on the configuration of Windows based computers the installation program for
339. lead free construction in compliance with the European Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE law This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end of life Type Lithium Carbon Monofluoride BR1632 3 Volt button style battery 1 5 grams Materials Mercury free cadmium free Location On printed circuit board User removable No For recycling information you can contact http www hp com recycle or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industry Alliance http www eiae org Regulatory information 45 46 Material safety data sheet Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS for supplies that contain chemical substances for example toner can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at http www hp com go msds or http www hp com hpinfo community environment productinfo safety For more information To obtain information about the following environmental topics visit http www hp com go environment or http www hp com hpinfo community environment productinfo safety Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products HP s commitment to the environment HP s environmental management system HP s end of life product return and recycling program Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS 1 Product information Regulatory statements Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlet
340. lexing pendulum assemblv sse nnne nns 217 Laser scanner assembly tod epo ANERE EEGENEN 219 Paper pickup drive assembly ssssssssssssssesseeeeeeee eene nnne 222 Tray 2 lifter drive assembly 2 c Ete tto ht estin bete ce tente Pecdce tado eee bia teca bx es 227 Dc conttoller P GA 2 oso a sette t EE 230 eiristallationitip ito de Ee edite en ated et 235 Installing a new formatter and a new dc controller LJ 4250 4350 only 235 Power supply iR etn i ee ela ee boe Haee de ve pee ke aus 236 Paper feed belt assembly creer eerie dee tede ne idee ide ei e eode 243 Motors and faris en bene dote t Dee ax ev bb gud must tede ve od uda aerate edv e Uo det edge Tad eun 245 Main cooling fan left side zor recaia anea an emm ennemis 246 Cooling fan right side HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 Series printers only 248 Removing the fan without removing the air duct 248 Removing the fan and the air duct Iogether 251 Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series printer only 253 MaM un ELTE 255 Pickup and feed assemblles 5 5 b ettet i ge ict ee ctt at iut ele A DERE MEA od ARHE 257 viii Tray 1 paper pickup assembly sssssssesessssssee eene rennen ennt nnns 257 Paper feed assembly entera dens rd a A A 261 Reinstallation notes for the paper feed assembiv 262 Main drive assemibly TEE 263 Ee Ee
341. ll smear it During the fusing process heat and pressure fuse the image to the media to produce a permanent image The media passes between a heated fusing roller and a Soft pressure roller This melts the toner and presses it into the media This printer utilizes an on demand fusing method This method has fast temperature rising time which shortens the wait time the time it takes to heat the fuser to its operating temperature No power is supplied to the fuser heater during the standby mode which conserves energy For the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4200L Series printers a dc negative bias charge is applied to the fuser film This stabilizes the toner so that it does not scatter over the media and produce a blurred image For the HP LaserJet 4250 4300 and 4350 Series printers a dc negative bias is applied to the fuser film and a dc positive bias charge is applied to the pressure roller This stabilizes the toner so that it does not scatter over the media and produce a blurred image To prevent offset images the surface of the fuser film is coated with fluorine HP LaserJet 4200 4200L Fixing heater Brushes Fixing film Toner Dc bias Pressure roller T Paper 777 HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 Fixing heater Brushes Fixing film Toner Pressure roller ZS 1 Dcbias DC bias b Figure 5 41 Fusing the image 5 Theory of operation Cleaning the transfer charging roller and photosensitive drum Resid
342. lues column the default value for each setting is the one that has an asterisk next to it Item Values Explanation STAPLES NONE Use this item to specify whether print jobs are stapled or not ONE NONE Turns off stapling ONE Turns on stapling E NOTE Selecting the stapler at the printer control panel changes the default setting to staple It is possible that all print jobs will be stapled STAPLES OUT STOP Use this item to specify how the printer behaves if the stapler runs out of staples as indicated by the REPLACE CONTINUE STAPLE CARTRIDGE message on the printer control panel display STOP The printer stops printing until you refill the stapler CONTINUE The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples but the pages are not stapled For information about ordering a new staple cartridge see Ordering parts and supplies For information about refilling the stapler see Loading staples UO submenu Items on the I O input output menu affect the communication between the printer and the computer The contents of the I O submenu depend on which EIO card is installed The section that follows lists the settings and possible values In the Values column the default value for each setting is the one that has an asterisk next to it Item Values Explanation UO TIMEOUT 5 to 300 15 SECONDS Use this item to select the I O timeout period in seconds Use this setting to adjust timeout
343. ly 220 240 V LJ 4200 Electrical components RM1 0025 040CN Feed assembly Electrical components RM1 0026 040CN Paper delivery assembly Internal components 3 of 3 Numerical parts list 507 508 Table 8 22 Numerical parts list continued Part number RM1 0027 020CN Description Cover rear output bin Table and page Covers RM1 0028 060CN 500 sheet universal replacement tray LJ 4200 4300 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 RM1 0033 020CN Lifter drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 0034 040CN Pickup drive assembly Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0036 000CN Roller paper pickup Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0037 020CN Roller paper feed Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0041 000CN Media size sensor assembly 500 sheet feeder 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RM1 0041 020CN Size sensing assembly tray 2 Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0042 000CN Cable accessory interface Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0043 020CN Swing plate assembly Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0045 000CN Laser scanner assembly LJ 4200 Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 0046 000CN Cover assembly right LJ 4200 4300 Covers RM1 0047 020CN Cover cartridge door LJ 4200 Covers RM1 0049 000CN Cover assembly top LJ 4200 4300 Covers RM1 0050 030CN Cover assembly front Covers RM1 0056 000CN
344. ly LJ4250 4350 RM1 1181 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Plate swing RL1 0013 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4200 RM1 0019 050CN Electrical components Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4200 also see Figure 8 9 Electrical components Alphabetical parts list RM1 0019 050CN Internal components 1 of 3 499 500 Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 Part number RM1 1070 000CN Table and page Electrical components Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 9 Electrical components RM1 1070 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4300 RM1 0107 000CN Electrical components Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4300 also see Figure 8 9 Electrical components RM1 0107 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4200 RM1 0020 000CN Electrical components Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4200 also see Figure 8 9 Electrical components RM1 0020 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1071 000CN Electrical components Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 9 Electrical components RM1 1071 000CN
345. ly assembly See Power supply 2 Remove three screws callout 1 at the back of the assembly Figure 6 66 Paper feed belt assembly 1 of 2 CAUTION Make sure that the four rubber belts and plastic rollers remain in place These belts and rollers can easily become dislodged and you might lose them Main assemblies 243 244 3 Release the paper feed belt assembly alignment pins callout 2 Rotate the assembly toward the back of the power supply and remove it Yr ee Bz 4 D Figure 6 67 Paper feed belt assembly 2 of 2 si Ay Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the paper feed belt assembly make sure that the alignment pins on the power supply side callout 2 are correctly hooked under the support leg on the power supply 6 Removing and replacing parts Motors and fans This section provides instructions for removing and replacing motors and fans M103 D FM101 Figure 6 68 Motors and fans FM101 Main fan FM103 Cooling fan HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only M101 Main motor M102 Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only Motors and fans 246 Main cooling fan left side Remove the following assemblies e Rear accessory cover See e Top cover See e Left side cover See Remove two screws callout 1 and then remove the power supply shield callout 2 Main cooling fan 1 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts 3 After removing the p
346. m This ac potential improves density and contrast SS S m unit Stirring plate Developing cylinder Dc bias z AT Figure 5 39 Developing the image The print density control in the print quality menu adjusts the dc bias of the developing cylinder by changing the force of attraction between the toner and drum A change in the dc bias causes either more or less toner to be attracted to the drum which in turn either increases or decreases the print density Both the primary and developer dc bias voltages change in response to the density setting 5 Theory of operation Transferring the image During the transferring process the toner image on the drum surface is transferred to the print media A positive charge that the transfer roller applies to the back of the media causes the negatively charged toner on the drum surface to be attracted to the sheet of media The small diameter of the drum combined with the stiffness of the paper causes the paper to peel away from the drum The static eliminator teeth also help separate the paper from the drum by weakening the attractive forces between the negatively charged drum surface and the paper Transfer charging roller zai Static eliminator SUT Figure 5 40 Transferring the image Image formation system 157 Fusing the image The image is held in place only by electrostatic attraction when it is transferred from the drum to the media The lightest touch wi
347. m cz ep oxosddy seiq jeeus uee eg Ss SSS Se LEE eg Le L L Le Ld Li oxouddy oxouddy d vL Oxoiddy H Z0 oxoiddy 90 0xo1ddy e e ley oxouddy BEEN es DE SSS SEE ee 439 iagram d iming d D i o E o o e uw N st d o gt o o l n I eamel LL 9 d d wee n G Mich dc Sad ul dO a6ed jo doy 101 u09 q pueis OLN zit Ue BuO e uonejo peeds in4 LOLN3 L Ue Buijoog H Jese1 H Een WEE ZOLW Joyow wng p LOLW 100w ue H PTY 1111 1 IL II UR E ER E a fel ee EE EE ZL043 uoneubisep yes juud BH 0EO33 uoneu amp isep uoneAijesei juug Esp ICI us IE SIN ISS IW 5s spuooes ium ezis 1eye ul Buguud sjeeus z snonuguoo 104 peyo Huruj NO an UE Figure 7 38 HP LaserJet 4250 general timing diagram General timing diagrams g xoiddy a ZH LH 4e1eeu Burxi4 g xoiddy Seq Joo sunssald Selq jeeus ueeeg seq o amp neBoN seq wy BurxiJ m Sm Iis 80 0 xoiddy 4 g o xoiddy n xoiddy ls g g xoiddy seiq Duibreuo jejsue1 LV0 xoiddy gt l s0 xeiddy oq seiq Burdoje eg a LV0 xoiddy E Ov seiq Buidoje eq 9q seiq Buifieuo Arewig Ov seiq BuiBseyo faeuug 90 xoddy p01
348. m the paper size and type in the tray Check the tray size sensor switches if the configuration page indicates a different size than that in the tray Verify that the sensor fingers inside the tray are engaging the tray sensor correctly See Tray 2 500 sheet feeder and 1 500 sheet feeder media size detection NON HP CARTRIDGE DETECTED The printer has detected that a non HP print cartridge is currently installed If a new HP cartridge has been installed this message appears for about 20 seconds and then is replaced by the Ready message If the print cartridge appears to be an authentic HP cartridge try installing another HP print cartridge that has the same shipment lot number If this clears the error message return the print cartridge that you removed to the supplier as defective If the error message persists the print cartridge might be a fraudulent cartridge If the error message persists the memory chip on the print cartridge location J600 might be defective or the connector might be defective The dc controller PCA might be defective Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA ET NOTE Printer repairs that are required as a result of using non HP print cartridges are not covered under the HP warranty NON HP CARTRIDGE DETECTED alternates with Ready For menus press Y The printer has detected that a non HP print cartridge is currently installed I
349. mbedded Web server m View printer status information m Specify the type of media that is loaded in each tray m Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new supplies m View and change tray configurations m View and change the printer control panel menu configurations m View and print internal pages m Receive notification of printer and supplies events m View and change the network configuration To use the embedded Web server you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or later or Netscape Navigator 4 or later The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP based network The embedded Web server does not support IPX based printer connections You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server Gaining access to the embedded Web server In a supported Web browser on your computer type the IP address for the printer To find the IP address print a configuration page ET NOTE After you navigate to the URL you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings for and information about the printer the Information tab the Settings tab and the Network tab Click the tab that you want to view See the following sections for more information about each tab Information tab The Information tab contains the following pages m Device Status Shows the printer status and the life th
350. mechanism 1 Main assemblies when the duplexer is installed Remove the following assemblies e Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door e Top cover See Top cover e Formatter assembly See Formatter assembly e Output delivery assembly See Output delivery assembly Remove two screws callout 1 Ja 00 1 127 N 50H None SAM Figure 6 41 Duplexing pendulum RE a of 2 217 218 3 Pullthe duplexing pendulum assembly toward the laser scanner until the upper gear drive shaft clears the hole in the chassis and then remove the assembly CAUTION The gears in this assembly are not captive and can easily slide off of the shafts Handle the assembly carefully and place it gear side up on your workstation to prevent the gears from sliding off of the shafts y Figure 6 42 Duplexing pendulum assembly 2 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts Laser scanner assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door e Top cover See Top cover e Right side cover See Right side cover e Formatter cover See Formatter cover 2 Unplug the laser scanner wire harness connector callout 1 from the dc controller PCA location J84 callout 1 3 Remove the laser scanner wire harness from the wire guide callout 2 ny ZR Cano le a MADE V SoS gt Ze Y eg 78 A b o Figure 6
351. multiple original prints mopies and storing forms fonts and signatures CPU HP LaserJet 4200 4200Lseries printer formatters incorporate a 300 MHz RISC processor HP LaserJet 4300 series printer formatters incorporate a 350 MHz RISC processor HP LaserJet 4250 4350 series printer formatters incorporate a 460 MHz RISC processor Printer memory If the printer encounters a problem when managing available memory a clearable warning message appears on the control panel Some printer messages are affected by the auto continue and clearable warning settings on the printer control panel configuration menu If CLEARABLE WARNING JOB is set on the control panel warning messages appear on the control panel until the end of the job from which they were generated If CLEARABLE WARNING ON is set warning messages appear on the control panel until Go is pressed If an error occurs that prevents printing and AUTO CONTINUE ON is set the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before it returns online If AUTO CONTINUE OFF is set the message appears until Go is pressed Read only memory Besides storing microprocessor control programs the read only memory ROM stores dot patterns of internal character sets fonts Random access memory The random access memory RAM contains the page I O buffers and the font storage area It stores printing and font information received from the host system and can also serve to temporarily Formatter system 163
352. n m Verify that the environmental specifications are met The specifications for the stacker and stapler stacker are the same as for the printer See Operating environment m Verify that the media being used meets HP specifications See Supported media weights and sizes and Paper and print media m If the stacker or stapler stacker was recently moved from a cold environment for example a warehouse into a warm room condensation within the device might be causing the problem If condensation occurs either wipe the parts with a dry lint free cloth or leave the stacker or stapler stacker turned on for 10 to 20 minutes 402 7 Troubleshooting Jam errors The following sections describe stacker and stapler stacker jam errors Stacker and stapler stacker paper path Figure 7 9 Stacker and stapler stacker paper path Troubleshooting the stacker and the stapler stacker 403 404 Stacker paper path test Use the following procedure to perform a stacker paper path test oa bk O N o Press v Setect button or the Menu button to open the menus Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down ARROw button to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to PAPER PATH TEST and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to DESTINATION and then press Scroll to OPTIONAL BIN 1 and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to COPIES then press v Scroll to the approppriate number of test pages and then press v
353. n open correctly If necessary replace the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly The power supply is defective The power supply contains the high voltage circuit Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 22 Specks or dots Possible cause Recommended action Specks AaBb The interior of the printer is dirty 1 Print a few more pages and see if AaBbCc the problem corrects itself AaBbCc 2 Clean the inside of the printer see AaBbCc chapter 3 AaBbCc 3 Process a printer cleaning page See Running the cleaning page manually ET NOTE Specks might appear onthe page after a jam has been cleared Print two or three more pages and see if The print cartridge is damaged Replace the print cartridge the specks diappear Image formation troubleshooting The media does not meet specifications or is not stored correctly 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications The fuser rollers are worn Replace the fuser See Fuser Dots in the paper path direction The static eliminator teeth are dirty Clean the static eliminator teeth by using a small brush or compressed air
354. n the specified tray where N is the number of the tray This item appears only if an optional tray is installed The available sizes might vary depending upon the optional feeder device that is installed Tray N Custom UNIT OF MEASURE X DIMENSION This item appears only if a tray is set to a custom size 3 Operation Item Values Explanation Y DIMENSION UNIT OF MEASURE Use this option to select the unit of measure to use when you set custom paper sizes for the specified tray X DIMENSION Use this item to set the measurement of the width of the paper measurement from side to side in the tray The options are 3 0 to 8 50 INCHES or 76 to 216 MM Y DIMENSION Sets the measurement of the length of the paper measurement from front to back in the tray The options are 5 0 to 14 00 INCHES or 127 to 356 MM After the Y DIMENSION value is selected a summary screen appears This screen contains feedback that summarizes all the information that was specified on the previous three screens such as TRAY 1 SIZE 8 50 x 14 INCHES Setting saved Control panel menus 67 Configure device menu This menu contains administrative functions Printing submenu Print quality submenu System Setup submenu Stapler stacker submenu I O submenu Resets submenu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only Printing submenu Some items on this menu are available in the program or printer driver if the appropriate
355. n the static eliminator teeth by using a small brush or compressed air Replace the assembly if it is damaged Make sure that all of the covers are in place Move the printer away from windows that face the outdoors Image formation troubleshooting 387 Table 7 24 Lines continued ABDC aBboca ABCO ABDO ABDC Possible cause Recommended action s Horizontal lines parallel to the paper path direction If the lines are repeated at a consistent interval down the page a repetitive defect exists Use the repetitive defect ruler to determine the cause of this defect See Repetitive defects troubleshooting Continued Table 7 25 Grey background Sharp random lines indicate a problem with the laser scanner control circuitry 1 Check the cables between the dc controller and the laser scanner assembly 2 Ifthe cables are not connected connect the cables 3 If after checking the cables between the dc controller and the laser scanner the problem persists replace the laser scanner assembly See aser scanner assembly 4 If after replacing the laser scanner the problem persists replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 5 If after replacing the dc controller PCA the problem persists replace the Formatter assembly See Formatter assembly Horizontal scars on the photosensitive drum Replace the print cartridge AaBbCc
356. nd then rotate the lock toward the rear of the printer until the inner retaining tab gear side aligns with the hole in the output delivery assembly frame 6 Removing and replacing parts Slide the shaft lock to the right and remove it to release the gear shaft from the output delivery assembly callout 2 CAUTION Do not break the shaft lock A replacement is not provided with a new output delivery assembly E NW le Figure 6 39 Ou a tput delivery assembly 1 of 2 Q Hint Snap the shaft lock back into place on the assembly so that you will not lose it Remove the shaft lock when you reinstall the output delivery assembly When the output delivery assembly is installed verify that the locking pin on the shaft lock is fully seated in the hole on the output delivery assembly AN CAUTION The rear face down output bin sensor cable callout 3 is routed through a notch callout 4 on the output delivery system at the gear end of the assembly When you remove the assembly carefully remove the cable from the notch to avoid damage to the cable Main assemblies 215 216 4 Lift up the gear end of the output delivery assembly callout 5 slightly and slide the assembly toward the formatter assembly to remove it Figure 6 40 Output delivery assembly 2 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts Duplexing pendulum assembly ET NOTE The duplexing pendulum assembly is part of the paper path switching
357. nd sensor harnesses Kas r Figure 6 78 Tray 1 paper pickup assembly 1 of 4 Pickup and feed assemblies 257 258 4 Remove three screws callout 4 5 Press the upper retainer tab callout 5 to release the assembly 6 Lift up the cover to release the lower retaining tab and remove the cover Figure 6 79 Tray 1 paper pickup assembly 2 of 4 6 Removing and replacing parts 7 Unplug the pickup sensor connector callout 6 and then remove six screws callout 7 ww Figure 6 80 Tray 1 pickup assembly 3 of 4 Q Reinstallation tip One of the screws on the left side callout 7 in Figure 6 80 Tray 1 Sr pickup assembly 3 of 4 is longer than the other screws Make sure that this screw is replaced in the hole from which is was removed AN CAUTION Carefully thread the solenoid wire harness through the hole in the chassis When you remove the pickup assembly avoid pinching the pickup solenoid wire harness between the assembly and the chassis Pickup and feed assemblies 259 8 Rotate the left side of the assembly away from the chassis and then slide the assembly to the left to remove it Carefully feed the pickup assembly solenoid wire harness through the opening in the chassis as you remove the assembly Figure 6 81 Tray 1 pickup assembly 4 of 4 sie Q Reinstallation tip Reroute the solenoid wire harness through the opening in the chassis gt Reinstallation tip When yo
358. nded action s The leading edge of the media has passed the stapler or stapler stacker delivery rollers The staples are deformed stapler stacker only Replace the stapler unit See Maintaining the stapler unit The paper delivery sensor PS1102 arm cannot move freely or is damaged Inspect the paper delivery sensor PS1102 See Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors Verify that the sensor arm can move freely If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker The paper delivery sensor PS1102 spring is defective or damaged Reseat the paper delivery sensor PS1102 spring See Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker The paper delivery sensor PS1102 is defective Replace the stacker or stapler stacker Troubleshooting the stacker and the stapler stacker 405 Paper transport errors Table 7 43 Paper transport error troubleshooting Possible cause Recommended action s The rollers are worn dirty or defective Inspect all of the stacker or stapler stacker rollers Clean any dirty rollers If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker The feed guide is damaged causing the leading edge of the media to bend Inspect the feed guide If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker An obstruction in the paper path causes skewed print m The paper path is contaminated Cle
359. ng menu 64 Print Quality menu 71 Printing menu 68 removing 204 Resets menu 78 Retrieve Job menu 62 Service menu 323 116 162 514 settings changing 61 Stapler stacker menu 77 System Setup menu 74 control system operations cooling fan replacing 246 copies setting default number of 68 Courier font 69 covers 1 500 sheet tray removing 291 500 sheet feeder removing 278 accessory removing cleaning 82 formatter removing 191 front removing 198 left side removing 197 part numbers 458 459 right side removing 195 top removing 192 CPU operations 163 curled media troubleshooting 393 custom size paper 500 sheet tray specifications 28 29 settings 66 tray 1 specifications 26 tray settings 69 tray specifications 26 customer support 444 105 187 D dark print troubleshooting 400 darkness setting 73 Data light 57 data transmission settings 77 date settings 74 324 dc controller connectors diagram 436 locating 415 operations 105 108 PCA diagram 173 removing 230 replacing 213 Declaration of Conformity 47 default settings cold reset 325 control panel 59 restoring 78 defects examples of 382 repeating 390 400 Diagnostics menu 80 DIMMs accessing 9 configuration page 312 firmware 164 210 partnumbers 450 slots 163 disk file directory printing 63 initialization 327 operations 163 skip disk load 328 distorted images troubleshooting 391 DLC LLC setting 78 door switch SW101 removing 273 dots
360. nsos defective i 6 Replace the top cover open switch SW101 See Printer switches and sensors 7 Replace the fuser See Fuser 8 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 9 If this error message appears frequently see Paper path troubleshooting 13 06 00 and 13 12 00 JAM INSIDE REAR A page is jammed near the rear output door 1 Press Here button for detailed DOOR information about clearing the jam For help press 2 Press 4 Up Arrow button and Y Down Arrow button to step through the instructions 3 Check the paper width and fuser delivery sensors PS106 PS108 and 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action verify that the sensor arms move freely See Printer switches and sensors 4 Check the inside of the duplexer for scraps of media that might have torn off when a jam was cleared 5 Replace the media size sensor PS106 and fuser See Printer Switches and sensors and Fuser 6 Turn the power off Remove the duplexer and turn the power on If the error message persists replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 7 If the error message appears frequently see Paper path troubleshooting 13 12 07 A jam exists in the staple cartridge the 1 Press Herr button for detailed stapler did not finish stapling but was able information jam in stapler to return to its home position
361. nt cartridge memory failure and a 10 00 00 SUPPLIES Me MORY ERROR error message appears on the control panel display see Numerical printer messages M M Dc Controller PCA U i Memory chip controller circuit U Print cartridge Memory chip contact GC emory chip Figure 5 44 Print cartridge memory chip 5 Theory of operation Formatter system The formatter is involved in the following procedures m Controlling the PowerSave Sleep mode m Receiving and processing print data from the various printer I Os m Monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel and the bidirectional I O m Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the dc controller PCA m Storing font information Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface The formatter receives a print job from the bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process The dc controller PCA synchronizes the image formation system with the paper input and output systems and then signals the formatter to send the print image data The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for two EIO cards additional memory DIMMs the hard disk accessory and the optional HP Fast Infrared Receiver PowerSave LJ 4200 4200L 4300 or Sleep LJ 4
362. nter hardware problems quickly Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step Proceed to the next major step or perform additional testing depending on yes or no answers Initial check execution 3 Power ON Error status on the display Displays Ready Refer to section Display message troubleshooting Is test print executable Make a test print Refer to the section Does paper jam Paper path troubleshooting occur Refer to the section Media transport problems Delivers paper normally Refer to the section image formation troubleshooting Do image defects occur Error status on the computer Refer to the section Interface troubleshooting Cw D Figure 7 1 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 When you perform a test print select the same input tray and delivery method that were used when the malfunction occurred If you don t know which trays and bins were used when the malfunction occurred then perform several test prints using all combinations of tray and delivery method 2 Image defects that occurred at the user site might not re occur in test prints Try printing from a computer to replicate the image defect Troubleshooting process 305 306 Power on checks The basic printer functions should start up as soon as the printer is plugged into an electrical
363. nter messages or Numerical printer messages Printer pickup stationary jam If the top of page sensor PS103 does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specific period of time after the media is picked up the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a pickup jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages or Numerical printer messages Printer delivery wrap jam when feeding regular media ET NOTE Regular size media is defined as A4 Letter Legal B5 Executive or A5 If the fuser delivery sensor PS108 does not detect the trailing edge of the media after a specified fusing time the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a printer delivery wrap jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages or Numerical printer messages Printer delivery wrap jam when feeding irregular media ET NOTE Irregular media is defined as media that is less than 200 mm 7 9 inches in length Paper pickup and feed system 123 If the fuser delivery sensor PS108 does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specified period of time after a printer delivery wrap jam is detected or if the fuser delivery sen
364. nts 2 of 3 RG1 4224 000CN Cable envelope feeder connecting LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 2 of 3 RG1 4230 000CN Cable power supply inlet 220 240 V LJ 4200 4300 Electrical components RG1 4231 000CN Cable fuser LJ 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 RG1 4236 040CN Dc controller LJ 4200 Internal components 3 of 3 RG1 4236 040CN Dc controller LJ 4200 PCAs RG1 4237 040CN Dc controller LJ 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 RG1 4237 040CN Dc controller LJ 4300 PCAs RG1 4239 000CN Cable interface 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RG1 4240 000CN Cable media size sensor 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RG1 4241 000CN Cable door sensor 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RG1 4276 020CN RG1 4374 000CN Control panel assembly LJ 4200 4300 PCA 1 500 sheet feeder Covers 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 RH7 1570 000CN Motor main M101 10 pin LJ4200 4300 Internal components 1 of 3 RH7 1573 000CN Fan left LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 RH7 1576 020CN Motor print cartridge M102 8 pin LJ 4300 Internal components 1 of 3 RH7 1577 000CN Fan right LJ 4300 Internal components 3 of 3 RH7 1603 000CN Motor stepping 1 500 sheet feeder 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2
365. o step through the instructions Print a configuration page and verify that the tray settings are correctly set See Configuration page If the tray settings on the configuration page do not match the actual tray setting verify that the paper width switch PS106 SW801 or SW1 is operating correctly for the indicated tray See Printer switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs Lower the optional bin Note The stacker or stapler stacker LED blinks in amber The stacker or stapler stacker output bin is in the raised position Lower the output bin If this error persists replace the stacker or stapler stacker MANUALLY FEED lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press alternates with A job was sent that requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available Press Hc button for detailed information Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions If the requested paper size and type is installed in one of the trays print a Display message troubleshooting 339 Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE To continue press Y configuration page see Configuration page to see if the printer tray setting differs fro
366. ocations other than those specified in the jam message If the location of the jam is not obvious look first in the top cover area underneath the print cartridge When clearing jams be very careful not to tear the jammed media If a small piece of media is left in the printer it could cause additional jams If jams are a recurring problem see Persistent jams ET NOTE After you have cleared the jammed media you must open and then close the top cover to clear a jam message te Eve i O Jl Figure 7 7 Jam locations 1 Top cover and print cartridge areas 2 Optional envelope feeder 3 Tray areas tray 1 tray 2 and optional trays 4 Optional duplexer 5 Fuser area 6 Output areas top rear and optional stacker or stapler stacker 7 Optional stacker or stapler stacker ET NOTE Loose toner might remain in the printer after a jam and cause poor print quality Print quality will improve after a few pages are printed Paper path troubleshooting 365 366 Jam recovery This printer can automatically provide jam recovery You can use the jam recovery to automatically reprint jammed pages Select whether or not you want the printer to attempt to reprint jammed pages m AUTO Printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages m OFF Printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages ET NOTE To improve print speed and increase memory resources
367. odes 71 primary charging roller operations 153 print cartridges EconoMode 72 image formation operations 153 low 76 memory chip 160 out 76 part numbers 447 recycling 45 replacing 175 supplies status page 314 troubleshooting 380 warranty 41 print quality black pages 398 blank pages 399 blurred print 397 cleaning page 83 dark print 400 defect examples 382 distorted images 391 dots 385 dropouts 386 grey background 388 jams 378 light print 383 lines 387 396 397 media problems 377 379 print cartridge checks 380 repeating defects 390 400 settings 72 tonersmear 389 transparencies 378 troubleshooting 379 white lines 394 white spots 396 Print Quality menu 71 print cartridge motor removing 253 Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs Macintosh 17 printer drivers See drivers printer job language PJL 164 printer maintenance kit message Clearing 78 replacing 86 supplies status page 314 printer management language PML 165 Printer Status and Alerts 317 Printing menu 68 processor operations 163 ProRes resolution 72 PS driver features 14 operating system supported 13 PS error pages 70 PS font list printing 63 PS setting as printer language 75 Q quality black pages 398 blank pages 399 blurred print 397 cleaning page 83 dark print 400 defect examples 382 distorted images 391 dots 385 dropouts 386 grey background 388 jams 378 light print 383 lines 387 396 397 media problems 377 379 print cartridge checks 3
368. of 3 Dc controller LJ 4300 RG1 4237 040CN PCAs Duct fan 2 right side LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3338 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Duct fan 2 right side LJ 4300 RC1 0272 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Duplexing pendulum assembly RM1 0002 020CN Internal components 3 of 3 E ring XD9 0232 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 E ring XD9 0232 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 E ring LJ4200 4300 XD9 0137 000CN Feed roller assembly E ring LJ4250 4350 Fan left LJ 4200 4300 Fan left LJ 4250 4350 XD9 0234 010CN RH7 1573 000CN RK2 0278 000CN Feed roller assembly Internal components 3 of 3 Internal components 3 of 3 Fan right LJ 4250 4350 RK2 0280 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Fan right LJ 4300 RH7 1577 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Feed assembly RM1 0025 040CN Electrical components Feed roller assembly also see Figure 8 11 Feed roller assembly RM1 0012 020CN Internal components 1 of 3 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Feed roller assembly Part number RM1 0012 020CN Table and page Feed roller assembly Flag paper feed sensor RC1 0060 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Flag paper sensing RC1 0209 000CN Internal components 2 of 3
369. oiddy S o mod 120 EUR j log xoddy seiq BulBieyo 1ejsueJ HEN IS 410 xoiddy Een xoiddy en xoiddy OQ seg Buidojeneq a 20 xoiddy aa seq oAneboaN Ov seiq Buidojaneq 7 oq seiq BuiBseyo Mewud Ov seiq BuiBreuo Arewug L 0 xoiddy FOIS 10sues nj Jaded fen umop a0e4 iagram et xoiddy 1 801Sd 10sues Jaded uenjep yun Bus CL Xoiddy F0 xoiddy JL 901Sd 10sues up jedeg Z O xoiddy gt OLSd 10sues eBed jo doy z 8 0 xoiddy Z0LSd 10sues ici s E d iming Uonejo peeds je LOIS plougjos dn yoid enesseo gt ae uonei0 peeds n4 S LOLNA L Ue Buijoog Ov 0709 OO Em Sa II SE 0 xosddy be L0 xoiddy et xoddy ei p Z O xoddy JO OW jeuueos S0 od Z o xoddy L Zo xoddy L0119 uoinjo 18jo1 pees E eo xoiddy LOLW 1030W uren ZOAN ZOO LOON LOGA oepiA dO L eBed jo doy L043 uoneu amp isep ueis Jud 05533 uoneufisep opges zud jeubis spuooes mun A NO YMS J9MOg HP LaserJet 4200 general t 7 Troubleshooting Figure 7 37 HP LaserJet 4200 general timing diagram 438 ZH LH 1ejeeu ee
370. olZ lal H HI Ee z gt E E His Ba gt gt E E T e T T a E a a c a xc c o m O fa B 5 Power supply 5 5 e m unit z T n z z amp lt 5 E ul z E E Be SS a cee pn 8 eee ee BN 5 Photosensitive s drum PS104 H m mm em L ooo Multi purpose tray pick up Face down roller delivery rollers HP LJ 4250 4300 4350 SE Pre transfer Registration roller LJ 4200 onl d PS102 PS103 Pressure roller Feed rollers Si CL101 Cassette feed roller Transfer charging roller Separation roller PS107 D PS101 LU Pick up arm Cassette pick up roller Liffting plate SW102 Cassette Figure 5 5 Printer paper pickup and feed block diagram Paper pickup and feed system 115 116 Pickup and feed block The pickup and feed system is divided into two blocks The pickup and feed block and the fuser delivery block O N 1 SO F Saat dei P Figure 5 6 Pickup and feed and fuser delivery block diagram 1 Fuser delivery block 2 Pick up and feed block The following printer functions take place in the pickup and feed block m Detection of media m Detection of media size m Detection of media entering the paper path from tray 1 or tray 2 m Lifting of the tray 2 paper plate m Prevention of multiple feeds m Correction of page skew For
371. oller PCA connectors see Dc controller connectors diagram Dc controller Laser driver PCA Host computer Fuser unit Scanner motor BD circuit 1 Switch r Sensors Fuser control circuit Solenoids Clutch Power supply unit Low voltage power supply circuit High voltage power supply circuit Fan 1 motor drive control circuit i Options Main motor Lifter motor Memory tag i Cope zm Ld Ke Cooling fan 1 j HP LJ 4250 4300 4350 only Drum motor HUET Fan 2 motor drive control Cooling fan 2 circuit 1 Figure 5 1 Dc controller control chart 5 Theory of operation Motor and fan control The HP LaserJet 4200 Series printers contain three dc brushless motors the main motor the lifter driver motor inside of the lifter driver assembly and a fan motor The main motor is used for image formation rotating the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge and paper pickup and feed The lifter motor raises the plate in the tray cassette The fan motor rotates the fan blades The HP LaserJet 4250 4300 and 4350 Series printers contain five dc brushless motors the main motor the print cartridge motor the lifter motor and two fan motors The main motor is used for paper pickup and feed The print cartridge motor rotates the photosensitive dr
372. ols the stapler stacker motor solenoids sensors and the stapler unit When the printer power is turned on the printer low voltage supply circuit supplies dc power to the stapler stacker The stapler stacker performs the power on sequence and enters the standby mode When the dc controller PCA sends a signal the stapler stacker driver PCA activates the motors and solenoids as needed to perform the staple and stack operation Stapler stacker feed and delivery The stapler stacker feed and delivery system consists of several feed rollers and guides that the stapler stacker motors and solenoids drive Sensors along the stapler stacker paper path detect the arrival and passage of media and confirm the position of the jogger guide The jogger guide helps to align the pages before stapling and dropping them into the delivery bin The stapler stacker has two modes The staple mode staples sheets together and drops them into the delivery bin The stack mode drops the sheets directly into the delivery bin without stapling them together Table 5 6 Stapler stacker components Component Purpose Motor Paddle motor M1101 m Rotates the paddle clockwise m Disengages the delivery roller counterclockwise Jogger motor M1102 Shifts the jogger guide m Widens the jogger guide clockwise m Narrows the jogger guide counterclockwise Feed motor M103 Rotates the feed and delivery rollers Stapler motor M1104 Rota
373. on essssssssesssseseeeeeee eene ener 149 Staple Jevel detechon cee eeeeeeeeeesceeaeaeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeenssanaeees 151 Stack mode feed and CelIVETY eee cece ee eetee eect eeete eee eeeeaeee eee taaeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeaas 151 Stapler stacker jam detection c eh ede edd e dde 152 Stapler stacker feed jam ssssssssssseee eene 152 Stapler stacker feed stationary jam 152 Stapler stacker delivery jam 4ueeeeeseiieeeseeeeieeeee esent nnt 152 Stapler stacker residual media am 152 Image formation System oot ette ege e de ER dd dae Ey ded ER ode rad d t det 153 Electrostatic latent image formation 155 Primary charging x cocer bere opaco sped since andesite 155 Writing the image sssseeseenene nemen ener nnne 155 Developing the Image cene eet EEEE 156 Transferring the image ssssssssseee enne eene nnns 157 Fusing the Image E 158 Cleaning the transfer charging roller and photosensitive drum 159 Print cartridge memory Chip 160 ge tru NEED E 161 PowerSave LJ 4200 4200L 4300 or Sleep LJ 4250 4350 Mode 161 Resolution Enhancement technology 162 cel Rm 162 INPUU Output D E M 162 Parallel interface enne nennen emere nnne 162 USB HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers oh 162 Embedded
374. on J1005 callout 1 Remove four screws callout 2 3 Reach inside the 1 500 sheet feeder and push the rear feed roller up into its raised position to disengage the roller lifting arm from the clutch gear 4 Remove the paper pickup drive assembly ET NOTE The top gear callout 3 is not captive when the paper pickup gear assembly is removed It can easily slide off of the shaft and be lost s ly Mi 300 Figure 6 132 1 500 sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the paper pickup drive assembly reach up inside the 1 500 sheet feeder and push the rear feeder roller up into its raised position Position the paper pickup drive assembly onto the chassis it should sit flush against the chassis and then lower the roller into its resting position This ensures that the feeder lever rests correctly on the clutched gear in the paper pickup drive assembly 6 Removing and replacing parts 7 Troubleshooting Chapter contents Chapter contents Introduction Troubleshooting process Troubleshooting tools Control panel menus Printer resets and power on modes Test pages Interface troubleshooting Display message troubleshooting Paper path troubleshooting Media transport problems Image formation troubleshooting Troubleshooting the stacker and the stapler stacker Printer component locations Accessory component locations
375. on roller removes any additional sheets and the media travels to the pre feed sensor PS102 The sheet then reaches the registration assembly where its skew is corrected The sheet advances through transfer separation and fusing stages passes through the delivery unit and is delivered to the output bin ET NOTE The 500 sheet feeder detects pickup and feed jams the same way the printer does See Jam detection 5 Theory of operation Dc controller PCA l Rr l uo uM NE i PRE SNS TRCL MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal PRE FEED DETECTION signal Drum motor LJ 4300 FEED ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE signal Main motor Pre transfer roller SE Registration arm VA ma a m H Feed roller OPPLVLSNS PS802 OPPSNS Feeder driver PCA Separation Liffting plate OPSIZESNS OPFEEDSI SW801 Figure 5 11 500 sheet feeder pickup and feed diagram Paper pickup and feed system 127 128 Printing from the 1 500 sheet feeder The paper feeder driver controls the 1 500 sheet feeder operation sequences An 8 bit microprocessor in the paper feeder driver controls the 1 500 sheet feeder sequences and the communication with the dc controller PCA The paper feeder driver drives the solenoid in response to the pickup command The paper feeder driver also reports t
376. on the dc controller PCA J88 J01 J71 J88 6 Pin connector Envelope feeder J72 J89 3 Pin connector Paper feed clutch J73 J90 10 Pin connector Tray 2 media size sensor Tray 2 paper sensor J77 8 Pin connector Control panel J91 7 Pin connector Accessory tray power connector J78 3 Pin connector Right side fan HP LJ J92 2 Pin connector Tray 2 pickup solenoid 4250 4300 4350 only J79 2 Pin connector Tray 1 pickup solenoid J93 2 Pin connector Tray 2 lifter motor J80 Power supply ribbon cable J94 4 Pin connector J81 Power supply ribbon cable J95 3 Pin connector Top cover sensor J83 12 Pin connector Scanner PCA J96 8 Pin connector Paper handling power connector J84 7 Pin connector Laser scanner PCA J97 2 Pin connector Print cartridge memory chip sensor J85 3 Pin connector Output bin full sensor J98 9 Pin connector Main motor J86 7 Pin connector print cartridge motor J99 6 Pin connector Power supply HP LJ 4250 4300 4350 only J87 12 Pin connector Tray 1 paper sensor Narrow media sensor Top of page sensor Paper feed sensor 174 6 Removing and replacing parts User replaceable parts The following sections discuss user replaceable parts Print cartridge 1 Open the control panel door Figure 6 3 Print cartridge 1 of 2 User replaceable parts 175 176 2 Firmly grasp the print cartridge and pull it up and out of the print
377. onal wire harnesses from the cable guide to gain access to the lifter drive assembly wire harness Figure 6 51 Tray 2 lifter drive assembly 1 of 3 227 228 3 Unhook the tension spring callout 3 at the lifter drive assembly remove one screw callout 4 and then slide the support plate callout 5 out of the printer Q s j A RK2 0272 Qt E NTSASO4L3 WADE IN JAPAN Kg TE 3N 13Nr 0 Figure 6 52 Tray 2 lifter drive assembly 2 of 3 6 Removing and replacing parts Main assemblies Rotate the top of the lifter drive assembly away from the printer to remove it from the printer ET NOTE You might have to remove some cable guides to easily remove the lifter driver assembly Am a OZI lt F RK2 Los a rrt i D wage IN JAM au C E 3N 1382 PTS Figure 6 53 Tray 2 lifter drive assembly 3 of 3 229 230 Dc controller PCA 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door Top cover See Top cover Right side cover See Right side cover Formatter cover See Formatter cover Formatter See Formatter assembly CAUTION The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Always perform service work at an ESD protected workstation If an ESD protected workstation is not available discharge body static by grasping the printer chassis before touching an ESD sensitive compon
378. ons CLOSE TOP COVER For help press DATA RECEIVED To print last page press Y The top cover is open or the top cover Switch SW101 is defective The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed When the printer receives another file the message should disappear 1 Press Herr button for information 2 Close the top cover 3 Replace the top cover switch SW101 See Printer switches and sensors Press Y SeLecT button to continue DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY XX For help press alternates with DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY XX Recommend move switch to STANDARD A tray has been loaded with media that is a standard size and the switch in the tray is set to custom 1 Press Hui button for detailed information 2 Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press Y A device failure has occurred on the specified drive 1 Printing can continue for jobs that do not require access to the disk drive 2 Press Y SeLecT button to continue 3 If the message persists remove and reinstall the EIO disk drive 4 Reinitialize the EIO disk 5 If the message persists replace the EIO disk drive DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example a command to download a file
379. ontroller PCA See Dc controller PCA 2 Release two tabs callout 1 that secure the cable guide to the chassis and then lift the cable guide off of the printer 5 A i CO v Figure 6 85 Main drive assembly 1 of 3 Pickup and feed assemblies 263 264 3 Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the flat cable guide tab callout 2 and then slide the guide upward to remove it g E ts Figure 6 86 Main drive assembly 2 of 3 6 Removing and replacing parts 4 Use needle nose pliers to release the lifting assembly spring callout 3 lift up the power switch rod and rotate it away from the chassis and then remove five screws callout 4 Figure 6 87 Main drive assembly 3 of 3 l 5 Grasp the main drive assembly and gently slide it straight away from the printer Pickup and feed assemblies 265 266 Registration assembly 1 Remove the following items e Main drive assembly See Main drive assembly e Tray 1 paper pickup assembly See Tray 1 paper pickup assembly Remove one e clip retainer callout 1 and then slide the registration roller drive gear callout 2 off of the shaft Remove one screw callout 3 Figure 6 88 Registration assembly 1 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts 4 Use the green handle located at the right edge of the registration plate to raise the registration roller plate and then remove five screws callout 4 ET NOTE Do not remove th
380. ooting A CAUTION HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch box products that do not have the correct surge protection These devices generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the formatter PCA This circumstance is not covered by the HP product warranty Computer direct connect parallel test After the printer is insalled verify communications by bypassing the Windows driver between the printer and the IBM compatible computer Type the following information at the MS DOS prompt C DIR gt LPT1 Enter for printing to parallel port 1 The printer should print a directory listing of the C directory You might need to press Y SELEcT or Menu button on the control panel to print the data that is in the buffer EIO troubleshooting If the printer contains an optional HP Jetdirect print server and you cannot communicate with the printer over the network verify that the print server is operating Print a configuration page see Configuration page If the Jetdirect card does not appear under Installed personalities and options on the configuration page reseat or replace the Jetdirect EIO card See the troubleshooting section of the HP Jetdirect Print Server Software Administrators Guide When the HP Jetdirect print server is installed correctly print a Jetdirect page this page automatically prints when a Jetdirect print server is installed and a configuration page is printed
381. ored in the printer Selecting this item prints all of the private jobs that are stored in the printer for that user after the correct PIN is typed NO STORED JOBS Indicates that no stored jobs are available to print or delete pu M M l ii 3 Operation Information menu The Information menu contains printer information pages that give details about the printer and its configuration Scroll to the information page that you want and then press Select button Item Explanation PRINT MENU MAP The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the printer control panel menu items For more information see Printing control panel menus PRINT CONFIGURATION The configuration page shows the current printer configuration If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed an HP Jetdirect configuration page will print out as well For more information see Configuration page PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE The supplies status page shows the levels of the supplies for the printer calculation of the number of pages remaining and cartridge usage information This page is available only if you are using genuine HP supplies For more information see Supplies status page PRINT USAGE HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only The usage page shows the quantity of pages printed as well as the paper sour
382. ormation eene enne erret rer nnn n nennen rennen nnn 46 Feoulatop Ez TIL a RR 47 Country region specific safety siatements eene nennen enne 49 Laser safety Statement s i pte tae e diede eben Fate i E eam EE Rite asd tad 49 Canadian DOC statement snina aaa RR RR ARRA QE AU ERC ARR AMERIN REPRE Od A uh E 49 Japanese VCCletatement sess ennemi nsns 49 Korean EMI st terment 21 oett pe deren GES dia a a oci a ee eq i 49 Finnish laser statement sss enne EAEAN EEEE EnEn nennen ees 50 2 Installation Chapter contents re ee IO Ree Eege EENS 51 Operating Emtec EUU 52 Site Uu 53 Software instalation E 54 3 Operation Chapter ee 55 Using er tele 56 Control panel ayout 22 5 i bd E xe Der a DERE RED dae a EDEN RD UR Re DER Red bua 56 Control panel lights isc sec 2 2 rrr trei aene d e te dnos eiue ge radares penne eeu 57 Controlspanel buttons tert ct ttn en tu ees be d tla Pa dca E Ada A EA 58 Using the printer Help EE 58 Settings and EECH 59 Setting the control panel display Language 59 entre Mer NIU EPI 60 Printing control panel mens 60 To print a control panel menu map 60 To change a control panel setting eene 61 amu EET 62 Inf rmation ua EE 63 Paper handlirig menu cic tee itr eee ee aede egeta vea et eue adt pud dau 64 Configure device men iie cere te cti tede Ete a de ate e bas Rd
383. ory DIMM The procedure for replacing a memory DIMM is the same as replacing a firmware DIMM See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only Display message troubleshooting 341 Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready For menus press Y The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example a command to download a file to a nonexistent directory 1 Printing can continue 2 Turn the printer off and then on to delete the message from the display 3 If this error persists a problem might exist with the software program RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready For menus press Y The RAM disk is full 1 Delete files and then try again or turn the printer off and then on to delete all the files on the RAM disk 2 If the message persists increase the size of the RAM disk by adding additional memory DIMMs RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready For menus press Y The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it To enable writing to the RAM disk turn off the write protection by using the device storage manager in the HP Web Jetadmin software RECEIVING UPGRADE A firmware upgrade is in progress AN CAUTION Do not turn the printer off un
384. ower supply shield e Unplug two cables callout 3 e Remove one screw callout 4 e Slide the thermistor sensor bar callout 5 to the right to release it and then lift the thermistor sensor bar away from the printer e Release the two fan locking tabs and then slide the fan out of its mounting bracket Y E y v XX vot e Figure 6 70 Main cooling fan 2 of 2 o d Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the fan the air must flow into the printer Verify Sr thatthe airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the printer CAUTION When you reinstall the fan do not apply too much pressure to the wire harness connectors when they are connected to the power supply Applying too much pressure might snap off the soldered connectors on the power supply Motors and fans 247 248 Cooling fan right side HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 Series printers only ET NOTE This fan is not installed in HP LaserJet 4200 4200L Series printers To remove the fan from the air duct complete the following steps To remove the fan and the air duct together see Removing the fan and the air duct together Removing the fan without removing the air duct 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door e Top cover See Top cover e Right side cover See Right side cover e Formatter cover See Formatter cover 2 Gently pry bac
385. owing sections describe the removal and repair of internal printer components Figure 6 35 Main assemblies 1 Duplexing pendulum assembly 6 Pickup drive assembly 2 Laser scanner assembly 7 Delivery assembly 3 Feed roller assembly 8 Fuser assembly 4 Drive assembly 9 Registration assembly 5 Lifter drive assembly 10 Tray 1 pickup assembly Main assemblies 209 210 Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only ET NOTE The HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series printers do not use firmware DIMMs Instead a firmware chip is soldered directly to the formatter in those printers Firmware upgrades may be performed via an RFU see Downloading a remote firmware update AN CAUTION The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Always perform service work at an ESD protected workstation f ESD 1 Remove the formatter cover See Formatter cover ET NOTE If possible print a menu map and a configuration page See Menu map and Configuration page Use the information on the these pages to restore any user set printer configuration options after you install the replacement DIMMs 2 Open the formatter door 3 Push the DIMM locking arms away from the DIMM to release it and then pull the DIMM out of the DIMM slot Figure 6 36 Firmware DIMM 6 Removing and replacing parts O4 Reinstallation tip The firmware DIMM must be installed in slot 1 formatter PC
386. panel settings EconoMode The EconoMode setting uses up to 50 less toner than standard mode printing by reducing the dot density However EconoMode does not extend the life of print cartridge components EconoMode which can be thought of as draft mode can be selected from the control panel print quality menu and through some software programs and printer drivers The default setting is OFF CAUTION HP does not recommend full time use of EconoMode If EconoMode is used full time it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge ET NOTE EconoMode does not affect print speed or memory usage or extend the life of the 5 print cartridge input output The following sections discuss the input and output features of the product Parallel interface The formatter receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface IEEE 1284 The I O provides high speed and two way communication between the printer and the host allowing the user to change printer settings and monitor printer status from the host computer The user can configure the HIGH SPEED item on the control panel The default setting YES makes it possible for the I O to run at the higher speeds that are supported by most newer computers When set to NO the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible with older computers The user can also configure the ADVANCED FUNCTIONS item The default setting ON
387. pe size sensor Envelope sensor Figure 5 15 Envelope feeder I O block diagram Envelope feeder pickup and feeding In the envelope feeder the envelope sensor PS901 detects the presence of envelopes and the envelope size sensor PS903 detects the width of the envelopes The envelope pick up motor M901 drives all of the rollers in the envelope feeder When the dc controller PCA sends a print command the main motor M101 begins to rotate After the main motor initial rotation phase is completed the scanner motor begins to rotate As the scanner motor rotates the envelope pick up motor M901 begins to rotate to drive the pickup roller feed roller and separation roller and an envelope is picked up The separation roller removes any additional envelopes and a single envelope travels to the printer The registration assembly corrects any skew The envelope travels through the printer paper path and is delivered to the output bin 132 5 Theory of operation Dc controller PCA Envelope feeder driver PCA gt gt NVELOPE SIZE DETECTION signal al MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal MON PRE FEED DETECTION signal PRE SNS DRIVE signal ESIZE SNS ENVELOPE MULTIPLE FEED DETECTION signal MF SNS TOP OF PAGE DETECTION signal TOP SNS ENVELOPE PICKUP MOTOR ENVELOPE DETECTION signi H Figure 5 16 Envelope fee
388. per pickup assembly drive gears are damaged or the assembly is defective Check the drive gears in the paper pickup drive assembly Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged See Paper pickup drive assembly The tray 2 pickup solenoid SL101 is damaged 1 Disconnect the connector for the tray pickup solenoid from the dc controller PCA location J92 2 Measure the resistance between the cable connectors 3 If the measured resistance is not approximately 160 ohms for the HP LaserJet 4200 4300 or 110 ohms for the HP LaserJet 4250 4350 replace the tray 2 pickup solenoid The tray 2 lifter drive assembly or the stack position sensor PS107 is defective Replace the lifter drive assembly See Tray 2 lifter drive assembly and or Printer switches and sensors The dc controller PCA is defective Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Dirty worn or deformed pick up roller cassette separation roller and cassette feed roller Clean the rollers if they are dirty Replace any worn or deformed rollers The cassette separation roller and the cassette feed rollare are to be replaced together Damaged gears in the cassette pick up drive unit Move the gears in the cassette pick up drive unit If the gears are not rotating correctly or are damaged or worn replace the cassette pick up drive unit 7 Troubleshooting Jams in tray 3 or tray 4 Table 7 11 Causes of tray 3 an
389. perations 106 153 life expectancies 88 locating 411 412 repetitive defects 400 replacing maintenance kit 86 transfer replacing 177 tray 1 pickup replacing 179 tray 2 feed replacing 182 tray 2 operations 119 S screwdrivers required 168 screws types of 170 self test 328 sensors 1 500 sheet tray 420 1 500 sheet tray operations 128 500 sheet feeder 417 500 sheet feeder operations 125 duplexer operations 134 envelope feeder operations 132 jam detection duplexer 136 jam detection envelope feeder 133 jam detection stacker 141 jam detection stapler stacker 152 jam detection trays 122 locating 413 pickup and feed operations 114 116 removing 268 296 stacker and stapler stacker 422 stacker operations 137 stapler stacker operations 142 separation pad locating 411 replacing 181 sequence of operations 105 serialnumber 8 service agreements 445 service approach 168 service ID 324 Service menu 323 setting up printer 52 settings cold reset 325 control panel changing 61 default control panel 59 drivers 15 restoring defaults 78 size specifications printer size paper 1 500 sheet tray specifications 28 500 sheet tray specifications 27 duplexer specifications 28 envelope feeder specifications 28 stapler stacker specifications 29 tray 1 specifications 26 tray 2 specifications 27 skew prevention operations 121 troubleshooting 376 391 skip disk load 328 Sleep mode formatter operations 161 power speci
390. perations 109 removing 245 Index troubleshooting 306 fasteners types of 170 FastRes resolution 72 FCC statements 43 features models 2 feed roller assembly diagrams and part numbers 478 feed rollers replacing tray 2 182 feed roller clutch CL101 removing 277 feeding operations 1 500 sheet tray 500 sheet feeder about 106 114 duplexer 134 envelope feeder 132 fuser delivery block 122 jam detection duplexer 136 jam detection envelope feeder 133 jam detection stacker 141 jam detection stapler stacker 152 jam detection trays 122 multiple feed prevention 121 skew prevention 121 stacker 137 stapler stacker tray1 117 tray 2 119 file directory printing 63 firmware updates DIMMs 164 210 downloading 91 FTP 93 HP LaserJet Utility 98 HP Web JetAdmin 100 LPRcommand 99 messages 101 troubleshooting UNIX 93 Windows local port 92 Windows network 93 fonts list printing 63 settings 70 form length settings 70 formatter operations 161 partnumbers 453 128 125 142 102 removing 211 replacing 213 testing 329 formatter cover removing 191 front cover removing 198 FTP firmware updates 93 fuser circuit operations cleaning 83 image formation operations 106 153 life expectancies 88 locating 410 modes 71 partnumbers 453 pickup and feeding operations 122 replacing 110 178 G grey background troubleshooting 388 H half self test functional check 381 hard disk file directory printin
391. ple cam 1 Side view Front view Figure 5 32 Staple operation 1 of 3 Stacker and stapler stacker 149 150 As staple cam 1 rotates it raises the staple press head plate 1 This forms the flat staple into a u shape While this is happening the staple arm raises the swing guide E iis Side view Front view Figure 5 33 Staple operation 2 of 3 As staple cam 2 rotates it raises staple press head plate 2 This pushes the staple up and through the media The staple arm raises the back end of the support base bringing its front end in contact with the staple legs that protrude through the media and folding the staple legs to complete the staple operation Side view Front view Figure 5 34 Staple operation 3 of 3 5 Theory of operation Staple level detection The stapler stacker driver PCA uses the staple detection switch to detect the presence and number of staples in the stapler unit A spring on the staple detection switch holds the staple detection flag in the raised position When this flag is fully raised the switch is open A slot is cut into the bottom of the staple cartridge If the staple cartridge is mostly full of staples the staples block the staple detection flag movement so that it cannot move to its raised position The staple detection switch is closed and the stapler stacker driver PCA determines that at least 70 staples remain in the cartridge
392. porting the current configuration of tray XX The tray switch is in the Custom position To change the media type press Y SeLect button Use 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button_ to scroll to the type and then press Y to select it To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal set the tray switch to the Standard position and adjust the media guides to the correct positions To change the media size to other sizes leave the tray switch in the Custom position adjust the media guides against the stack and close the tray Select the Paper Handling menu from the control panel Configure the size and media type for the tray 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action Unable to store job A job cannot be stored because of a 1 Install additional memory in the printer memory disk or configuration problem or install a disk drive in the printer See lt JOBNAME gt Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only 2 Ifa disk drive is installed delete the previously stored print jobs to increase the disk storage space 3 If this error persists check the printer driver and program settings USE INSTEAD The printer is offering an alternative for the To use the alternative press Y SELECT print job button Or use A Ur Arrow button and Y ae SUBE Down Arrow button to scroll to any SIZE alternative selec
393. pressure level HP LaserJet 42507 Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4250 Lwag 6 9 Bels A 69 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4250 Lwag 4 0 Bels A 40 dB A Sound pressure level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4250 Loam 55 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4250 Values subject to change See http www hp com support 1j4250 for current information Configuration tested HP LaserJet 4250 Base printer simplex printing with A4 paper size HP LaserJet 4250 speed is 43 ppm for A4 size N w Lpam 26 dB A Table 1 20 Sound power and pressure level HP LaserJet 43007 Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4300 Lwag 7 0 Bels A 71 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4300 Lwag 4 Bels A 38 dB A Sound pressure level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4300 Loam 56 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4300 Values subject to change See http www hp com support 1j4300 for current information Configuration tested HP LaserJet 4300 Base printer simplex printing with A4 paper size HP LaserJet 4300 speed is 45 ppm for A4 size N w Loam 27 dB A Table 1 21 Sound power and pressure level HP LaserJet 4350 Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4350 Lwag 7 1 Bels A 71 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4350 Lwag 3 8 Bel
394. program or printer driver Program and printer driver settings override control panel settings ECONOMODE OFF ON Use this item to turn EconoMode ON to save toner or OFF for high quality EconoMode creates draft quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page E NOTE Itis best to turn EconoMode on or off in the program or printer driver Program and printer driver settings override control panel settings 3 Operation Item Values Explanation A CAUTION HP does not recommend full time use of EconoMode If EconoMode is used full time it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge TONER 1 to 5 3 Lighten or darken the print on the page by setting the toner density Select a setting ranging from 1 light to 5 dark DENSITY The default setting of 3 usually produces the best results E NOTE Itis best to change the toner density in the program or printer driver Program and printer driver settings override control panel settings SMALL PAPER MODE NORMAL Select SLOW to prevent jams when printing on narrow HP LaserJet 4250 4350 media as the part of the fuser rollers that do not make only SLOW contact with the media swell up which can cause wrinkles AUTO HP LaserJet OFF Clean the fuser automatically by using this feature This 4250 4350 only setting is unavailable if an optional duplexer is installed I
395. r Family Paper Specification Guide The transparencies do not meet HP specifications Use HP approved transparencies for monochrome laserjet printers see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide The operating environment does not meet specifications Make sure that the printer is installed in an area that meets the environmental specifications See Operating environment The fuser roller is dirty and is lifting part of the image off of the paper The print cartridge is defective or nearly empty Process a cleaning page see chapter 4 Several pages might be required if the fuser is very dirty Replace the print cartridge The toner density setting is incorrect Open the print quality menu at the control panel and adjust the toner density setting See Print quality submenu Make sure that EconoMode is off 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 23 Drop outs and character voids continued Possible cause Recommended action s AaBbCc AabBbcc Aaabcc AaBbCc AaB cc Continued The fuser setting is incorrect for the media type The transfer roller is damaged has finger oils on its surface or is dirty or worn Open the configure device menu at the control panel and change the fuser mode setting or select another media type See Configure device menu Clean the transfer roller by using a dry lint free cloth Do not touch the transfer roller with
396. r PCA See Dc controller PCA Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action LOAD TRAY XX TYPE lt SIZE gt For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To use another tray press Y Tray XX is either empty based on the operation of the paper sensor or configured for a type and size other than that specified in the job 1 Press Herr button for detailed information Press A Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions Print a configuration page and verify that the tray settings are correctly set See Configuration page If the tray settings on the configuration page do not match the actual tray setting verify that the paper width switch SW102 SW801 or SW1 is operating correctly for the indicated tray See Printer switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press Tray XX is either empty based on the operation of the paper sensor or configured for a type and size other than that specified in the job No other tray is available Press Herr button for detailed information Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button t
397. r assembly e Replace the control panel cable See Control panel assembly e Replace the control panel assembly See Control panel assembly e HP Laserjet 4200 and 4300 Series printers only Replace the firmware DIMM See Firmware DIMM LJ 4200 4300 only e Replace the formatter See Formatter assembly 3 Ifthe engine test is not successful remove the formatter and attempt to perform the engine test again If the engine test is successful with the formatter removed replace the formatter See Formatter assembly If the test is not successful with the formatter removed replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 308 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting tools Press v SeLecT button or the Menu button to open the menus Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll through the menus that appear For more information about control panel menus see Control panel menus The high level menus appear in the following order RETRIEVE JOB a INFORMATION m PAPER HANDLING m CONFIGURE DEVICE a DIAGNOSTICS SERVICE Troubleshooting tools 309 310 Information pages 1 2 3 4 Press Y Se tect button or the Menu button to open the menus Press Y Down Arrow button to scroll to INFORMATION Press y to select INFORMATION Press Y to scroll to a listed information page The following pages are available e Menu map e Usage page e Configuration e PCLfontlist e
398. r better access to the remaining feed rollers To find the rollers look up into the inside of the opening that was created when you removed tray 2 huat SAMAR RAD PSSA DARA Figure 6 12 Tray 2 feed rollers 3 of 4 184 6 Removing and replacing parts 4 Pinch the blue latch on the left side of the feed roller two rollers are intslled here Slide the roller off of the shaft You might need to rotate the roller in order to pinch the latch Figure 6 13 Tray 2 feed rollers 4 of 4 Repeat the previous step for the remaining pickup roller l Ld Q Reinstallation tip When you install each of the rollers that you removed in steps 4 and Sr 5 make sure that it locks into place on the tabs that are on the drive gear User replaceable parts 185 Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 186 The following sections describe removal and replacement of the printer covers tray 1 and the rear output bin Figure 6 14 External components j ER 2 ER Ze ER ER EH A 2 E Rear accessory cover 2 Top cover 3 Control panel 4 Cartridge door 5 Left side cover 6 Front cover 7 Right side cover 8 Formatter cover 9 Rear output bin 10 Tray 2 extension cover 11 Duplexing acessory cover 6 Removing and replacing parts Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door E NOTE Accessory covers will not be in place if any installed accessories for
399. r button to continue alternates with Ready For menus pressY FLASH IS The file system device is protected and no 1 To enable writing to the flash memory new files can be written to it turn off the write protection by using the WRITE PROTECTED device storage manager in HP Web Jetadmin alternates with 2 Ready For menus pressY Press Y Select button to continue Incorrect The wrong personal identification number Type the correct PIN code After three PIN was typed incorrect PIN entries the printer returns to the Ready state INSERT OR CLOSE Tray XX must be inserted or closed before 1 Press HELP button for detailed the current job can be printed information TRAY XX For help press 4 Press A Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions If the error persists verify that the media size sensor PS102 SW801 or SW1 is operating correctly for the indicated tray See Printer switches and sensors 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs or 1 500 sheet feeder switches sensors solenoids and PCAs Verify that the sensor fingers inside the tray are engaging the tray sensor correctly Print a configuration page See Configuration page Display message troubleshooting 337 Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action If the tray settings on the configuration p
400. r on modes r 325 326 NVRAM initialization CAUTION Initializing the NVRAM resets the serial number the event log the page counts the EIO card and the embedded print server Initializing the NVRAM also resets service menu values to factory defaults Use the service menu to restore the serial number and page counts Also reconfigure any computers that print to this printer so that the computers can recognize the printer Initialize the NVRAM only when absolutely necessary In most situations use a cold reset rather than a NVRAM initialization to reset printer settings this will retain the values in the service menu ET NOTE Before performing a NVRAM initialization print a menu map and a configuration page see Menu map and Configuration page Use the information on the configuration page to reset any customer set printer configuration values that the NVRAM initialization procedure changes Make note of the total page count maintenance count and the serial number To initialize NVRAM 1 2 Turn the printer power off Remove any installed accessories for example a stapler stacker For HP Laserjet 4200 4300 Series printers Hold down v Select button and then turn the printer power on For HP Laserjet 4250 4350 Series printers Turn the printer power on and then hold down v SeLecT button when the memory count begins Continue holding down v until all three printer control panel lights flash once an
401. r stacker 152 jam detection trays laser scanner 112 memory 163 motors and fans 109 ports 162 power supply 110 sequence of 105 stacker 137 stapler stacker ordering parts 444 supplies 446 orientation setting default 70 OS 2 drivers 14 122 142 517 out oftoner 76 output bins locating 9 paper path test 80 369 removing rear 203 settings 69 output quality black pages 398 blank pages 399 blurred print 397 cleaning page 83 dark print 400 defect examples 382 distorted images 391 dots 385 dropouts 386 grey background 388 jams 378 light print 383 line 387 396 397 media problems 377 379 print cartridge checks 380 repeating defects 390 400 settings 72 tonersmear 389 transparencies 378 troubleshooting 379 white lines 394 white spots 396 output delivery assembly locating 410 removing 214 over temperature protection circuit fuser 111 overcurrent overvoltage protection 111 overlay control panel override A4 letter 69 ozone specifications 44 204 P page orientation setting default 70 paper 1 500 sheet tray specifications 28 500 sheet tray specifications 27 curled troubleshooting 393 custom size 69 default size setting 68 518 duplexer feeding operations 134 duplexer specifications 28 fuser modes 71 heavy 37 jam detection operations duplexer 136 jam detection operations stacker 141 jam detection operations stapler stacker 152 jam detection operation
402. ral resources The automatic duplex feature is available only for models that include a built in duplexer Manual duplexing is available for all models Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product s life 1 Product information HP LaserJet printing supplies In many countries regions the printing supplies for example print cartridge and fuser can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Environmental Program This easy to use and free take back program is available in more than 30 countries regions Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information Since 1992 HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge in 8696 of the world market where HP LaserJet supplies are sold Postage paid and pre addressed labels are included within the instruction guide in most HP LaserJet print cartridge boxes Labels and bulk boxes are also available through the Web site at http www hp com recycle More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2002 through the HP Planet Partners supplies recycling program This record number represents 26 million pounds of print cartridge materials that were diverted from landfills Worldwi
403. ration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current upgrade Type the word exit at the command prompt to close the command window 4 Maintenance Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 The rfu file can be sent directly to the printer by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS DOS window 1 Ata command prompt type copy b FILENAME lt PORTNAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the rfu file including the path and lt PORTNAME gt is the name of the appropriate printer port such as LPT1 For example C V copy b c 4250fw rfu Ipt1 ET NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C XV copy b c My Documents 4250fw rfu lpt 2 Press Enter A message appears on the control panel See Printer messages during firmware update At the end of the upgrade process Ready appears on the printer control panel 3 Atthe command prompt type the word exit to close the command window Remote firmware update through a Windows network If the printer is shared on a Windows network follow these instructions 1 From a command prompt or in an MS DOS window type copy B FILENAME V COMPUTERNAME lt SHARENAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file including the path lt COMPUTERNAME gt is the name of the computer from which the printer
404. recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications Clean the contacts if they are dirty If the problem persists after cleaning or if the contacts are damaged or deformed replace the contacts The laser scanner assembly is defective The high voltage circuit is defective Repetitive defects troubleshooting Replace the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply Defects on printer rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page corresponding to the circumference of the roller that is causing the defect Measure the distance between defects that recur on a page Use the following table or the repetitive defect ruler to determine which roller is causing the defect To resolve the problem try cleaning the roller first If the roller remains dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged replace the part that is indicated in Table 7 40 Repetitive defects CAUTION Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers Instead rub the roller with lint free paper If dirt is difficult to remove rub the roller with lint free paper that has been dampened with water Table 7 40 Repetitive defects Roller Distance between defects Replacement part Primary charging roller 37 7 mm 1 5 inches Print cartridge Developer roller 62 8 mm 2 5 inches Print cartridge Fuser 75 0 mm 2 95 inches Fuser 94 0 mm 3
405. rectly Change the paper type setting The media is too heavy for the printer and the toner is not fusing to the media The transparencies are not designed for adequate toner adhesion or high fusing temperatures Use only transparencies that are designed for monochrome HP LaserJet printers The moisture content of the paper is uneven too high or too low Use paper from a different Source or from an unopened ream of paper Some areas of the paper reject toner Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper Make sure that the paper has not been previously used The letterhead is printed on rough paper Use a smoother photocopy grade paper If this solves the problem consult with the letterhead supplier to verify that the paper used for the letterhead meets the specifications for this printer The paper is excessively rough Use a smoother photocopy grade paper The paper has a coating that is not compatible with the electrophotographic process The letterhead or other preprinted media was printed with inks or other materials that can contaminate the fuser which causes offset or repeated images The use of some carbonless papers contaminates the printer and can cause printer damage if used repeatedly Image formation troubleshooting 377 378 Overhead transparency defects Overhead transparencies can show any of the image quality problems that appear in other types of media in addition to defects that are speci
406. replaceable parts Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin Control panel display Main assemblies Motors and fans Pickup and feed assemblies Sensors and switches Solenoids and clutches Accessories 167 Removal and replacement strategy This chapter describes how to remove replace and reassemble the major assemblies of the printer Replacement is generally the reverse of removal To identify the left side and right side of the printer face tray 1 on the front of the unit A WARNING Unplug the power cord from the power outlet at the wall receptacle before attempting to service the product If you do not follow this warning severe injury can result Certain functional checks during troubleshooting might require that power is supplied to the product However all power should be turned off and the product should be unplugged when you remove any product assemblies or components Never operate or service the printer when the protective cover is removed from the laser scanner assembly The reflected beams although invisible can damage your eyes A CAUTION The product contains components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Always perform service work at an ESD protected workstation If an ESD protected workstation is not available discharge body static by grasping the printer chassis before touching an ESD sensitive component Ground the printer chassis before servicing the prod
407. return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem and print samples or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF Me RCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU Print Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement 41 Service approach Repair of the printer normally begins by using the printer s internal diagnostics in conjunction with the troubleshooting procedures that are described in chapter 6 When a faulty part is located repair is generally accomplished by assembly level replacement of field replaceable units FRUs listed in chapter 7 Some mechanical assemblies might be repaired at the subassembly level Hewlett Packard Company
408. rinter maintenance kit see Ordering parts and supplies SLEEP MODE ON OFF Turns Sleep Mode on or off Using Sleep mode offers the following advantages x Minimizes the amount of power that the printer consumes when it is idle m Reduces wear on electronic components in the printer turns off the display backlight but the display is still readable The printer automatically comes out of Sleep mode when you send a print job press a printer control panel button open a tray or open the top cover You can set how long the printer remains idle before it enters sleep mode See the SLEEP DELAY information in the System Setup submenu Control panel menus 79 80 Diagnostics menu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only Administrators can use this submenu to isolate parts and to troubleshoot jam and print quality issues The section that follows lists the settings and possible values In the Values column the default value for each setting is the one that has an asterisk next to it Item Values Explanation PRINT EVENT LOG There is no value to select Press Y Select button to generate a list of the 50 most recent entries in the event log The printed event log shows error number error code page count and description or personality SHOW EVENT There is no value to select Press v Sriecr button to scroll through the contents of the event log at the printer control panel which lists up
409. rnal components 3 of 3 XB2 7300 607CN Screw w washer m3x6 Internal components 1 of 3 XB2 7400 606CN Screw w washer m4x6 Electrical components 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 22 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Table and page XB4 7300 809CN Screw tapping truss head m3x8 Internal components 2 of 3 XB4 7400 809CN Screw tapping truss head m4x8 Internal components 2 of 3 XB4 7401 007CN Screw tapping pan head m4x10 Covers XB4 7401 007CN Screw tapping pan head m4x10 Internal components 1 of 3 XB4 7401 007CN Screw tapping pan head m4x10 Internal components 2 of 3 XB4 7401 007CN Screw tapping pan head m4x10 Internal components 3 of 3 XB4 7401 605CN Screw tapping truss head m4x16 Internal components 3 of 3 XD9 0137 000CN E ring LJ4200 4300 Feed roller assembly XD9 0232 000CN E ring Internal components 1 of 3 XD9 0232 000CN E ring Internal components 2 of 3 XD9 0234 010CN E ring LJ4250 4350 Feed roller assembly Numerical parts list 511 512 8 Parts and diagrams Index Symbols Numerics 1 500 sheet feeder registration settings 71 1 500 sheet tray component locations 418 control PCA removing 294 door removing 290 feed rollers removing 288 jams 373 lifter drive assembly removing 297 media size detection 119 media size sensor removing 296 paper pickup drive assembly removing 300 par
410. rned off and the rollers do not rotate and a jam message appears on the control panel display 5 Theory of operation Printer pickup delay jam from tray 1 If the top of page sensor PS103 does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after the media is picked up the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a pickup jam has occurred ET NOTE The printer attempts to pick up the media several times before determining that a pickup jam exists The number of pickup attempts depends on the source for example four attempts occur if tray 1 is the source The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages or Numerical printer messages Printer pickup delay jam from tray 2 If the pre feed sensor PS102 does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after the media is picked up the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a pickup jam has occurred ET NOTE The printer attempts to pick up the media several times before determining that a pickup jam exists The number of pickup attempts depends on the source for example four attempts occur if tray 1 is the source The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical pri
411. ront of a duplexed page This item appears only if an optional duplexer is installed and enabled Set the X1 SHIFT first m Y SHIFT Registration of the image on the paper from top to bottom as the paper lies in the tray FUSER MODES PLAIN Use this item to configure the fuser mode associated with each paper type PREPRINTED Change the fuser mode only if you are experiencing LETTERHEAD problems printing on certain media types After you select a type of media you can select a fuser mode that is available TRANSPARENCY for that type The printer supports the following modes PREPUNCHED NORMAL Used for most types of paper LABELS HIGH 2 Used for textured paper that has a special or rough finish BOND HIGH 1 Used for rough paper RECYCLED LOW LJ 4200 4300 or LOW 1 LJ 4250 4350 Used for lightweight media Use this mode if you are having problems with curled paper COLOR LIGHT 60 75 G M2 CARDSTOCK LOW 2 LJ 4250 4350 only Used for transparencies Control panel menus 71 72 Item Values Explanation ROUGH ENVELOPE A CAUTION Do not change the fuser mode for transparencies Failure to use the LOW 2 setting while printing transparencies can result in permanent damage to the printer and fuser Always select Transparencies as the Type in the printer driver and set the tray type at the printer control panel to TRANSPARENCY When selected RESTORE MODES resets the fuser mode for each media
412. roubleshooting process so that the control panel display can be used to help locate printer errors If problems with the power on check perisist refer to table Table 7 2 Power on defect or blank display Table 7 2 Power on defect or blank display Problem Action The power cord is not plugged into the Make sure that the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall receptacle and wall receptacle and connected to the connected to the printer printer The correct voltage power is not Measure the voltage at the outlet If necessary plug the power cord into another available circuit outlet The power switch is off Set the switch to the on position You should hear the switch toggle If the front right side cover has been removed recently make sure that the rod connecting the power supply switch moves as you toggle the switch See the reinstall note in Right side cover If the printer still does not turn on the power switch might be defective 1 Remove the power supply 2 Measure the resistance between the two terminals of the power switch SW1 by applying the tester probes to the terminals The resistance must be low under 1 KW when the power is turned on and high over 6 MW when the Switch is turned off 3 Replace the power supply assembly if necessary The overcurrent overvoltage detection Wait for more than two minutes before turning the printer back on circuit is activated A fuse is blown
413. rrespond with the type of media that PLAIN is currently loaded in tray 1 PREPRINTED ANY If both the type and size for tray 1 are set to ANY the printer will pull LETTERHEAD media from tray 1 first if media is loaded in the tray TRANSPARENCY A type other than ANY The printer PREPUNCHED does not pull from this tray unless the LABELS type or size of the print job matches the type or size that is loaded in this tray BOND RECYCLED COLOR LIGHT 60 75 G M2 CARDSTOCK 164 200 G M2 ROUGH ENVELOPE TRAY 2 SIZE LETTER Use this item to set the value to correspond with the media size that is LEGAL currently loaded in tray 2 A4 EXECUTIVE A5 B5 ISO CUSTOM TRAY 2 TYPE ANY Use this item to set the value to correspond with the type of media that is currently loaded in tray 2 Control panel menus Item Values PLAIN PREPRINTED LETTERHEAD TRANSPARENCY PREPUNCHED LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR CARDSTOCK gt 64 g m2 ROUGH Explanation TRAY N TYPE ANY PLAIN PREPRINTED LETTERHEAD TRANSPARENCY PREPUNCHED LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR CARDSTOCK gt 64 g m2 ROUGH Use this item to set the value to correspond to the type of media currently that is loaded in the specified tray where N is the number of the tray This item appears only if an optional tray is installed TRAY N SIZE LETTER LEGAL A4 Use this item to set the value to correspond with the media size that is currently loaded i
414. rrupted The printer recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update Download the file again and send the new file to the printer Download the file from http www hp com go lj4200 firmware http www hp com go ljA250 firmware http www hp com go lj4300 firmware or http www hp com go lj4350 firmware The RFU file contains the wrong printer The printer recognizes the model mismatch and rejects the update Download the model correct file and send it to the printer Download the file from http www hp com 90 1j4200 firmware http www hp com go lj4250 firmware http www hp com go 1j4300 firmware or http www hp com go lj4350 firmware The upgrade is interrupted See Troubleshooting a firmware update A flash hardware failure occurred The device might have a hardware failure 4 Maintenance 5 Theory of operation Chapter contents e introduction e General descriptions e Paper pickup and feed system e Stacker and stapler stacker e Image formation system e Formatter system Chapter contents Introduction This chapter presents an overview of the relationships among major components in the printer It 104 also provides a general description of the following topics Basic operation of the printer Power supply Laser scanner assembly Image formation Paper pickup and feeding 500 sheet feeder operation 1 500 sheet feeder operation Envelope feeder
415. rs to gently pry the paper guide slide pin hinges out of the hinge slots on the front cover to release the pins Figure 6 26 Front cover 1 of 2 6 Removing and replacing parts 3 Slide the front cover toward the right side of the printer to remove it Figure 6 27 Front cover 2 of 2 si Q Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the front cover the door stop pin must be installed inthe stop receptacle on the door so that the door opens and closes correctly Covers tray 1 and the rear output bin 199 200 Tray 1 1 Remove the front cover See Front cover 2 Open tray 1 3 Firmly pull both sides of the tray 1 sensor arm cover down to release it from the shaft r Figure 6 28 Tray 1 1 of 3 a Reinstallation tip After reinstalling the tray 1 sensor arm cover verify that the sensor Sr arms move freely Hint Before you complete step 4 examine the position of the return spring at the right side of the tray The return spring must be positioned correctly upon reinstallation When reinstalling the tray 1 paper guide hook the short end of the return spring in the small notch located below the right side hinge pin receptacle 6 Removing and replacing parts 4 While holding the return spring callout 1 rotate the paper guide down to release the left paper guide hinge callout 2 Figure 6 29 Tray 1 2 of 3 Q Hint Tape the return spring in place on tray 1 so that you will not lose it
416. rtridge contains fewer than 70 staples or a STAPLER OUT OF STAPLES message the staple cartridge contains 15 or fewer staples For more information see Staple level detection When the stapler runs out of staples jobs can be delivered to the stapler stacker if STAPLES OUT CONTINUE but they will not be stapled For more information see Stapler stacker submenu To load staples 1 Turn the stapler unit on the right side of the stapler stacker toward the front of the printer until the unit clicks into the open position Grasp the blue staple cartridge handle and pull the cartridge out of the stapler unit 2 Insert the new staple cartridge into the stapler unit and rotate the stapler unit toward the rear of the printer until the unit snaps into place Figure 4 5 Loading staples in the staple cartridge stapler stacker only 4 Maintenance Downloading a remote firmware update A remote firmware update RFU can be downloaded from the following Web sites http www hp com go lj4200 firmware http www hp com go lj4250 firmware http www hp com go lj4300 firmware or http www hp com go lj4350 firmware Downloading the new firmware to the printer The printer can receive an RFU update to a printer as long as it is in a Ready state The printer waits for all of the I O channels to become idle before performing the update ET NOTE The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random access memory N
417. rude into the print cartridge cavity Clean the springs if they are dirty Replace the springs if they are damaged or missing No drum ground path exists When no drum ground path exists the drum cannot discharge The negative charge on the drum repels toner and leaves a nearly white page possibly with bubbled print Check the drum ground that runs from the contact point in the center of the print drum The high voltage circuit is defective The laser scanner cable is defective Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply Low level signals that are exchanged between the laser scanner assembly and the dc controller PCA might be affecting the laser output Replace the laser scanner cables Image formation troubleshooting 399 400 Table 7 39 AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Possible cause The toner density setting is incorrect Recommended action s Open the print quality menu at the control panel and adjust the toner density setting See Print quality submenu The print cartridge drum is close to the end of its expected life Replace the print cartridge The media does not meet specifications or is not stored correctly The high voltage contact to the power supply is poor 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 2 Check the media for type and quality Replace the media and advise the customer to use the HP
418. s Hz button for detailed sensor has been active for longer than a information jam in output device specified time 2 Press 4 Up Arrow button and V For help press Down Arrow button to step through the instructions NOTE The stacker or stapler stacker LED blinks in amber 3 Open the jam access door and remove all of the pages Close the access door 4 If this error message persists replace the stacker or stapler stacker 13 12 10 A page did not arrive at the stacker or 1 Press ier button for detailed stapler stacker paper inlet sensor in the information jam in output device specified time 2 Press 4 Ur Arrow button and V For help press Down Arrow button to step through the instructions NOTE The event log records this error message as 13 12 0A 3 Open the jam access door and remove all of the pages Close the access door NOTE The stacker or stapler stacker LED blinks in amber 4 Verify that the output bin deflector in the printer is operating correctly 5 If this error message persists replace the stacker or stapler stacker 13 12 11 A jam was detected when the stacker or 1 Press Hz button for detailed stapler stacker power was turned on information jam in output device A 2 Press A Up Arrow button and Y For help press Down Arrow button to step through the instructions NOTE The event log records this error message as 13 12 0B 3 Remove all of the pages from the output bin NOTE The sta
419. s A 38 dB A Sound pressure level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing HP LaserJet 4350 Loam 57 dB A Ready HP LaserJet 4350 Values subject to change See http www hp com support 1j4350 for current information Configuration tested HP LaserJet 4350 Base printer simplex printing with A4 paper size HP LaserJet 4350 speed is 52 ppm for A4 size N w Specifications Lpam 26 dB A 2 wo 24 Print speed specifications Table 1 22 Print speed specifications Printer model Letter A4 HP LaserJet 4200 35 ppm 33 ppm HP LaserJet 4200L 30 ppm 33 ppm HP LaserJet 4250 45 ppm 43 ppm HP LaserJet 4300 45 ppm 43 ppm HP LaserJet 4350 55 ppm 52 ppm Operating environment Table 1 23 Temperature and humidity Environmental HP LaserJet 420 HP LaserJet 420 HP LaserJet 425 HP LaserJet 430 HP LaserJet 435 condition 0 OL 0 0 0 Printing temperature 10 to 32 C 50 10 to 32 C 50 15 to 32 5 C 10 to 32 C 50 15 to 32 5 C printer and print to 90 F to 90 F 59 to 89 F to 90 F 59 to 89 F cartridge Storage standby 10 to 32 C 50 10 to 32 C 50 20 to 40 C 4 10 to 32 C 50 20 to 40 C 4 temperature printer to 90 F to 90 F to 104 F to 90 F to 104 F and print cartridge Printing relative 20 to 80 20 to 80 10 to 80 20 to 80 10 to 80 humidity Storage standby 20 to 80 20 to 80 10 to 90 20
420. s might not be available in Classic mode E Macintosh OS X V10 2 On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you want on the various pop up menus and then on the Presets pop up menu click Save as and type a name for the preset These settings are saved in the Presets menu To use the new settings you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print Open Print Center by selecting the hard drive clicking Applications clicking Utilities and then double clicking Print Center Click on the print queue On the Printers menu click Show Info Click the Installable Options menu NOTE Configuration settings might not be available in Classic mode E Macintosh OS X V10 3 Software components On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you On the File menu click Print Change the settings that you Open Printer Setup Utility by selecting the hard drive 16 Operating System To change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed want on the various pop up menus To change the print job default settings for example to turn on Print on Both Sides by default want on the various pop up menus and then on the Presets pop up menu click Save as and type a name for the preset These settings are saved
421. s trays 122 letterhead 32 lifter driver operations 120 multiple pages feeding troubleshooting 375 override A4 letter setting 69 pickup and feed operations 114 print quality troubleshooting 377 selecting 25 size detection operations 119 sizes supported 26 skew prevention operations 121 skew troubleshooting 376 391 specifications 25 30 stacker operations 137 stapler stacker operations 142 stapler stacker specifications 29 storing 30 tray 1 feeding operations 117 tray 1 types supported 26 tray 2 feeding operations 119 tray 2 specifications 27 tray selection 64 74 tray settings 64 troubleshooting 32 types not supported 38 types supported 31 usage page 63 weight equivalence table 32 wrinkled troubleshooting 375 394 Paper Handling menu 64 paper jams See jams paper path jams 374 stacker and stapler stacker 403 test 80 369 troubleshooting 365 369 paper feed assembly locating 409 removing 261 paper feed belt assembly removing 243 paper pickup drive assembly locating 409 removing 222 parallel communications settings 77 parallel port locating 11 operations 162 troubleshooting 331 part numbers 1 500 sheet tray 489 500 sheet feeder 484 accessories 449 assemblies 454 cables 452 covers 458 internal components 462 maintenance kits 87 print cartridges 447 Partner Portal 445 parts ordering 444 replacing 168 PCAs diagrams and part numbers 482 locating 415 stacker and stapler stacker PCL drivers
422. s applies to jams that occur before the media reaches the registration rollers Clean the registration roller assembly if it is dirty If it is dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the registration assembly See Registration assembly The paper feed assembly including clutch CL101 might be damaged This applies to jams that occur before the the media reaches the registration rollers Replace the paper feed assembly See Paper feed assembly The drive gears are damaged This can cause jams that occur before the media reaches the registration rollers Check the drive gears in the paper pickup and main drive assemblies Replace the pickup or main drive assemblies if the gears are damaged See Paper pickup drive assembly or Main drive assembly The pre feed PS102 top of page PS103 or fuser assembly PS108 sensor is defective Replace any defective sensors See Printer switches and sensors The dc controller PCA is defective Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Jams in the duplex path Table 7 13 Causes of duplex path jams Cause Solution The oblique rollers are worn or damaged Replace the duplexer The oblique roller drive gears are worn or damaged Replace the duplexer The reversing motor is defective The duplex feed guide is damaged Replace the reversing motor Replace the duplexer The duplexing unit
423. s section Failure to follow these instructions can result in a printer configuration downgrade For example an HP LaserJet 4350 printer could perform as an HP LaserJet 4250 1 Turn the printer off 2 Remove the formatter see Formatter assembly and replace it with the new formatter 3 Turn the printer on and then wait for five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state ET NOTE Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written The same five minute wait is required several times during this procedure Turn the printer off Turn the printer on again and then wait five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state Turn the printer off Remove the dc controller see Dc controller PCA and replace it with the new dc controller c N O CO Ff Turn the printer on and wait for five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state Turn the printer off 10 Turn the printer on again and then wait five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state 11 Print a configuration page to verify against original settings 12 Verify the printer series 4250 4350 Main assemblies 213 214 Output delivery assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies e Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door e Top cover See Top cover e Formatter cover See Formatter cover 2 Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the locking pin on the shaft lock callout 1 a
424. se megdel Segen eege dee a E dE deefe eeben dg 2 inel 3 ta model p 4 eile 5 GUAS ue E Mer ER 6 dtnsi lee EE 7 Model and serlal lu TEE 8 miele mM 9 Hardware ele En CET 9 Interface porte 222 2 cc cc eee ceeececeeccee cee ee eee ee eee ceaaeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeaeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeessesncaneeeaeeeeeseeees 11 eeleren EE Operating systems and printer components eee 12 Printer el 13 Drivers Included aic en ete tt aaa R papa aa aA 13 Additional drivers o eter t in e EENEG i dE 14 Select the correct printer driver for your nees 14 Printer driver Help 14 Using the printer drivers E 15 Software for Macintosh computers mener 17 gie 17 HP LaserJet Utility seen 17 Specificatl Bl M 18 Hardware specifications ssssssssssssssssseeseneeeeeere nennen nnne nennen nns 18 Electrical specifications TT 20 Acoustic emtssions enhn enne rrt nrnn sn nn nnne nnne nr EESE niens 22 Print speed specifications ccccccccccceeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeceeeceaeeeeeeeeesecanaeceeeeeeeeseeeesieaaeeeeeeteess 24 Operating environmuert eioeaced eiecti Eidos AAA EES AAR 24 Media SPCCIIICATONS C 25 General guidellnes surero eade coat ie eec ex b oder atte du aded a
425. sembly 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 12 Main drive assembly Ref Internal components Description Main drive assembly LJ 4200 4300 Main drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 Arm cartridge release Part number RM1 0001 030CN RM1 1066 000CN RC1 0003 000CN 477 Figure 8 11 Feed roller assembly 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 13 Feed roller assembly Ref Description Feed roller assembly Clutch CL101 LJ 4200 4300 Clutch CL101 LJ 4250 4350 Gear 30t E ring LJ4200 4300 E ring LJ4250 4350 Part number RM1 0012 020CN RH7 5358 000CN RK2 0349 000CN RU5 0050 000CN XD9 0137 000CN XD9 0234 010CN Qty Internal components 479 GH A ON EN WV MAN A S A Q7 X On vi ON N IN A N 8 Parts and diagrams Figure 8 12 Tray 1 pickup assembly 480 Table 8 14 Tray 1 pickup assembly Ref Description Part number Qty Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0004 060CN 1 Tray 1 pickup assembly LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1097 000CN 1 1 Tray 1 RM1 0005 020CN 1 2 Separation pad RL1 0007 000CN 1 3 Solenoid tray 1 pickup LJ 4200 4300 RH7 5357 000CN 1 3 Solenoid tray 1 pickup LJ 4250 4350 RK2 0276 000CN 1 4 Roller pickup RL1 0019 000CN 1 Internal components 481 482 Figure 8 13 PCAs 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 15 PCAs Ref 1 1 1 not shown not shown not shown not shown not sho
426. sembly 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Connector duplexer LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4222 000CN Electrical components Connector duplexer LJ 4250 4350 VS1 7333 006CN Electrical components Control panel assembly LJ 4200 4300 RG1 4276 020CN Covers Control panel assembly LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1195 000CN Covers Cover assembly front RM1 0050 030CN Covers Cover assembly front 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 0273 070CN 1 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Cover assembly front 1 500 sheet feeder RM1 0273 070CN 1 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cover assembly right LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0046 000CN Covers Cover assembly right LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1076 000CN Covers Cover assembly top LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1081 000CN Covers Cover assembly top LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0049 000CN Covers Cover cartridge door LJ 4200 RM1 0047 020CN Covers Cover cartridge door LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1080 000CN Covers Cover cartridge door LJ 4300 RM1 0114 020CN Covers Cover duplexing LJ 4200 4300 RC1 0291 000CN Covers Cover duplexing LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3280 000CN Covers Cover envelope RC1 0320 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Cover fan connector RC1 0344 020CN Internal components 3 of 3 Cover formatter RC1 0288 000CN Covers Cover front upper 500 sheet feeder RC1 0486 020CN 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Cover inner front right RC1 0019 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Alphabetica
427. sheet feeder 2 of 2 RM1 0699 020CN Transfer roller LJ 4200 4300 Internal components 1 of 3 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 22 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Table and page RM1 1066 000CN Main drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 10 Main drive assembly Internal components 1 of 3 RM1 1066 000CN Main drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 Main drive assembly RM1 1067 000CN Laser scanner assembly LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 2 of 3 RM1 1070 000CN Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 9 Electrical components Internal components 1 of 3 RM1 1070 000CN Power supply assembly 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 Electrical components RM1 1071 000CN Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 also see Figure 8 9 Electrical components Internal components 1 of 3 RM1 1071 000CN Power supply assembly 220 240 V LJ 4250 4350 Electrical components RM1 1074 000CN Lifter drive assembly LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 1076 000CN Cover assembly right LJ 4250 4350 Covers RM1 1077 000CN Cover left LJ 4250 4350 Covers RM1 1080 000CN Cover cartridge door LJ 4250 4350 Covers RM1 1081 000CN Cover assembly top LJ 4250 4350 Covers RM1 1082 000CN Fuser 110 127 V LJ 4250 4350 Internal components 3 of 3 RM1 1083
428. sion door e Top cover See Top cover e Right side cover See Right side cover e Formatter cover See Formatter cover Gently pry back the two retaining tabs callout 1 and slip the anti static bar callout 2 off of them Rotate the anti static bar away from the printer remove it from the printer Unplug the fan cable from location J78 on the dc controller PCA and also unplug cables from locations J71 J72 J79 J87 J88 J89 and J91 on the dc controller PCA Unweave all of the cables from the cable guide callout 3 lOi Hint You might have to unplug connectors or release some wire harness retainer clips Sr to provide enough slack in the wire harnesses to unweave them easily from the harness guide Remove two screws callout 4 TM PS a d L Figure 6 73 Cooling fan and air duct HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series only 1 of 2 251 252 6 Lt the fan duct callout 5 while rotating the top of the fan duct away from the printer to remove it Figure 6 74 Cooling fan and air duct HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series only 2 of 2 S pe G NU o7 fiver Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the fan the air must flow into the printer Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the printer Verify that each harness connector on the dc controller PCA is fully seated These connectors can become partially unplugged when the harnesses are unwoven from the guide on
429. siq cz0LLTS prouejos dwers I ZOLLW 1010W 1ebBor a uonisod yem uonisod zuawu ije eoLLN 4010u1 pee RSR LOLLIN 1010W ejpped LOLLIS plouajos edd Eqn ZOLLSd 40sues uewjep sadeg oDed puz LOLLSd 10sues j9jui 1adeg puewwog eanoN uieAeg Figure 7 41 Stapler stacker timing diagram A1dd reu amp is AY3ANIA H3dvd ALS puooes ium sieded om Burdejs 10 yeyo Du e 442 8 Parts and diagrams Chapter contents Chapter contents Ordering parts and supplies Consumables and accessories Covers Internal components Accessories Alphabetical parts list Numerical parts list 443 Ordering parts and supplies This section contains information about how to order parts and supplies for this device Parts This chapter contains field replaceable unit FRU and accessory part numbers Replacement parts can be ordered from the HP Services Go to http www hp com go parts for information about ordering service parts in your area Go to http www hp com go partsinfo for the online HP service parts identification tool HP PartSurfer A CAUTION Use only the parts and accessories that have been specifically designed for this printer Order accessories from an authorized HP service or support provider or online at http www hp com ET NOTE Parts that have no item number or part num
430. sor PS108 does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specified period of time after it has detected the leading edge of the media the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a printer delivery wrap jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages or Numerical printer messages Printer delivery delay jams If the fuser delivery sensor PS108 does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specified period of time after detecting the leading edge of the media the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a fuser stationary jam has occurred The transport process stops and a 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display For more information about jam messages see Alphabetical printer messages or Numerical printer messages If the fuser delivery sensor PS108 detects the trailing edge paper out of the media within a specified period of time after it has detected the leading edge of the media the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA determines that a delivery jam has occurred However if the paper length that the top of page sensor PS103 detects does not match the media size that the printer expects from the pickup source this jam is ignored The top of page sensor PS103 determines the length of the page by measuring the time
431. ss Y ET NOTE Aloss of data will occur 2 Check the configuration of the EIO card and the host computer 3 If this error message persists replace the EIO card 22 PARALLEL I O The parallel buffer has overflowed during a 1 Press v Sciecr button to resume busy state printing BUFFER OVERFLOW 233 For help press E NOTE A loss of data will occur alternates with 2 Check the parallel I O configuration Set HIGH SPEED to NO and ADVANCED FUNCTIONS to OFF 22 PARALLEL I O 3 Replace the formatter PCA See BUFFER OVERFLOW Formatter assembly To continue press Y 40 EIO X BAD A connection with the card in EIO slot X 1 Press Y SetecT button to resume has been broken abnormally printing TRANSMISSION 23423 WEEN press E NOTE A loss of data will occur 2 Check that all of the cables are connected to the EIO ports and that the EIO board is seated properly 3 If possible print to another network printer to verify that the network is working properly 4 Check the configuration of the EIO card 5 If this error message persists replace the EIO card 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Recommended action Control panel message Description 41 3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY XX The media that is loaded is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray 1 If the incorrect size was selected cancel the job or press Herr button to g
432. ssory is installed Duplex Use this option to send the test page through the duplex path Page count Use this option to sets the number of test page copies to be printed The choices are 1 10 50 100 and 500 To perform a paper path test 1 2 ET Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down ArRow button to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll to PAPER PATH TEST and then press v Use 4 or Y to scroll through the available test options and then press v After the test options are selected use 4 or Y to scroll to PRINT TEST PAGE and then press v to start the test NOTE To test the stacker and stacker stapler paper path see Stacker paper path test and Stapler stacker paper path test 7 Troubleshooting Jams in tray 1 Table 7 9 Causes of tray 1 jams Cause Solution The pickup roller is dirty worn or damaged Clean the pickup roller If it is dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the pickup roller The separation pad is dirty worn or damaged The drive gears are damaged Clean the separation pad If it is dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the separation pad Check the drive gears in the tray 1 pickup assembly Replace the pickup assembly if the gears are damaged The tray 1 pickup solenoid SL 102 is defective 1 Disconnect the connector for the
433. st wrong grain direction m Use the rear output bin or short grain construction m Turn the paper stack over in the tray m Uselong grain paper m Store paper in a drier environment x Change the fuser mode See Print quality submenu ET NOTE Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low temperature inks such as those used in some types of thermography Do not use raised letterhead The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper Make sure that any colored media or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with the printer s temperature of 230 C 446 F for 0 05 second Avoid using media that has been damaged from being previously used in a printer or copier Do not print on both sides of envelopes transparencies or labels Paper weight equivalence table Use the following table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than U S bond weight For example to determine the equivalent of 20 Ib U S bond weight paper in U S cover weight locate the bond weight in row 3 second column and scan across the row to the cover weight in the fourth column The equivalent is 28 Ib 1 Product information Table 1 30 Paper weight equivalents U S U S bond U S text U S cover U S Bristol U S index U S tag Metric postcard weight Ib book weight Ib weight Ib weight Ib weight Ib weight g thickn
434. st computer or until the printer power is turned off The message Ready appears on the control panel display Initial rotation The period of time when the photosensitive drum is stabilized to prepare for printing Print The period of time from the initial rotation until the control system detects a page entering the printer the top of page sensor PS103 detects the page Last rotation The period of time from the completion of the print job until the main motor or drum motor in an HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 stops The final page of the job is delivered to an output bin and the transfer roller is cleaned If another print job is immediately detected then the printer returns to the initial rotation period If no print jobs are waiting then the printer returns to the standby period Control system overview The control system consists of the power supply and the dc controller PCA It controls the pickup and feed laser scanner and image formation systems The microprocessor on the dc controller PCA controls the printer operating sequence When the printer power is in the standby sequence see Table 5 1 Basic printer operating sequence the power supply supplies direct current power dc voltage to the dc controller PCA When the printer is in the standby sequence see Table 5 1 Basic printer operating sequence the microprocessor on the dc controller PCA sends signals to turn on and off various solenoids motors and other print
435. stinct toner image is present on the drum surface assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning cleaning conditioning writing and developing and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem If no image is present on the photosensitive drum perform the following check Drum rotation functional check The photosensitive drum located in the print cartridge must rotate in order for the print process to work The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly Use this procedure to determine whether the drum is rotating 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove the print cartridge 3 Mark the cartridge drive gear with a felt tipped marker Note the position of the mark 4 Install the print cartridge and close the top cover The start up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark on the gear 5 Open the printer and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3 Verify that the mark moved If the mark did not move inspect the main gear assembly to make sure that it meshes with the print cartridge gears If the drive gears function but the drum does not move replace the print cartridge ET NOTE This test is especially important if refilled print cartridges are in use Image formation troubleshooting 381 Image defect tables Compare a printed sample of the image quality to these defect tables in order to determine a remedy Table 7 19 Print quality ima
436. stration settings 71 Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS 46 media card stock 37 curled troubleshooting 393 duplexer feeding operations 134 envelopes 34 jam detection operations duplexer 136 jam detection operations envelope feeder 133 jam detection operations stacker 141 jam detection operations stapler stacker 152 jam detection operations trays 122 labels 36 letterhead 32 lifter driver operations 120 multiple pages feeding troubleshooting 375 pickup and feed operations print quality troubleshooting 377 selecting 25 size detection operations 119 sizes supported 26 skew prevention operations 121 skew troubleshooting 376 391 specifications 25 30 stacker operations 137 stapler stacker operations storing 30 transparencies 36 tray 1 feeding operations 117 tray 1 types supported 26 tray 2 feeding operations 119 tray settings 64 troubleshooting 32 types not supported 38 types supported 31 usage page 63 weight equivalence table 32 wrinkled troubleshooting 375 394 memory base 2 configuration page 312 NVRAM initialization 326 operations 163 part numbers 450 print cartridge 160 slots 163 Memory Enhancement technology MEt 164 menus control panel accessing 58 Configure Device 68 Diagnostics 80 UO 77 Information 63 map printing 60 311 Paper Handling 64 114 142 Index Print Quality 71 Printing 68 Resets 78 Retrieve Job 62 Service 323 settings changing 61 Stapler stacker 77 System Setup 7
437. suspect that the print cartridge is the source of the problem replace the print cartridge before troubleshooting image defects Use the following list to make sure that the print cartridge is still operable m Check the print cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or refilled m Inspect the cartridge for toner leaking through worn seals If the drum has been manually rotated it might have caused internal damage and toner spills can result ET NOTE Print cartridges are rated for 10 000 LaserJet 4250 4350 12 000 LaserJet 4200 18 000 LaserJet 4300 and 20 000 LaserJet 4250 4350 images at 5 coverage It is possible to wear out the photoconductive drum gears and the cartridge seals before TONER LOW appears on the control panel if average toner coverage is less than 5 See EconoMode m Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched Touching the drum contaminates the photosensitive surface and can cause spotting and defects during printing m Dark areas on the page might indicate that the drum has been exposed to light for too long If dark areas appear stop the printer and wait a few minutes This should eliminate most defective images If not placing the print cartridge in a dark environment for several days can restore some life to the drum EconoMode EconoMode creates draft quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page by up to 5096 A
438. t composition grain and moisture content are important factors affecting printer performance and output quality Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this manual can cause the following problems m Poor print quality m Increased jams m Premature wear on the printer requiring repair ET NOTE For best results use only high quality media such as HP brand paper and print media Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other brands Because they are not HP products HP cannot influence or control their quality To order HP quality papers and supplies go to http www hp com or visit your local HP authorized reseller It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines specified here and still not produce satisfactory results This might be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which Hewlett Packard has no control Before purchasing a large quantity of media make sure that it meets the requirements specified here and in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide Go to http www hp com support ljpaperguide for more information Always test media before purchasing a large quantity A CAUTION Using media that is outside HP specifications can cause problems for the printer requiring repair This repair is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements This section provides the following information abou
439. t Packard Company Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP LaserJet 4200 Series HP LaserJet 4200L Series and HP LaserJet 4300 Series printer Regulatory Model Number BOISB 0202 00 BOISB 0204 00 Model Number Q2425A Q3993A Q2431A Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 60950 1999 EN60950 2000 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 A2 EN 60825 1 1994 A11 A2 Class 1 Laser LED Product GB4943 2001 EMC CISPR 22 1997 EN 55022 1998 Class B EN 61000 3 2 1995 A14 EN 61000 3 3 1995 EN 55024 1998 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Issue 3 GB9254 1998 GB17625 1 1998 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 3 For regulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the marketing name or the product number s Bo
440. t ignores an installed EIO hard disk Self test 1 Turn the printer power off 2 For HP Laserjet 4200 4300 Series printers Hold down Setect button and then turn the printer power on For HP Laserjet 4250 4350 Series printers Turn the printer power on and then hold down v SeLecT button when the memory count begins 3 Continue holding down v until all three printer control panel lights flash once and then remain on This might take up to 10 seconds 4 Press 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button until SELF TEST is highlighted 5 Press v The printer continues the power on sequence and begins to continuously printing configuration pages 6 Press the Pause Resume button LJ 4200 4300 or the Menu button LJ 4250 4350 to exit the self test 7 Troubleshooting Test pages Test pages Printing test pages helps you determine whether or not the printer engine and the formatter are functioning Engine test page To verify that the printer engine all printer components except the formatter formatter DIMMs EIO products and the stacker or stapler stacker is functioning print an engine test page Use a small non metallic pointed object to depress the test page switch which is located on the right side of the printer callout 1 Figure 7 5 Engine test page switch The test page should have a series of vertical lines The test page prints from the last tray that you printed from However if the printer has be
441. t media m Supported sizes and weights of media m Supported types of paper Media specifications 25 m Labels Guidelines for using paper Paper weight equivalents m Overhead transparencies Envelopes m Card stock and heavy paper Supported media weights and sizes This section contains information about the sizes weights and amount of paper and other print media that each tray supports Supported media specifications tables Table 1 24 Tray 1 supported sizes and weights all models Size Dimensions Weight Capacity Letter 216 x 279 mm 60 to 200 g m 16 to 53 Ib 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib 8 5 x 11 inches paper A4 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 inches Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 3 x 10 5 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 inches 8 5 x 13 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 inches Executive JIS 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches Double postcard JIS 148 x 200 mm 5 8 x 7 9 inches 16K Custom 197 x 273 mm 7 8 x 10 8 inches Minimum 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches Maximum 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches ET NOTE For best results with custom media use heavier weight media Lighter basis weights yield less consistent results For additional information about using custom media see Media specifications Envelope Commercial 10 105 x 241 mm 4 1 x 9 5 inches 75 to 105
442. t not be picked up properly from the tray The print media has rough or jagged edges Replace the media The print media is perforated or embossed The printer supply items have reached the end of their useful life If the media does not separate easily you might need to feed single sheets from tray 1 Check the printer control panel for messages that prompt you to replace supplies or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies The print media was not stored correctly Replace the print media The media should be stored in its original packaging and in a controlled environment Paper path troubleshooting 367 368 Persistent jams If jams occur repeatedly use the information in this section to diagnose the root cause of the problem The tables in this section list possible causes and recommended solutions for jams in each area of the paper path The information is listed in the order in which you conduct the investigation In general items at the beginning of the list are relatively minor repairs Items at the end of the list are more significant repairs Basic troubleshooting for persistent jams The basic troubleshooting process for jams consists of the following steps 1 Gather data 2 Identify the cause of the problem 3 Fix the problem Data collection To troubleshoot jams gather the following information m The exact error code that appears on the control panel
443. t numbers 489 pickup and feed operations 114 128 printing from 74 rear cover removing 291 right side cover removing 292 separation roller removing 288 wiring diagram 431 1200 dpi resolution 72 300 dpi resolution 72 500 sheet feeder component locations 416 control PCA removing 281 custom size settings 69 jams 373 lifter drive assembly removing 282 media size detection 119 media size sensor PS101 removing 269 models including 2 paper pickup drive assembly removing 283 part numbers 484 Index pickup and feed operations 114 125 printing from 74 registration settings 71 right side cover removing 278 rollers removing 278 wiring diagram 430 600 dpi resolution 72 A A4 paper settings 69 accessories covers removing partnumbers 449 specifications 19 acoustic emissions specifications 22 adhesive labels See labels alerts 315 317 Apple Macintosh See Macintosh AppleTalk setting 78 assembly locations 454 Attention light 57 Auto Cleaning Page 73 85 auto continue setting 75 187 B base model features 2 battery specifications 45 bidirectional communication operations 162 settings 77 troubleshooting 331 bins output locating 9 paper path test removing rear settings 69 black pages troubleshooting blank pages troubleshooting 80 369 203 398 399 blurred print troubleshooting 397 buttons control panel 56 58 C cabinet stand unlocking 172 cables part numbers 452 capacities trays 26 capa
444. t use media that is heavier than 200 g m 53 Ib in tray 1 or 120 g m 32 Ib in other trays Paper that is too heavy might cause misfeeds stacking problems jams poor toner fusing poor print quality or excessive mechanical wear The stacker and stapler stacker do not support card stock AN CAUTION Do not use the duplexer to print on card stock or paper heavier than 120 g m 35 Ib or leave the printer default set to duplex on Damage to the printer might result Do not attempt to use the stacker or stapler stacker with card stock ET NOTE Printing on heavier paper might be possible if the tray is not filled to capacity and if short grain paper that has a smoothness rating of 100 to 180 Sheffield is used Card stock construction Card stock construction m Smoothness Card stock should have smoothness in the range of 100 to 180 Sheffield m Construction Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm 0 2 inch of curl It should be short grain paper to improve feeding and reduce wear on the printer m Condition Make sure that card stock is not wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged m Sizes Use only card stock within the following size ranges m Minimum 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches m Maximum 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Before loading card stock in tray 1 make sure that it is regular in shape and not damaged Also make sure that the cards are not stuck together Card stock guidelines m If cards curl or jam try
445. tapler stacker is in use the dc controller PCA sends page information for example the paper size or whether the page is the first or last page of the job to the stacker or stapler stacker Figure 5 19 Stacker and stapler stacker paper path 1 Stapler stacker 2 Stacker Figure 5 20 Power on sequence for the stacker and stapler stacker illustrates the power on sequence for the stacker and stapler stacker Stacker and stapler stacker 137 CPU initialization Stacker amp stapler stacker ID check Optional interface communication ready T Failure check Optional interface communication start y e Stapler stacker Stapler motor initial drive Y Stapler homeposition check E I I I I I I l Check residual I paper in the printer I Jogger motor initial drive I I I I I I I I I Jogger guide homeposition check paddle motor check initial drive l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l y l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Feed motor initial drive Stand by Figure 5 20 Power on sequence for the stacker and stapler stacker 138 5 Theory of operation Stacker The dc controller PCA controls the stacker and sends signals to the stacker driver PCA The stacker driver PCA then controls the operation of the stacker components such as the stacker motor solenoi
446. tches described however the user can define the media size for the tray by using the control panel see Paper handling menu In this case the printer might not detect the media size correctly if the size that the user defined does not match the tray settings To prevent a false size detection the printer measures the time it takes for the media to pass through the printer and determines the size of media that was fed from the tray When the measured size differs from the user defined size or from the media size switches a message appears on the control panel display see Alphabetical printer messages Lifter driver operation The lifter driver keeps the tray 2 media stack surface at a specific level in order to have a stabilized pickup operation regardless of the size of the media in the tray 2 cassette The dc controller PCA operates the lifter driver motor M103 for 50 seconds The motor stops when the paper stack position sensor PS107 detects the media If the paper stack position sensor does not detect any media within 8 seconds after the lifting operation has begun the dc controller PCA determines that a lifter driver motor failure has occurred and a message appears on the control panel display see Alphabetical printer messages or Numerical printer messages The dc controller PCA stops the lifting operation if the paper stack position sensor detects that the tray 2 cassette is missing 5 Theory of operation Multiple feed
447. ted 1 Acceptable envelope construction Unacceptable envelope construction Envelopes that have adhesive strips or flaps Envelopes that have a peel off adhesive strip or more than one flap that folds over to seal must contain adhesives that are compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and might even damage the fuser Envelope margins The following are typical address margins for a commercial 10 or DL envelope Type of address Top margin Left margin Return address 15 mm 0 6 inch 15 mm 0 6 inch Delivery address 51 mm 2 0 inches 89 mm 3 5 inches ET NOTE For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm 0 6 inch from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope seams meet Envelope storage Appropriate envelope storage helps contribute to good print quality Envelopes should be stored flat If air is trapped in an envelope creating an air bubble then the envelope might wrinkle during printing Media specifications 35 36 Labels Use tray 1 to print on labels Labels are multiple layer media that typically consists of a face sheet the printable surface pressure sensitive adhesive and a liner a carrier sheet coated with a release agent Labels that are used in the HP LaserJet printer must be specifically designed for laser printers If other labels are used you risk lab
448. ter malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation information on the printer control panel alerts you to the situation This section contains an initial troubleshooting checklist that helps to eliminate many possible causes of the problem The subsequent troubleshooting flowchart helps you to diagnose the cause of the problem The remainder of the chapter provides steps for correcting the problems that have been identified m Use the initial troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem m Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the cause of malfunctions The flowchart lists the section within this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure check the following m Are supply items for example the print cartridge fuser and rollers within their rated life m Does the configuration page reveal any configuration problems See Configuration page ET NOTE The customer is responsible for checking and maintaining supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition The customer is responsible for media and print cartridge supplies The customer is also responsible for replacing the fuser transfer roller and all paper pickup feed and separation rollers tray 1 has a separation pad instead of a roller that are at or near the end of their 200 000 page rated life Initia
449. ter resets and power on modes nennen eren ete nennen nint n nnne 325 elle cl behest 325 To perform a cold reset ssssssssssssssssseeeeneeeeeeemennnnnnn 325 NVRAM initialization 5 p oett o Deed ere ette ois ctus 326 To3tritlalizeNVRAM iie teret rite tete PS 326 Hard disk initialization sessed eae nare oe nte dece eg doe idc edenda 327 To initialize the hard disk raas aa aa tienne nene ette mte ninh 327 Power ombypass nach aii vind eR e be el ede a aei tbe evel epum re dudas ro ead 328 Skip disk load 22 5 2 ee eee to trei ee irc teo EE 328 SOMA EE 328 Test pages acre eec etr tto ti e ete td to Cei ee be abe reet 329 Engirie testipage aeree od eeiam PNE 329 Formater test pagers jit nein En cem ee cime ders 330 Interface troubleshooting 0 n Rhet be RO HER NER EE RU QR ERR OUR RM EDROQ Pe ERU ge xa ede 331 Communications Checks iiit Hn pha rete acea Het Ide eite t iiid id E bed 331 Computer direct connect parallel test ssssss 331 ElO troubleshooting iori e E een od nine dvd aei eeii echoed Ld eds 331 Jetdirect page Embedded Jetdirect page HP LaserJet 4250 4350 Series ecc cc D 332 Display message troubleshooting ssssssseseeene nennen nennen enne 333 Status messages d be Ed put be fe d cur fea der ovv eed o bold col op ein eie Len ds 333 Warming messages tete ert ep pe ee Pe E Et aae 333 Error Me SSaG eS
450. ter section Installing a new formatter and a new dc controller LJ 4250 4350 only Failure to follow these instructions can result in a printer configuration downgrade For example an HP LaserJet 4350 printer could perform as an HP LaserJet 4250 Reinstallation notes formatter If you install a replacement formatter complete the following steps 1 2 Perform an NVRAM initialization see To initialize NVRAM Use the control panel display to open the service menu and specify the total page count the maintenance count the service ID the cold reset paper size and the serial number see Service menu service PIN codes Reset the printer display language to the customer s choice see Setting the control panel display language 6 Removing and replacing parts After installing a new formatter complete the following steps 1 Turn the printer on and then wait for five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state ET NOTE Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written 2 Turn the printer off 3 Turn the printer on again and then wait five minutes after the printer reaches the Ready state 4 Print a configuration page to verify against original settings Installing a new formatter and a new dc controller LJ 4250 4350 only ZN CAUTION If you are installing a new formatter and a new dc controller on an HP LaserJet 4250 or 4350 Series printer follow the instructions in thi
451. ter was first used rather than the date that a replacement formatter is installed See Restoring the Service ID m Cold reset Select this item to reset the default paper size when you replace the formatter or restore factory settings see Resets submenu When you replace a formatter or restore factory settings in a country region that uses A4 as the standard paper size use this item to reset the default paper size to A4 see Cold reset Letter and A4 are the only cold reset values available Control panel menus 323 324 Service ID When printing from an HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 Series printer this information appears on the configuration page see Configuration page which eliminates the need for customers to keep paper receipts for proof of the warranty Because the printer does not have an internal clock the availability of the service ID date depends on the printer being connected to a source that can provide the date in this case a time server on the same network as the printer When the printer is not connected to a date source the service ID is not available and 00000 appears on the configuration page Converting the Service ID to an actual date You can use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty Use the following procedure to convert the Service ID into the installation date 1 Add 1990 to YY to determine the actual year that the printer was installed 2 Divide DDD by 3
452. tes the staple cam Solenoid Deflector solenoid SL1101 Operates the delivery deflector Clamp solenoid SL1102 Operates the stapler clamp Sensor Paper inlet sensor PS1101 Detects jams Paper delivery sensor PS1102 Detects jams Paddle home position sensor PS1103 Detects whether the paddle is in the home position Delivery roller disengaging sensor PS1104 Detects the disengaging the delivery roller Jogger home position sensor PS1105 Determines whether the jogger guide is in the home position Delivery paper full sensor PS1106 Detects a full delivery bin Switch Door open switch SW1101 Detects an open door SEENEN 142 5 Theory of operation Table 5 6 Stapler stacker components continued Component Purpose Staple presence switch SW1102 Detects the presence of staples in the stapler cartridge Staple home position switch SW1103 Stapler stacker PCA Determines whether the stapler cam is in the home position Lei gt gt FLP SL PAPER INLET signal ENTER SNS PADDLE MOTOR DRIVE signal Stapler unit PS1101 OO Teea gc 90 do 2 05 zo re Zr S2 22 52 T E2 og D BO 9 Ro iro Soa o Ko SS g Za a oy a gt i OF 2r uj BEI GI 5 b Fa uo i Loi sO obs SS Of as rr A I e o B c 2 w lt Ca le E UI DI D uic x UI Ki mE a o 2 gt Q SE fa o T x co CH a LU gt 5 a l fr 5 a 2 2 a d a PS1105 9 V n i 7 Jogger guide Fan E UT Stamp Mer t
453. the connectors on the dc controller PCA Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Replace the formatter assembly See Formatter assembly 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages continued Control panel message 50 X FUSER ERROR For help press Description A fuser error has occurred X Description 1 low fuser temperature 2 fuser warmup service 3 fuser over temperature 4 faulty fuser 5 incorrect fuser is installed 6 open fuser circuit Recommended action 1 Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down 2 Verify that the correct model of fuser is installed 3 Verify that the correct voltage fuser is installed 4 Reinstall the fuser and check the connection between the fuser and the printer Replace the connector if it is damaged 5 Replace the fuser 6 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 7 Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 51 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 51 XY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on A printer error has occurred X Description 1 beam detect error 2 laser error 1 Press Y SeLect button to continue 2 Turn the printer off and then on 3 Reseatthe connectors between the laser scanner and dc controller PCA J83 and J84 4 Replace the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly
454. the tray 2 extension door e Top cover See Top cover e Right side cover See Right side cover e Formatter cover See Formatter cover Unplug two flat cables callout 1 and the main motor harness connector from the dc controller PCA locations J80 J81 and J98 Remove the cables from the cable guide callout 2 Figure 6 76 Main motor 1 of 2 255 256 4 Support the main motor callout 3 while removing three screws callout 4 and then lift the motor away from the printer e k W i 2 of 2 Figure 6 77 Main moto 6 Removing and replacing parts Pickup and feed assemblies Tray 1 paper pickup assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies Rear accessory cover See Accessory covers and the tray 2 extension door Top cover See Top cover Right side cover See Right side cover Formatter cover See Formatter cover Left side cover See Left side cover Tray 1 See Tray 1 2 Gently pry back the two retaining tabs callout 1 and slip the anti static bar callout 2 off of them Rotate the anti static bar away from the printer to release it Remove the anti static bar 3 Unplug the tray 1 pickup solenoid connector and the top cover sensor connector from the dc controller PCA locations J79 and J95 Unweave the harnesses from the wire guide callout 3 Mo d Hint You might have to remove additional wire harnesses from the wire guide to gain access to the solenoid a
455. ther than to the top output bin The stacker driver PCA also activates the stacker motor which rotates at the same speed as the printer main motor to rotate the feed and delivery rollers The feed roller moves the media into the stacker If the dc controller PCA sends a following page signal which indicates that the job contains another page the stacker driver PCA activates the deflector solenoid SL101 again The delivery roller moves the media into the delivery bin Stacker and stapler stacker 139 Stacker driver PCB 1S d14 eubis 3AIHQ GION310S HOLOx3 143 jeu amp is 3AIHQ HOLOW 0334 bi SNS AH D AH3AFrT3G HadVvd lt SNS T1n3 Tind Hadvd daAriad Psi10iC XC CO SNS H3 1N3 reu amp is LIINI Hid Vd D Figure 5 21 Stacker feed delivery diagram 5 Theory of operation 140 Stacker jam detection The stacker uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to verify whether the media is feeding correctly or is jamming For information about the location of these sensors see Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors m Paper inlet sensor PS1101 m Paper delivery sensor PS102 Stacker feed jam If the paper inlet sensor PS1101 does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specified period of time after the stacker driver has received the paper delivery signal the dc controller PCA determines that a stacker feed delay jam has oc
456. til the printer returns to the ready state The printer will be damaged if the power is turned off during a firmware upgrade REINSERT DUPLEXER REPLACE CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press The duplexer is not functioning The print cartridge is almost empty Printing can continue until the toner supply is depleted 1 Turn off the printer 2 Remove and then reinstall the accessory 3 Turnon the printer 4 Check the rear accessory power connector 5 If the error persists replace the duplexer 1 Replace the print cartridge to continue printing 2 Press Hep button for detailed information 7 Troubleshooting Table 7 6 Alphabetical printer messages continued Control panel message Description Recommended action 3 Press 4 Up Arrow button and V Down Arrow button to step through the instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server If this error persists replace the power supply assembly See Power supply Resend upgrade The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully Attempt the upgrade again SIZE MISMATCH IN TRAY XX For help press alternates with Ready For menus press Y The tray is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size setting for the tray Adjust the side and rear paper guides against the stack From the control panel set the tray 1 pap
457. tion and then press Y to select it Display message troubleshooting 347 Numerical printer messages When resolving printer messages perform all listed actions in the order until the message is resolved Numerical printer messages Table 7 7 Numerical printer messages Control panel message Description Recommended action 10 XX YY SUPPLY10 XX YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR 10 XX YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR For help press The printer canot read the electronic information e label on the print cartridge in order to keep track of the page count for the print cartridge XX Description 00 memory error on the cartridge 10 memory device not found YY Description 00 black print cartridge 1 Open the top cover remove the print cartridge and then reinstall it See Print cartridge 2 Install a new HP print cartridge 3 Checkthe connection between the dc controller PCA location J97 and the memory chip on the print cartridge location J600 4 Replace the memory chip cable and contact assembly 5 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 13 XX YY DUPLEX JOB INTERRUPTED For help press alternates with 13 XX YY DUPLEX JOB INTERRUPTED Discard top sheet and press Y 13 XX YY DUPLEX JOB INTERRUPTED Discard top two sheets and press Y A duplex job was physically interrupted as the paper was momentarily routed to the output bin during duplexing This error is usually
458. tion explains each control panel display message and suggests recommendations for resolving the cause of each message When the printer message indicates a failure for which the root cause is not obvious use the troubleshooting process section and the troubleshooting tools section in this chapter to solve the problem See Display message troubleshooting Paper path troubleshooting This section provides information to help solve feed problems including print media checks jam troubleshooting checks and information about media caused and printer caused jams See Paper path troubleshooting Image formation troubleshooting This section explains methods for solving print quality problems See Image formation troubleshooting Stacker and stapler stacker troubleshooting This section provides information about solving stacker and stapler stacker problems See Troubleshooting the stacker and the stapler stacker Printer and accessory components This section contains illustrations and tables that list the printer and accessory internal components See Printer component locations and Accessory component locations Printer and accessory wiring diagrams This section contains wiring diagrams for the printers and accessories See Printer and accessory wiring diagrams General timing diagrams This section contains timing diagrams for the printer See General timing diagrams 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting process When the prin
459. to 80 10 to 90 relative humidity mI 1 Product information Media specifications This section contains information about the sizes weights and amount of media that each tray supports General guidelines Some print media might meet all of the guidelines in this manual and still not produce satisfactory results This problem might be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which HP has no control Before purchasing large quantities of print media always test a sample and make sure that the print media meets the requirements specified in the electronic user guide on the device installation CD and in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide For ordering information see Ordering parts and supplies AN CAUTION Using print media that does not meet HP specifications can cause problems for the printer requiring repair This repair is not covered by the HP warranty or service agreements This printer accepts a variety of media such as cut sheet paper including up to 100 recycled fiber content paper envelopes labels transparencies HP LaserJet Tough paper and custom size paper Properties such as weigh
460. to the 50 LOG most recent events Use 4 Ur Arrow button or V Down Arrow button to scroll through the event log contents PAPER PATH TEST PRINT TEST PAGE Use this item to generate a test page that is useful for testing the paper handling features of the printer SOURCE PRINT TEST PAGE Press Y Sriecr button to start the DESTINATION paper path test that uses the source tray destination output bin duplex and number of copies settings that you DUPLEX set in the other items on the Paper Path Test menu Set the COPIES other items before selecting PRINT TEST PAGE SOURCE Select the tray that uses the paper path that you want to test You can select any tray that is installed Select ALL TRAYS to test all tray paper paths Paper must be loaded in the selected trays DESTINATION Select the output bin that uses the paper path that you want to test You can select any output bin that is installed Optional bins stacker or stapler stacker bin must also be correctly configured in the printer driver Select ALL BINS to test all paper paths DUPLEX Determine whether the paper goes through the duplexer during the paper path test This item is available only if the duplexer is installed COPIES Set how many sheets of paper are used from each tray during the paper path test If you are testing the optional stapler stacker DESTINATION item select 10 or more sheets 3 Operation 4 Maintenance Chapter contents Chapter contents
461. to the standard printer command language PCL With standard cabling use PJL to perform a variety of functions such as the following m Two way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection The printer can send the host computer information about such things as the control panel settings and the control panel settings can be changed from the host through two way communication a Dynamic I O switching The printer can be configured with a host on each I O by using dynamic l O switching Even when the printer is offline it can receive data from more than one I O simultaneously until the I O buffer is full m Context sensitive switching The printer can automatically recognize the personality PS or PCL of each job and configure itself in that personality m Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next For example if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape mode the subsequent print jobs are prinedt in landscape mode only if they are formatted for it 5 Theory of operation PML The printer management language PML allows remote configuration and status readback through the I O ports Control panel The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from a control panel PCA Formatter system 165 166 5 Theory of operation 6 Removing and replacing parts Chapter contents Chapter contents Removal and replacement strategy User
462. tor between the fan and the dc controller PCA location J78 2 Replace the fan See Cooling fan right side HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 Series printers only 3 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 57 4 Main fan error F1 1 Reconnect the connector between the fan and the power supply 2 Verify that the ribbon cables are fully seated in the connectors on the dc controller PCA 3 Replace the fan See Main cooling fan left side 4 Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 5 Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA 57 7 duplex fan failure The cooling fan in the optional duplexer is not functioning 1 Turn the printer off and then on 2 Replace the duplexer 58 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 58 X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on Display message troubleshooting A memory error has been detected X Description 2 air temperature sensor 3 Dc controller 4 power supply Turn the printer off and then on 58 2 Air temperature sensor 1 Turn the printer off and then on 2 Reconnect the connector between the air temperature sensor the bar mounted across the main cooling fan on the left side of the printer and the power supply location J63 3 Replace the air temperature sensor See Main cooling fan left side 4 Replace the power supply assembly See Power supply 58 3 Dc controller 1 Replace th
463. tray 1 pickup solenoid from the dc controller PCA location J79 2 Measure the resistance between the cable connectors 3 If the measured resistance is not approximately 160 ohms for the HP LaserJet 4200 4300 or 110 ohms for the HP LaserJet 4250 4350 replace the tray 1 pickup solenoid The tray 1 pickup assembly is defective Replace the tray 1 paper pickup assembly See Tray 1 paper pickup assembly The dc controller PCA is defective Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Damaged gears in the cassette pick up drive unit Move the gears in the cassette pick up drive unit If the gears are not rotating correctly or are damaged or worn replace the cassette pick up drive unit Dirty worn or deformed feed roller Clean the feed roller If it is dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the pickup roller Defective feed roller clutch Disconnect the connector J89 Measure the resistance between the cable side connectors J89 1 and J89 3 If it is not about 145 ohms replace the feed roller clutch Paper path troubleshooting 371 372 Jams in tray 2 Table 7 10 Causes of tray 2 jams Cause Solution The feed or separation rollers are dirty worn or damaged Clean the rollers If they are dirty after cleaning or if they are worn or damaged replace the rollers The pickup roller is worn or damaged Replace the pickup roller The tray 2 pa
464. tronic components in the printer turns off the display backlight but the display is still readable The printer automatically comes out of Sleep mode when you send a print job press a printer control panel button open a tray or open the top cover To turn sleep mode on and off see Sleep Mode in the Resets submenu HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only PERSONALITY AUTO PDF HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only PS PCL Use this item to select the default printer language personality The possible values are determined by which valid languages are installed in the printer Normally you should not change the printer language If you change it to a specific printer language the printer will not switch automatically from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the printer CLEARABLE WARNINGS AUTO CONTINUE JOB ON Use this item to set the amount of time that a clearable warning appears on the printer control panel display JOB The clearable warning message appears until the end of the job that generated the message ON The clearable warning message appears until you press Y Select button Use this item to specify how the printer reacts to errors If the printer is on a network you probably want to turn AUTO CONTINUE to ON ON If an error occurs that prevents printing the message appears on the printer control panel display and the printer goes offline for 10 seconds b
465. u install the pickup assembly verify that the grounding spring located on the right side of the assembly near the drive gear is correctly positioned against the dimple in the chassis EE Figure 6 82 Correct position of the tray 1 pickup assembly grounding spring 260 6 Removing and replacing parts Paper feed assembly 1 Remove the following assemblies e Tray 1 See Tray 1 e Tray 1 pickup assembly See Tray 1 paper pickup assembly 2 Unplug the paper feed assembly wire harness connector from the dc controller PCA location J89 and then unweave the wire harness from the cable guide D ag Hint You might have to remove additional wire harnesses from the wire guides to gain Sr access to the paper feed assembly wire harness 3 Feed the paper feed assembly wire harness through the hole in the chassis callout 1 4 Remove three screws callout 2 Figure 6 83 Paper feed assembly 5 Lift the paper feed assembly out of the printer Pickup and feed assemblies 261 262 Reinstallation notes for the paper feed assembly Make sure that the clutch tab on the right side of the paper feed assembly is inserted into the hole in the plastic frame Make sure that the wire harnesses are fed through the hole in the plastic frame When the paper feed assembly is installed the sensor flag spring must be correctly positioned so that the flag can operate If a paper jam error message 13 20 00 JAM appears on th
466. u selected first but allows the printer to pull from another tray automatically if the tray that you selected is empty MANUAL FEED PROMPT Use this item to specify when the printer shows a prompt regarding pulling from tray 1 if your print job does not match the type or size that is loaded in any other tray m ALWAYS Select this option if you always want to be prompted before the printer pulls from tray 1 a UNLESS LOADED The printer prompts you only if tray 1 is empty 3 Operation Item Values Explanation PS DEFER MEDIA Use this item to control whether the PostScript PS or HP paper handling model is used to print jobs ENABLED causes PS to defer to the HP paper handling model DISABLED uses the PS paper handling model SIZE TYPE PROMPT Use this item to control whether the tray configuration message and its prompts are shown whenever a tray is opened and closed These prompts instruct you to set the type or size if the tray is configured for a type or size other than the type or size that is loaded in the tray SLEEP DELAY HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only POWERSAVE TIME HP LaserJet 4200 4200L 4300 only 15 MINUTES 30 MINUTES 60 MINUTES 90 MINUTES 2 HOURS 4 HOURS Use this item to set how long the printer remains idle before it enters Sleep mode Sleep mode offers the following advantages x Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer when it is idle m Reduces wear on elec
467. ual leftover toner is cleaned off of the transfer charging roller and photosensitive drum so that subsequent images are crisp and clear Because not all of the toner is attracted to the media when the image is transferred from the drum some toner remains on the drum Toner can also remain on the transfer roller if a jam occurs and the transfer of toner to the media is not completed A dc negative bias charge is applied to the transfer charging roller that is opposite the photosensitive drum which causes the residual toner to be attracted to the drum A cleaning blade is in contact with the surface of the drum at all times As the drum rotates during printing excess toner from the transfer charging roller and drum are scraped off and stored in the waste toner receptacle Transfer charging roller Residual toner T T Figure 5 42 Cleaning the transfer charging roller Cleaning the photosensitive drum Waste toner compartment Cleaning blade Figure 5 43 Cleaning the photosensitive drum Image formation system 159 160 Print cartridge memory chip The print cartridge memory chip is a non volatile memory NVRAM device that is built into the print cartridge It stores information about the cartridge The dc controller PCA reads and writes memory data to the memory chip at specific times to monitor the print cartridge usage and condition If the read write process fails four times in a row the dc controller PCA detects a pri
468. uct a ESD Required tools 168 2 Phillips screwdriver Small flat blade screwdriver Needle nose pliers ESD mat if available see the ESD caution above Penlight optional Tape optional Transfer roller removal hook CAUTION Using a pozidriv screwdriver will damage screw heads on the product Use a 2 Phillips screwdriver 6 Removing and replacing parts Before performing service If possible print a menu map and configuration page See Menu map and Configuration page Remove all of the accessories and print media the print cartridge and tray 2 from the product Unplug the power cord from the power outlet at the wall receptacle Place the product on an ESD mat if one is available If an ESD protected workstation is not available discharge body static by grasping the printer chassis before touching an ESD sensitive component Ground the printer chassis before servicing the product After completing service Reinstall the print cartridge remove the print cartridge before returning the printer to the customer Reconnect all cables to the product Replace all of the accessories and load the media Print a configuration page and verify that the latest firmware is installed on the printer See Downloading a remote firmware update Removal and replacement strategy 169 170 Screws used in the printer This table describes the screws that are used in the printer and provides guidelines to help
469. uctions for removing and replacing orderable solenoids and clutches ud CL101 1 e a SL 101 Tray 2 pickup solenoid SL 102 Tray 1 pickup solenoid CL 101 Feed roller clutch 274 6 Removing and replacing parts Tray 2 pickup solenoid SL101 1 Remove the paper pickup drive assembly See Paper pickup drive assembly 2 Remove one screw callout 1 that secures the tray 2 pickup solenoid callout 2 to the paper pickup drive assembly Figure 6 96 Tray 2 pickup solenoid 3 Lift tray 2 pickup solenoid off of the paper pickup drive assembly Solenoids and clutches 275 276 Tray 1 pickup solenoid SL102 1 Remove the tray 1 paper pickup assembly See Tray 1 paper pickup assembly 2 Remove one screw callout 1 that secures the tray 1 pickup solenoid callout 2 to the tray 1 paper pickup assembly Figure 6 97 Tray 1 pickup solenoid 3 Lift the tray 1 pickup solenoid off of the tray 1 paper pickup assembly 6 Removing and replacing parts Feed roller clutch CL101 1 Remove the paper feed assembly See Paper feed assembly 2 Remove one e ring callout 1 and slide the gear callout 2 off of the shaft 3 Slide the feed roller clutch callout 3 off of the shaft Figure 6 98 Feed roller clutch Solenoids and clutches 277 Accessories The following sections describe the printer accessories 500 sheet feeder assembly The following sections describe the parts of the 500 she
470. uide dc controller LU 4200 4300 RC1 0386 000CN RC1 0271 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Internal components 1 of 3 Guide dc controller LJ 4250 4350 RC1 3340 000CN Internal components 1 of 3 Guide ECU rear RC1 0244 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Guide flat cable RC1 0269 020CN Internal components 1 of 3 Guide flat cable RC1 0270 020CN Internal components 1 of 3 Guide left RC1 0273 000CN Internal components 3 of 3 Guide power supply front RC1 0243 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Guide right RC1 0274 020CN Internal components 3 of 3 Guide scanner cable RC1 0340 020CN Internal components 2 of 3 Guide scanner cable Alphabetical parts list RC1 0385 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 497 Table 8 21 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Guide tray 2 Part number RC1 0153 030CN Table and page Internal components 2 of 3 Holder paper pickup arm RC1 0212 000CN Internal components 2 of 3 Holder paper sensing RC1 0208 030CN Internal components 2 of 3 Holder thermistor metal RC1 0343 020CN Internal components 3 of 3 Holder thermistor plastic RC1 0342 020CN Internal components 3 of 3 Kicker assembly RL1 0015 000CN Internal components 2 of 3
471. ulatory Model Number BOISB 0202 00 invent 110 127V_ AC Numero du produit 50 60 Hz 3 8A 3 8A C Product No Q2425A Tested To Comply With FCC Standards LISTED FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE LTE This product conforms with 5320 CDRH radiation performance US standard 21 CFR chapter 1 sub chapter J September 30 2002 TATE Complies with Canadian EMC VCI NO M D 1 Class B requirements NYCE Conforme la Classe B des normes Canadiennes de compatibilit letromagn tiques lt lt CEM gt gt SITE XXX gt PET lt 1 Product information Printer overview Hardware components Before working with the printer familiarize yourself with its parts Figure 1 2 Hardware components front view 1 Top output bin 2 Control panel 3 Tray 1 pull to open 4 Tray 2 5 On off switch 6 Right side panel provides access to DIMMs and CompactFlash cards 7 Top cover cartridge access door Printer overview 9 10 Figure 1 3 Hardware components rear view 8 Interface ports see Interface ports 9 Slot for optional duplexer 10 Rear output bin pull to open 1 Product information Interface ports The printer has five ports two EIO slots and three ports for connecting to a computer or a network Figure 1 4 Interface ports HP LaserJet 4250 is shown 1 EIO slot 2 2 Diagnostic LED
472. um The lifter motor raises the plate in the tray cassette Two fan motors rotate the left and right side fans Table 5 2 Printer fans and motors Component Purpose Type Rotation Speed Main motor M101 Drives the tray cassette pickup Dc Counterclockwise Two speed full HP LaserJet 4200 and roller feed separation roller tray 1 and half speed 4200L Series printers pickup roller pre transfer roller photosensitive drum developing cylinder pressure roller and output delivery roller Main motor M101 Drives the tray cassette pickup Dc Counterclockwise Two speed full HP LaserJet 4250 4300 roller feed separation roller tray 1 and half speed and 4350 Series printers pickup roller pre transfer roller pressure roller and output delivery roller Print cartridge motor Drives the transfer charging roller Dc Counterclockwise Two speed full M102 photosensitive drum and and half speed HP LaserJet 4250 4300 developing cylinder and 4350 Series printers Lifter motor M103 all Moves the tray cassette lifting plate Dc Counterclockwise Single speed printer models up and down Left side cooling fan Cools the inside of the printer Dc NA Two speed full FN101 all printer models and half speed Right side cooling fan Cools the inside of the printer Dc NA Single speed FN102 HP LaserJet 4250 4300 and 4350 Series printers General descriptions 109 110 Power supply The power supply consists of
473. umeric codes for printer events 3 Personalities and options Lists installed personalities and options such as PS and PCL languages and installed optional DIMM s or EIO accessories E P P J 312 7 Troubleshooting 4 Memory Lists the printer memory and UO buffering and resource saving information 5 Security Lists the status of the control panel lock control panel password and any disk drives 6 Paper trays and options Lists the size and type settings for all trays and lists optional paper handling accessories that are installed Troubleshooting tools 313 Supplies status page Use the supplies status page to obtain information about the print cartridge that is installed in the printer the amount of life left in the print cartridge and the number of pages and jobs that have been processed The page also lets you know when you should perform the next preventive maintenance 1 Press v Select button or the Menu button to open the menus 2 Use 4 Up Arrow button or Y Down Arrow button to scroll to INFORMATION and then press v D 3 Use A or v to scroll to PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE and then press v Figure 7 4 Supplies status page HP LaserJet 4200 4300 supplies status page is shown 1 Supplies Web site Lists the Web site for ordering supplies over the Internet
474. ure 7 30 500 sheet feeder wiring diagram 7 Troubleshooting 430 1 500 sheet feeder wiring diagram Josues uorjoejep sedeg Josues eoeyins xyoejs Jeded siorr x LH z Her S K fe Y us Ge ji 90011 vorr Xf Ber z aet K D cus SNSLXAd ONS 8ASd SNS14d d ONS c8ASd uos uonoejep ezis jedeg a e lt cooLr ONG azis SvO e3zis Sv9 HERE 40 0UJ J347 his piousjos dn yoid yoap sedeq CTT 20 0168 9Svt 2zel SEEEEEEEEE EI EEEEEEEEER onzo ovog m lt 82d JeAup xoep jedeqd 8 E O D o Sod e o 99 985936 69 SECH ton 023 voor Dasz p KAXI 1 e fz ji aalriclet t fe fe T Erorr DER Lier Le Lys visolr T gent Josues uedo 100q soir 19p 4 1eded Jo Jeyud oj Figure 7 31 1 500 sheet feeder wiring diagram 431 Printer and accessory wiring diagrams Duplex accessory wiring diagram Josues dn yoid yun Burxejdng Josues dn eoe4 ue jsneuxe un Burxejdng LOZIN L jz Je XXI SoL mmo orz z 9 S evar 3 Li i 95 SNSXIId z Sh QNO HON21d LK i Sa SNSdN4 Od Jenup Burxejdng L04Sd zb QN9 1 Ha nd voZr PLAT A oooo L cccc L BEER e ENTE e gt U K
475. ure that the printer is installed in an area that meets the environmental specifications See Operating environment Reseat the cables that are connected to the laser scanner assembly The cables are not securely connected to the dc controller PCA Reseat the cables that are connected to the dc controller PCA The laser scanner assembly is defective Replace the laser scanner See Laser scanner assembly The gears are worn Inspect the gears that drive the print cartridge and fuser Replace the main drive assembly See Main drive assembly Image formation troubleshooting The print cartridge motor is defective HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only The dc controller PCA is defective Possible cause The media does not meet specifications or is not stored properly Replace the print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 only See Print cartridge motor HP LaserJet 4250 4300 4350 series printer only Replace the dc controller PCA See Dc controller PCA Recommended action s 1 Turn over the stack of media in the tray Also try rotating the media 180 degrees 2 Check the media for type and quality Replace the media if it does not meet specifications and advise the customer to use the HP recommended media and to store it correctly See Media specifications 391 Table 7 29 Skew continued Possible cause Recommended action s The medi
476. usly in a printer or copier An input tray is loaded incorrectly Remove any excess media from the input tray Make sure that the stack of media fits below the indicators inside of the tray The print media is skewed The tray guides are not adjusted correctly Adjust the guides to hold the media firmly in place without bending it If media heavier than 120 g m 32 Ib is loaded into tray 2 tray 3 or tray 4 the media might skew The print media is binding or sticking together Remove the media and flex it rotate it 180 or flip it over Reload the media into the tray Do not fan media The print media is removed before it settles into the output bin Wait until the page completely exits the output delivery assembly before you attempt to remove the it When you are using the duplex print feature the print media is removed before the second side of the document is printed Print the document again During the duplex operation the page will partially protrude from the output delivery assembly when the page is being reversed Do not attempt to grab or remove the page Wait until the page completely exits the output delivery assembly before you attempt to remove the it The print media is in poor condition Replace the print media The print media is not picked up by the internal rollers from Trays 2 3 or 4 Remove the top sheet of media If the media is heavier than 120 g m 32 Ib it migh
477. ut further interaction with the printer or computer ET NOTE The printer automatically turns off and then turns on again to activate the update 95 Remote firmware update using FTP through a browser Follow these instructions to use FTP through a browser to update the printer firmware remotely ET NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems 1 Open a browser window 2 Inthe address line of the browser type ftp IPADDRESS where lt IPADDRESS gt is the TCP IP address of your printer For example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type FTP 192 168 0 90 3 Locate the RFU file for the printer 4 Drag and drop the RFU file onto the PORT icon in the browser window 96 4 Maintenance Remote firmware update using Fetch Mac OS 8 6 and OS 9 x only For Mac OS 8 6 through 9 x a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a Put command Download and install the program from http download cnet com downloads 0 10207 100 5250613 html Follow these instructions to use Fetch 1 2 3 4 Start the program by clicking the Fetch icon Type the IP address of the printer in the Host box Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the RFU file Double click the file to select it and download it to the printer A confirmation message appears in the main window Click OK Remote firmware update using Fetch Mac OS 8 6 and OS 9 x only
478. ve Replace the stapler stacker The STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES or STAPLER OUT OF STAPLES message appears on the control panel display but the stapler unit contains a staple cartridge stapler stacker only m The staple cartridge contains no staples Replace the staple cartridge See Loading staples m Replace the stapler unit See To remove and replace the stapler unit m The stapler stacker PCA is defective Replace the stapler stacker A 13 XX YY JAM message appears on the control panel display but no jam is visible in the stacker or stapler stacker m Theinlet sensor PS1101 lever does not move smoothly or is damaged See Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors Inspect the inlet sensor Verify that the sensor lever can move freely m The delivery sensor PS1102 lever does not move smoothly or is damaged See Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors Inspect the delivery sensor Verify that the sensor lever can move freely m If necessary replace the stacker or stapler stacker Troubleshooting the stacker and the stapler stacker 407 408 Table 7 45 Component error troubleshooting continued Possible cause Recommended action s The OUTPUT PAPER PATH OPEN message appears on D the control panel display but the jam access and stapler unit doors are closed The door open switch SW1101 is damaged or defective See Stacker and stapler stacker switches and sensors Replace
479. ve Job menu This menu provides a list of the stored jobs in the printer and access to all of the job storage features You can print or delete these jobs at the printer control panel ET NOTE If you turn the printer power off all stored jobs are deleted unless an optional hard disk is installed The section that follows lists the settings and possible values In the Values column the default value for each setting is the one that has an asterisk next to it Item Values Explanation PRINT STORED JOB There is no value to select Use this item to print a page showing all jobs stored on the device LIST USERNAME JOBNAME The USERNAME is the name of the person who sent the job ALL PRIVATE JOBS The JOBNAME is the name of the job stored in the printer NO STORED JOBS Select one of your jobs or all of your private jobs those that were assigned a PIN in the printer driver m Print Prints the selected job PIN REQUIRED TO PRINT A prompt that appears for jobs that were assigned a personal identification number PIN in the printer driver You must type the PIN to print the job COPIES You can select the number of copies that you want to print 1 to 32000 m Delete Deletes the selected job from the printer PIN REQUIRED TO DELETE A prompt that appears for jobs that were assigned a PIN in the printer driver You must type the PIN to delete the job ALL PRIVATE JOBS Appears if two or more private jobs are st
480. ver removing 192 521 top output bin locating 9 settings 69 transfer roller image formation operations 153 locating 411 operations 106 replacing 177 transparencies fuser modes 71 print quality troubleshooting 378 specifications 36 tray 1 custom size settings 69 jam detection operations 123 jams 371 locating 9 paper sensor PS105 removing 272 paper supported 26 paper pickup assembly removing 257 pickup and feed operations 114 117 pickup assembly 410 pickup assembly diagrams and part numbers 480 pickup roller locating 411 pickup roller replacing 179 pickup solenoid SL 102 removing 276 printing from 74 registration settings 71 removing 200 separation pad replacing 181 setting size 64 settings 64 tray 2 custom size settings 69 extension door removing 187 feed rollers replacing 182 jam detection operations 123 jams 372 lifter drive assembly removing 227 media size detection 119 media size sensor PS101 removing 269 522 paper specifications 27 pickup and feed operations 114 119 pickup solenoid SL101 removing 275 printing from 74 registration settings 71 settings 65 trays cabinet stand unlocking 172 configuration page 312 custom size settings 69 included 2 locating 9 media supported 26 paper path test 80 369 paper specifications 27 28 pickup and feed operations 114 125 registration settings 71 selecting 74 settings 64 specifications 25 troubleshooting about 302 black pages
481. verlay control panel EN DE FR NL LJ 4250 4350 Overlay control panel FR LJ 4250 4350 Overlay control panel AR LJ 4250 4350 Name plate kit LJ 4200 Name plate kit LJ 4300 Name plate kit LJ 4200L Name plate kit LJ 4200Ln Name plate kit LJ 4250 Name plate kit LJ 4350 Screw tapping pan head m4x10 Part number Q5400 60103 Q5400 60104 Q5400 60105 Q5400 60106 Q5400 60107 Q5400 60108 Q5400 60109 Q5400 601 11 Q2425 67901 Q2431 67908 Q3993 40001 Q3994 40004 Q5400 67911 Q5406 67912 XB4 7401 007CN Qty 8 Parts and diagrams Covers 461 8 Parts and diagrams Figure 8 6 Internal components 1 of 3 462 Internal components Table 8 8 Internal components 1 of 3 Ref Description Part number Qty 2 Spring torsion RC1 0061 000CN 1 3 Transfer roller LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0699 020CN 1 3 Transfer roller LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1110 000CN 1 4 Guide flat cable RC1 0269 020CN 1 5 Guide flat cable RC1 0270 020CN 1 6 Motor print cartridge M102 8 pin LJ 4250 4350 RK2 0274 000CN 1 6 Motor print cartridge M102 8 pin LJ 4300 RH7 1576 020CN 1 7 Motor main M101 10 pin LJ4200 4300 RH7 1570 000CN 1 7 Motor main M101 10 pin LJ4250 4350 RK2 0272 000CN 1 8 E ring XD9 0232 000CN 1 9 Gear 14t 30t RU5 0015 000CN 1 10 Screw s m3x8 XA9 1500 000CN 17 11 Screw tapping m3x6 XA9 1503 000CN 6 16 Flag paper feed sensor RC1 0060 000CN 1 17 Rod fan 2 LJ 4300
482. vud oN LAG RE m mm 8 b S e Su xoovud z LL WMdld ure 9 15 gm 3 5 SE CRT Ze Le Wudpa Tt JO me sie HE toss 5 Zsrl t r 4 4s y Fle zens 5 Se Ui S o ONS v L P no Y SES u inosdo EIS i z E Ene B T Es Ce En C once NISdO 7 L 17 l Ca ee SLL JS 8 8R em zs AE erg EFH 8 A66 wiosdo iT 8 ga 9 ot 3 as 5 5 Fk CS Gan ASE I8 EH P NO z g8 SL HH ow SZ 58 oy 5 288 QNO rent ETH ano 3 SS m EG 7 ZS SZ GND Zea i Zano SS E SS e 5 5 GND 9881 SET wave 5 A Eee E ur rel wu AR S E we eo 2 Lr S 85 a YA 8 S zs as 8 5 Eg E NOW 28 SSC mc ure Ce 5 5 3 ST 2 8 3 k 3 S E83 e LO E eiP oi 2 9ror29 amp 8 zeia eg amp SEG ERAS a jo E E ga i3 E a d m SED E Sean i amp et Mass lg 7 4 535 3 amp Hr UO Wid 9 1s DUS aj Og 82 s E HOSNS i 585 5 5 SS SNSLSO 4 Z ZOLLS Kloe o So mE g ano site GU Thess 8s o9 ic 5 IGSNSISO S zH e 52 Kik TE 5 Deng ee HEEL tERS 8 BS Ov 2 THH Z NIS QN 2 a 2 ES E T E EHHE 1nosao 13ZIS1S5 Z H E 2 l t4 D ONS AZISLSO LL x DC Z Z Hr 0 o ELLE ra a L SF 46 2139 3 a E Ul 9 9 uve 2 3 5 3 8 S gt IUE F SS ea Tm f Ss 7 27 HP LaserJet 4250 wiring diagra Figure 7 iri iagrams Printer and accessory wiring diag 427 HP LaserJet 4300 wiring diagram
483. with an asterisk next to it Item DATE TIME HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only Values DATE DATE FORMAT TIME TIME FORMAT Explanation Use this item to set the date and time settings JOB STORAGE 1 to 100 32 Use this item to specify the number of quick copy jobs that can be stored on the printer This item appears only if an LIMIT optional hard disk accessory is installed JOB HELD OFF Use this item to set the amount of time that held jobs are kept before being automatically deleted from the queue TIMEOUT 1 HOUR 4 HOURS 1 DAY 1 WEEK SHOW ADDRESS AUTO Use this item to define whether or not the printer address will HP LaserJet 4250 4350 be shown on the display with the Ready message if the only OFF device is connected to a network TRAY BEHAVIOR USE REQUESTED TRAY MANUAL FEED PROMPT PS DEFER MEDIA HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only SIZE TYPE PROMPT HP LaserJet 4250 4350 only Use this item to specify how the printer responds to jobs that request certain trays USE REQUESTED TRAY Use this item to specify whether the printer tries to pull paper from a tray that is different than the one that you selected in the printer driver m EXCLUSIVELY Use this option to set the printer to pull paper only from the tray that you selected and not pull from another tray even if the tray that you selected is empty xm FIRST Use this option to set the printer to pull from the tray that yo
484. wn Internal components Description Dc controller LJ 4200 Dc controller LJ 4250 4350 Dc controller LJ 4300 Formatter assembly LJ 4200 printer Formatter assembly LJ 4200L printer Formatter assembly LJ 4250 4350 printer base model Formatter assembly LJ 4250 4350 printer network models Formatter assembly LJ 4300 printer Part number RG1 4236 040CN RM1 1108 000CN RG1 4237 040CN C9652 67902 C9652 67903 Q3653 67901 Q3652 67901 C9651 67901 Qty NOTE Callout 2 indicates the electrical components assemblies See Figure 8 9 Electrical components for components and part numbers 483 Accessories Figure 8 14 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 8 Parts and diagrams 484 Table 8 16 500 sheet feeder 1 of 2 Ref Description Part number Qty 500 sheet feeder and tray Q2440 67903 1 1 Lifter drive assembly 500 sheet feeder RM1 1094 000CN 1 2 Paper pickup drive assembly 500 sheet feeder RM1 0056 000CN 1 3 500 sheet universal replacement tray LJ 4200 4300 RM1 0028 060CN 1 3 500 sheet universal replacement tray LJ 4250 4350 RM1 1088 000CN 1 not Stop detent RC1 3303 000CN 1 shown not Limiter torque RC1 3335 000CN 1 shown Accessories 485 TEA VKM A Figure 8 15 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 8 Parts and diagrams 486 Table 8 17 500 sheet feeder 2 of 2 Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover front upper 5
485. y statement The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation A WARNING Using controls making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation Canadian DOC statement Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements Conforme ala classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagn tiques CEM Japanese VCCI statement Old TRS SSSA Atlin VCC OR LR DS AB TREE Cd CORBIS SES CET Sc c BIL CU d d CORES VS OTLA VISRIGTEL T He hat seuEEEnA RBS dori dd TY B BAR Ci CIEL ORY HAVEL C Fe Korean EMI statement APSA CLS BE lb o AVE WaSSoe xmas JEN FAAA BEE MSS UEU Country region specific safety statements Finnish laser statement LASERTURVALLISUUS LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT HP LaserJet 4200 4200n 42

HP LaserJet 4200/4250/4300/4350 series Printers Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents